Sony DSC-F828 Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL

DIGITAL STILL CAMERA

• INSTRUCTION MANUAL is shown at the end of this document.

Revision HistoryRevision History

Ver 1.0 2003. 12

LEVEL 1

Link

SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ORNAMENTAL PARTSSPECIFICATIONS SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ORNAMENTAL PARTSSPECIFICATIONS

Link

US ModelCanadian Model

AEP ModelUK Model

E ModelHong Kong ModelAustralian Model

Korea ModelTourist Model

Chinese ModelJapanese Model

DSC-F828

— 2 —

DSC-F828

SPECIFICATIONS

xCamera[System]Image device 11 mm (2/3 type) color

CCD4-color filter (RGBE)

Total pixels number of cameraApprox. 8 314 000 pixels

Effective pixels number of cameraApprox. 8 068 000 pixels

Lens Carl Zeiss Vario-Sonnar T*7.1× zoom lensf=7.1 to 51 mm(35 mm camera conversion: 28 to 200 mm)F2.0-2.8Filter diameter: 58 mm (2 3/8 inches)

Exposure controlAutomatic, Shutter speed priority, Aperture priority, Manual exposure, Scene selection (4 modes)

White balanceAutomatic, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Incandescent, Flash, One-push

File format (DCF compliant)Still images: Exif Ver. 2.2, JPEG compliant, RAW, TIFF, DPOF compatibleAudio with still image: MPEG1 compliant (Monaural)Movies: MPEG1 compliant (Monaural)

Recording medium“Memory Stick”, Microdrive, CompactFlash card (TypeI/TypeII)

Flash Recommended distance (when ISO sensitivity is set to Auto)0.5 to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to 14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W)0.6 to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to 10 feet 10 inches) (T)

Viewfinder Electric viewfinder (color)

[Output connectors]A/V OUT (MONO) jack (Monaural)

MinijackVideo: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω , unbalanced, sync negativeAudio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ load)Output impedance 2.2 kΩ

Accessory jackMini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm)

USB jack mini-B

USB communicationHi-Speed USB (USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant)

[LCD screen]LCD panel used

4.6 cm (1.8 type) TFT drive

Total number of dots134 400 (560×240) dots

[Finder]LCD panel used



[Power, general]Used battery pack

NP-FM50

Power requirements7.2 V

Power consumption (during shooting with LCD screen on)2.2 W

Operating temperature range0° to+40°C (32° to +104°F)(When using the Microdrive: +5° to +40°C (41° to +104°F))

Storage temperature range−20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F)

Dimensions (lens: W-end)134.4 91.1 157.2 mm (5 3/8 3× 5/8 × 6 1/4 inches)(W/H/D, protruding portions not included)

Mass Approx. 955 g (33.7 oz) (battery pack NP-FM50, “Memory Stick,” shoulder strap, lens cap, and so on included)

Microphone Electret condenser microphone

Speaker Dynamic speaker

Exif Print Compatible

PRINT Image Matching IICompatible

PictBridge Compatible

xAC-L15A/L15B AC AdaptorPower requirements

AC 100 − 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Current consumption0.35 − 0.18 A

Power consumption18 W

Output voltage 8.4 V DC, 1.5 A

Operating temperature range0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F)


Maximum dimensionsApprox. 56 × 31 × 100 mm (2 1/4 × 1 1/4 × 4 inches) (W/H/D), excluding projecting parts

Mass Approx. 190 g (6.7 oz) excluding power cord (mains lead)

xNP-FM50 battery pack Used battery

Lithium-ion battery

Maximum voltage DC 8.4 V

Nominal voltage DC 7.2 V

Capacity 8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh)

Accessories• AC Adaptor (1)

• Power cord (mains lead) (1)

• USB cable (1)

• Battery pack NP-FM50 (1)

• A/V connecting cable (1)

• Shoulder strap (1)

• Lens cap (1)

• Lens cap strap (1)

• Lens hood (1)

• CD-ROM (USB driver: SPVD-013) (1)

• CD-ROM (Image Data Converter) (1)

• Operating Instructions (1)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

× ×

— 3 —

DSC-F828

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!

COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITHMARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTSLIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESECOMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERSAPPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTSPUBLISHED BY SONY.

ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORTÀ LA SÉCURITÉ!

LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LESDIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONTCRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NEREMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONYDONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OUDANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

CAUTION :Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-solderedconnections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashesand bridges.

2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors.

3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularlytransistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Pointthem out to the customer and recommend their replacement.

4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signsof deterioration. Point them out to the customer andrecommend their replacement.

5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing

• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚Cduring repairing.

• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of thecircuit board (within 3 times).

• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when solderingor unsoldering.

SAFETY CHECK-OUT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following

safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.

CAUTIONUse of controls or adjustments or performance procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

— 4 —

DSC-F828

Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective flash unit.*1: The error display is given in two ways.

Display Code

C:32:01

C:13:01

E:91:01

E:61:00 *1

E61:10 *1

Countermeasure

Turn off the main power then back on.

Replace the memory stick.Format the memory stick with the DSC-F828.

Checking of flash unit or replacement offlash unit.

Checking of lens drive circuit

Cause

Trouble with hardware.

• The type of memory stick that cannot beused by this machine, is inserted.

• Data is damaged.• Unformatted memory stick is inserted.

Abnormality when flash is beingcharged.

When failed in the focus initialization.

Caution Display During Error

SYSTEM ERROR

MEDIA ERROR

Flash LEDFlash displayFlashing at 3.2 Hz

—

Self-diagnosis display• C: ss: ss

The contents which can be handledby customer, are displayed.

• E: ss: ssThe contents which can be handledby engineer, are displayed.

[Description on Self-diagnosis Display]

— 5 —

DSC-F828

MAIN PARTS

Note:• Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service.

Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items.• The parts numbers of such as a cabinet are also appeared in this section.

Refer to the parts number mentioned below the name of parts to order.

1. ORNAMENTAL PARTS

LCD window adhesive sheet3-087-155-01

Jack cover3-087-153-01

LCD window3-086-480-01

— 6 —

DSC-F828

Checking supplied accessories.

Other accessories3-084-996-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE)(J)3-084-996-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION(ENGLISH)

(US,CND,AEP,UK,E,AUS,CH,JE,HK)3-084-996-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH/GERMAN)(CND,AEP)3-084-996-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE)

(AEP,E,JE)3-084-996-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/DUTCH)(AEP)

3-084-996-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONALCHINESE)(E,CH,JE,HK)

3-084-996-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (RUSSIAN/SWEDISH)(AEP)3-084-996-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC)(E)3-084-996-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN)(JE,KR)3-084-997-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE)(J)

3-087-904-01 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW (JAPANESE)(J)3-087-904-11 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW

(ENGLISH/FRENCH/GERMAN/SPANISH/ITALIAN/DUTCH/PORTUGUESE/TRADITIONAL CHINESE/

SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)(EXCEPT J)

Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your digital still camera.

• AbbreviationCND : Canadian modelAUS : Australian modelCH : Chinese modelHK : Hong Kong modelKR : Korea modelJE : Tourist modelJ : Japanese model

Note :The components identified bymark 0 or dotted line with mark0 are critical for safety.Replace only with part numberspecified.

Note :Les composants identifiés parune marque 0 sont critiquespour la sécurité.Ne les remplacer que par unepièce portant le numéro spécifié.

Power cord (Main lead) (1)(AEP, E model)0 1-769-608-11Power cord (Main lead) (1)(AUS model)0 1-696-819-11Power cord (Main lead) (1)(UK, HK model)0 1-783-374-11Power cord (Main lead) (1)(US, CND model)0 1-790-107-22Power cord (Main lead) (1)(JE, J model)0 1-790-732-12Power cord (Main lead) (1)(KR model)0 1-776-985-11Power cord (Main lead) (1)(CH model)0 1-782-476-13

CD-ROM(SPVD-013 (I) USB Driver) (1)(US, CND, J model)3-087-331-01CD-ROM(SPVD-013 USB Driver) (1)(AEP, UK, E, HK, JE, KR, AUS,CH model)3-087-330-01

CD-ROM(Image Data Converter) (1)3-087-661-01

AC adaptor (1) (AC-L15A)0 1-477-533-51

NP-FM50 battery pack (1)(not supplied)

A/V connecting cable (1)1-824-111-11

USB cable (1)1-827-038-11

2-pin conversion adaptor (1)(JE model)1-569-007-12

2-pin conversion adaptor (1)(E model)1-569-008-12

Clamp filter (Ferrite core) (for AC-L15A)1-543-798-21

Lens cap (1)X-3952-016-1

String assy capX-3953-980-1

Lens hood (1)3-086-481-01

S-houlder strap (1)3-071-638-11

DSC-F828

— 8 —Sony EMCS Co. 2003L1600-1

©2003.12Published by DI CS Strategy Div.

9-876-279-41

3-084-996-11(1)

Digital Still CameraOperating InstructionsBefore operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly, and retain it for future reference.

Owner’s RecordThe model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product.

Model No. DSC-F828

Serial No.

DSC-F828© 2003 Sony Corporation

Getting started ________________________

Shooting still images __________________

Viewing still images ___________________

Deleting still images ___________________

Before advanced operations _____________

Advanced still image shooting____________

Advanced still image viewing_____________

Still image editing ______________________

Still image printing ______________________(PictBridge printer)

Enjoying movies________________________

Enjoying images on your computer ______

Troubleshooting ________________________

Additional information ___________________

Index______________________________

AUTIONou are cautioned that any changes or odifications not expressly approved in this anual could void your authority to operate is equipment.

ote:his equipment has been tested and found to mply with the limits for a Class B digital

evice, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. hese limits are designed to provide asonable protection against harmful terference in a residential installation. This uipment generates, uses, and can radiate dio frequency energy and, if not installed d used in accordance with the instructions, ay cause harmful interference to radio mmunications. However, there is no

uarantee that interference will not occur in a articular installation. If this equipment does use harmful interference to radio or levision reception, which can be determined y turning the equipment off and on, the user encouraged to try to correct the interference y one or more of the following measures: —Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.—Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.—Connect the equipment into an outlet on a

circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

—Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

he supplied interface cable must be used ith the equipment in order to comply with e limits for a digital device pursuant to ubpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.

2

To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture.

CAUTIONThe use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard.Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

If you have any questions about this product, you may call:

Sony Customer Information Services Center 1-800-222-SONY (7669)

The number below is for the FCC related matters only.

Regulatory Information

CYmmth

NTcodTreineqraanmcogpcatebisb

TwthS

WARNING

For the Customers in the U.S.A.

This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

Declaration of ConformityTrade Name: SONY Model No.: DSC-F828Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc. Address: 680 Kinderkamack

Road, Oradell, NJ 07649 U.S.A.

Telephone No.: 201-930-6972

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

3

If the plug supplied with this equipment has a Noticetic electricity or electromagnetism causes

transfer to discontinue midway (fail), rt the application or disconnect and ect the USB cable again.

ain countries or regions may regulate osal of the battery used to power this uct. Please consult with your local ority.

For the Customers in the U.S.A.

RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIESLithium-Ion batteries are recyclable.You can help preserve our environment by returning your used rechargeable batteries to the collection and recycling location nearest you.

For more information regarding recycling of rechargeable batteries, call toll free 1-800-822-8837, or visithttp://www.rbrc.org/

Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking Lithium-Ion batteries.

CAUTIONTO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

A moulded plug complying with BS 1363 is fitted to this equipment for your safety and convenience. Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to be replaced, a fuse of the same rating as the supplied one and approved by ASTA or BSI to BS 1362, (i.e., marked with or mark) must be used.

detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never use the plug without the fuse cover. If you should lose the fuse cover, please contact your nearest Sony service station.

This product has been tested and found compliant with the limits sets out in the EMC Directive for using connection cables shorter than 3 meters (9.8 feet).

AttentionThe electromagnetic fields at the specific frequencies may influence the picture and sound of this digital camera.

If stadatarestaconn

Certdispprodauth

and Canada

Notice for the customers in the United Kingdom

For the Customers in Europe

emove dirt from the surface of the ash the dirt changes color or sticks to the rface of the flash due to the heat of the flash, fficient light may not be emitted.

o not get the camera wethen taking pictures outdoors in the rain or

nder similar conditions, be careful not to get e camera wet. If water gets inside of the mera, it may cause the camera to alfunction, sometimes beyond repair. If oisture condensation occurs, see page 143 d follow the instructions on how to remove

before using the camera.

o not expose the camera to sand or ustsing the camera in sandy or dusty locations ay cause a malfunction.

o not aim the camera at the sun or ther bright lighthis may cause irrecoverable damage to your es or the malfunction of your camera.

ote on locations where you can se the camerao not use the camera near a location that enerates strong radio waves or emits diation. The camera may not be able to cord or play back properly.

4

B

Trial Beforewant tthat th

No corecorContecompenot pocamer

BackTo avocopy (

Note• This

for Cestaband IAsso

• Playcameimagequiguar

PrecTeleviother Unautbe conlaws.

efore using your camera

recording you record one-time events, you may

o make a trial recording to make sure e camera is working correctly.

mpensation for contents of the ding

nts of the recording cannot be nsated for if recording or playback is ssible due to a malfunction of your a or recording medium, etc.

up recommendationid the potential risk of data loss, always back up) data to a disk.

s on image data compatibility camera conforms with the Design rule amera File system universal standard lished by the JEITA (Japan Electronics nformation Technology Industries ciation).back of images recorded with your ra on other equipment and playback of es recorded or edited with other

pment on your camera are not anteed.

aution on copyright sion programs, films, video tapes, and materials may be copyrighted. horized recording of such materials may trary to the provision of the copyright

Do not shake or strike the camera In addition to malfunctions and inability to record images, this may render the recording medium unusable or image data breakdown, damage or loss may occur.

LCD screen, LCD finder (only models with an LCD finder) and lens • The LCD screen and the LCD finder are

manufactured using extremely high-precision technology so over 99.99% of the pixels are operational for effective use. However, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (white, red, blue or green in color) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and the LCD finder. These points are normal in the manufacturing process and do not affect the recording in any way.

• Be careful when placing the camera near a window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD screen, the finder or the lens to direct sunlight for long periods may cause malfunctions.

• Do not press the LCD screen hardly. The screen may be uneven and that may cause a malfunction.

• Images may be trailed on the LCD screen in a cold location. This is not a malfunction.

The zoom lensThis camera is equipped with zoom lens. Be careful not to bump the lens, and be careful not to apply force to it.

RflIfsusu

DWuthcammanit

DdUm

DoTey

NuDgrare

5

ThThin not

ATleimMdGthTtofa#

e pictures used in this manuale photographs used as examples of pictures this manual are reproduced images, and are actual images shot using this camera.

Trademarks• “Memory Stick,” , and “MagicGate

Memory Stick” are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

• “Memory Stick Duo” and are trademarks of Sony

Corporation.• “Memory Stick PRO” and

are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

• “MagicGate” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

• “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the U.S. Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

• Macintosh, Mac OS and QuickTime are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

• Pentium is a trademark or a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.

• CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.

• Microdrive is a registered trademark of Hitachi Global Storage Technologies in the United States and/or other countries.

• In addition, system and product names used in this manual are, in general, trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective developers or manufacturers. However, the ™ or ® marks are not used in all cases in this manual.

bout the Carl Zeiss lenshis camera is equipped with a Carl Zeiss ns which is capable of reproducing fine ages. The lens for this camera uses the TF# measurement system for cameras

eveloped jointly by Carl Zeiss, in ermany, and Sony Corporation, and offers e same quality as other Carl Zeiss lenses.he lens for your camera is also T*-coated suppress unwanted reflection and ithfully reproduce colors.MTF is an abbreviation of Modulation Transfer Function, a numeric value indicating the amount of light from a specific part of the subject gathered at the corresponding position in the image.

Selecting the recording folder.............51

anual features to photo-shooting situations .....................................52

xposure (shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity)

hooting with Program auto ...................54Program Shift ......................................54

hooting with shutter speed priority mode........................................................55

hooting with aperture priority mode .....56hooting with manual exposure mode ....57electing the metering mode...................58djusting the exposure

– EV adjustment .............................59Displaying a histogram .......................60

hooting with the exposure fixed– AE LOCK ....................................62

hooting three images with the exposure shifted – Exposure Bracket.............63

electing the ISO sensitivity – ISO.........64ocushoosing an auto focus method ..............65Choosing a focus range finder frame

– AF range finder............................65

Advanced still image shooting

6

T

BeforIdenti

ChargUsingUsingTurniHow Settin

Insert

SwIns

SIns

CSettinImageBasic

–Ch

–ShoInd

Us

Get

Sho

able of contents

e using your camera ......................... 4fying the parts .................................. 9

ing the battery pack ....................... 14 the AC Adaptor ............................ 17 your camera abroad ...................... 17ng your camera on/off .................... 18to use the multi-selector ................. 18g the date and time......................... 19

ing and removing a recording medium........................................................ 21itching the recording medium........ 21erting and removing a “Memory tick” .............................................. 22

erting and removing a Microdrive/F card ........................................... 23

g the still image size ...................... 24 size and quality ............................ 25

still image shooting Using auto mode.......................... 27

ecking the last image shot Quick Review .............................. 29oting images with the finder ......... 29icators on the screen during shooting........................................................ 30ing the zoom feature....................... 30

Changing the lens orientation............. 32Shooting close-ups – Macro............... 33Using the self-timer............................ 34Using the flash.................................... 34Inserting the date and time on a still

image.............................................. 36Shooting according to scene conditions

– Scene Selection ........................... 37

Viewing images on the screen of your camera ............................................ 39

Viewing images on a TV screen............. 41

Deleting images ...................................... 43Formatting a recording medium ............. 45

How to setup and operate your camera........................................................ 47

Changing menu settings ..................... 47Changing items in the SET UP screen

........................................................ 48How to use the command dial ............ 48

Deciding the still image quality.............. 49Creating or selecting a folder ................. 50

Creating a new folder ......................... 50

M

E

S

S

SSSA

S

S

SFC

ting started

oting still images

Viewing still images

Deleting still images

Before advanced operations

7

FoFlaSeAdUs

CoAdSeBuShSh

OtSh

Sh

Sh

Sh

Sh

necting to a PictBridge printer..........93reparing the camera...........................93onnecting the camera to the printer

........................................................93ting images........................................94ting index-images .............................96

oting movies ....................................100ing movies on the screen ..............101

ting movies.....................................102ing movies.......................................103utting movies ..................................104eleting unnecessary portions of movies

......................................................104

ying images to your computer– For Windows users ....................105stalling the USB driver ..................106stalling “Image Transfer” ..............107stalling “ImageMixer” ...................108onnecting the camera to your computer

......................................................109

ill image printing ictBridge printer)

joying movies

joying images on your mputer

Choosing a focus operation– AF Mode......................................66

cusing manually ..................................67sh

lecting a flash mode ............................68justing the flash level – Flash Level...70ing an external flash............................71Using the Sony Flash ..........................72Using a commercially available external

flash ................................................72lorjusting color tones – White Balance...73lecting color reproduction – Color ......74rst

ooting images in succession................75ooting in Multi Burst mode

– Multi Burst...................................76hersooting in the dark ................................77NightShot ............................................77NightFraming......................................78ooting with special effects

– Picture Effect ...............................79ooting still images in RAW mode

– RAW............................................79ooting still images in TIFF mode

– TIFF .............................................80ooting still images for e-mail

– E-Mail ..........................................81

Shooting still images with audio files– Voice ........................................... 81

Selecting the folder and playing back images – Folder .............................. 83

Enlarging a portion of a still image ........ 84Enlarging an image

– Playback zoom ............................ 84Recording an enlarged image

– Trimming..................................... 85Playing back successive images

– Slide show ................................... 85Rotating still images – Rotate................. 86Playing back images shot in Multi Burst

mode ............................................... 87Playing back continuously.................. 87Playing back frame by frame ............. 87

Protecting images – Protect .................... 89Changing image size – Resize ................ 90Choosing images to print

– Print (DPOF) mark ...................... 91

ConPC

PrinPrin

ShoViewDeleEdit

CD

Cop

InInInC

Advanced still image viewing

Still image editing

St(P

En

Enco

8

Copying images using “Image Transfer”...................................................... 110

Changing “Image Transfer” settings...................................................... 111

Copying images without using “Image Transfer” .......................... 111

Viewing the images on your computer...................................................... 113

Image file storage destinations and file names............................................ 114

Viewing an image previously copied to a computer ....................................... 116

Copying images to your computer– For Macintosh users .................. 117

Troubleshooting .................................... 119Warnings and messages ........................ 130Self-diagnosis display – If a code starting

with an alphabet letter appears ..... 133

The number of images that can be saved/shooting time ................................ 134

Menu items ........................................... 137SET UP items........................................ 140Precautions............................................ 143The “Memory Stick”............................. 144The Microdrive ..................................... 145

On “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack ........ 146Specifications ....................................... 147Display window.................................... 149The LCD/finder screen ......................... 150Quick reference chart ........................... 155

Index ..................................................... 158

Troubleshooting

Additional information

Index

9

Identifying the parts

ual focus ring (67) R (Macro) button (33)

S NIGHTSHOT/NIGHTFRAMING button (77)FOCUS (AUTO/MANUAL) switch (67)

ssing the (Display window backlight) tton turns on the backlight in the display ndow for about seven seconds.

A DisB WBC

butD E ShuF HolG SelH ZooI Man

9

play window (White balance) button (73)(Display window backlight) ton(Exposure) button (57, 59)tter button (27)ogram AF emitter (35, 140)f-timer lamp (34)m ring (30)

w;

ql

qk

qj

J Flash emitter (34)K Infrared ray emitter (77)L SpeakerM Advanced accessory shoe (71)N OPEN (FLASH) switch (69)O (Metering mode) button (58)

P (Flash) button (68)Q /BRK (Burst/Bracket) button

(63, 75, 76)

See the pages in parentheses for details of operation.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

q;

qa

qh

qg

qf

qd

qs

T

• Prebuwi

SET UP: To set the SET UP items:To shoot movies:To view or edit images

AE LOCK/ (Delete) button (43, 62)Command dial (48)

OPEN (CF) lever (23)CF card cover (23)CF card eject lever (24)

10

A MENU button (47, 137)

B (Flash) lamp (68)C Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) (18)D Jack cover (14, 17)E A/V OUT (MONO) jack (41)F (USB) jack (109)G DC IN jack (14, 17)H /CF (“Memory Stick”/CF

card) switch (21)I Access lamp (22)

J Mode dial (27):To shoot still images in auto adjustment mode

P: To shoot still images in program auto mode

S: To shoot in shutter speed priority mode

A: To shoot in aperture priority mode

M: To shoot in manual exposure mode

SCN: To shoot in Scene Selection mode

K

L

M

N

O

1 q;

2 qa

3 qs

4qd

5

qf6

qg

7

8

9

11

A LCD screenB Finder (29)C Finder adjustment lever (29)D FINDER/LCD switch (29)E (Screen status) button (30)F / (Self-timer/Index) button

(34, 40)G POWER lamp (18)H POWER switch (18)I (Digital zoom/Playback zoom)

button (30, 84)J 7 (Quick review) button (29)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

q;

Hook for shoulder strapTripod receptacleMicrophoneLensACC (Accessory) jackBattery/“Memory Stick” cover (14)RESET button (119)Battery eject lever (15)Hook for shoulder strap

Use the ACC (accessory) jack to connect an external flash or the remote control tripod.Use a tripod with a screw length of less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inch). You will be unable to firmly secure the camera to tripods having longer screws, and may damage the camera.

12

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

•

•

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Attaching the lens cap and the shoulder strap

Lens cap

Shoulder strap

13

Attaching the lens hood Storing the lens hood • You can attach the lens cap with the lens hood ached.

When you shoot in bright lighting conditions, such as outdoors, we recommend that you use the lens hood to reduce the image quality deterioration caused by unnecessary light.

1 Position the lens hood as shown below, by aligning the mark on the lens hood and the x mark on the lens, and attach the hood to the lens.

2 Turn the lens hood clockwise until it clicks.

The lens hood can be attached in the reverse direction to store it with the camera when it is not in use.

1 Position the lens hood as shown below, by aligning the mark on the lens hood and the x mark on the lens, and attach the hood to the lens.

2 Turn the lens hood clockwise until it clicks.

att

Open the jack cover and connect the AC Adaptor (supplied) to the DC IN jack of your camera.

pen the cover in the arrow direction as lustrated above. Connect the plug with the mark facing up.

Do not short the DC plug of the AC Adaptor with a metallic object, as this may cause a malfunction.Clean the DC plug of the AC Adaptor with a dry cotton bud. Do not use the dirty plug. Use of the dirty plug may not properly charge the battery pack.

3

Jack cover

DC plug

AC Adaptor

Getting started

14

C

, OS

Slide

• Be scha

• You“InfoSeribatte

21

harging the battery pack

pen the battery/“Memory tick” cover.

the cover in the direction of the arrow.

ure to turn off your camera when rging the battery pack (page 18).r camera operates with the LITHIUM” NP-FM50 battery pack (M

es) (supplied). You can use only M Series ry pack (page 146).

, Install the battery pack, then close the battery/“Memory Stick” cover.

Insert the battery pack with the b mark facing toward the battery compartment as illustrated.Make sure the battery pack is firmly inserted all the way, then close the cover.

• The battery pack is easily inserted by pushing the battery eject lever at the front of the battery compartment to the front side.

,

Oilv

•

•

1

3

2

2

Battery eject lever

b mark

15

Getting started

ttery remaining indicatorsbattery remaining indicators on the screen or e display window show the remaining ting or viewing time.

e battery remaining time on the screen or on display window may not be correct under tain circumstances or conditions.

hen you switch the FINDER/LCD switch or /CF switch, it takes about one minute for

correct battery remaining time to appear.

arging timeroximate time to charge a completely harged battery pack using the AC ptor at a temperature of 25°C (77°F).

ttery pack Charging time (min.)

-FM50 (supplied) Approx. 150

0min

D screen/Finder Display window
, Co
leathesoc

During cdisplay wis compl

• The avawindowunder th– The m

4

The av

nnect the power cord (mains d) to the AC Adaptor and n to a wall outlet (wall ket).

harging, the battery mark in the indow flashes, and after charging

eted, “Full” appears.

ilable shooting time on the display is calculated as if the camera were used e following conditions:ode dial is set to

– [LCD Backlight] or [EVF Backlight] is set to [Normal]

– Using a “Memory Stick”– Not using the NightShot or NightFraming

function.• After charging the battery pack, disconnect the

AC Adaptor from the DC IN jack of your camera and the wall outlet (wall socket).

To remove the battery pack

Open the battery/“Memory Stick” cover. Slide the battery eject lever in the direction of the arrow, and remove the battery pack.

• Be careful not to drop the battery pack when removing it.

BaThe on thshoo

• Ththecer

• W

the

ChAppdiscAda

Power cord (mains lead)

2 To a wall outlet (wall socket)

1

ailable shooting time is indicated

Battery eject lever

Ba

NP

8

LC

The battery life and the number of images recordable or viewable does not depend on the image size setting.The number of images is almost the same whether you use the finder or the LCD screen for shooting/viewing images.When using a CF card, the battery life and the number of images recordable or viewable may differ.

Numlife tviewThe taimageviewedwith aof 25°be recothe opnecessless thuse.

ShooUnde

1) Shoo–– [A– Sh– Th

W– Th– Th

tim

Recomedi“MemMicro

16

ber of images and battery hat can be recorded/ed

bles show the approximate number of s and the battery life that can be recorded/ when you shoot images in normal mode

fully charged battery pack at a temperature C (77°F). The numbers of images that can rded or viewed take into account changing

tional “Memory Stick” or Microdrive as ary. Note that the actual numbers may be an indicated depending on the conditions of

ting still imagesr the average conditions1)

ting in the following situations: (P. Quality) is set to [Fine]

F Mode] is set to [Monitor]ooting one time every 30 secondse zoom is switched alternately between the and T endse flash strobes once every two timese power turns on and off once every ten es

Viewing still images2)

2) Viewing single images in order at about three second intervals

Shooting movies3)

3) Shooting continuously at [160] image size

• The number of images and the battery life that can be recorded/viewed are decreased under the following conditions:– The surrounding temperature is low– The flash is used– The camera has been turned on and off many

times– The zoom is used frequently– The NightShot or NightFraming function is

activated– [LCD Backlight] or [EVF Backlight] is set to

[Bright] in the SET UP settings– The battery power is low.

The battery capacity decreases as you use it more and more and as time passes

•

•

•

rding um

NP-FM50 (supplied)No. of images

Battery life (min.)

ory Stick” Approx. 370 Approx. 185drive Approx. 350 Approx. 175

Recording medium

NP-FM50 (supplied)No. of images

Battery life (min.)

“Memory Stick” Approx. 9400 Approx. 470Microdrive Approx. 5800 Approx. 290

NP-FM50 (supplied)“Memory Stick” Microdrive

Continuous shooting

Approx. 200 Approx. 160

(page 147).

17

Getting started

Using the AC Adaptor Using your camera abroader sources

can use your camera in any country or on with the supplied AC Adaptor within V to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Use a mercially available AC plug adaptor if necessary, depending on the design of

all outlet (wall socket) [b].

not use an electrical transformer (travel nverter), as this may cause a malfunction.

-L15A/L15B

the

Open thas illustrthe v m

• Connecwall ouoccurs shut offfrom th

camera.

e jack cover in the arrow direction ated above. Connect the plug with ark facing up.

t the AC Adaptor to an easily accessible tlet (wall socket) close by. If any trouble while using the adaptor, immediately the power by disconnecting the plug e wall outlet (wall socket).

• When you have finished using the AC Adaptor, disconnect it from the DC IN jack of the camera and the wall outlet (wall socket).

• The set is not disconnected from the AC power source (mains) as long as it is connected to the wall outlet (wall socket), even if the unit itself has been turned off.

co

, Opcon(su

1

DC

Jack c

en the jack cover, then nect the AC Adaptor pplied) to the DC IN jack of

AC Adaptor

plug

over

, Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC Adaptor and to a wall outlet (wall socket).

2

2 To a wall outlet (wall socket)

Power cord (mains lead)

1

PowYouregi100 com[a], the w

• Do

AC

How to use the multi-selector

o change the current settings of the amera, bring up the menu or the SET UP reen (pages 47, 48), and use the multi-lector to make the changes. hen setting up the menu, move the multi-lector to v/V/b/B to select the item or e setting and make the setting.hen setting up the SET UP, move the ulti-selector to v/V/b/B to select the em or the setting and press the center of e multi-selector to make the setting.

SELECT

Camera 1AF Mode:Digital Zoom:Date/Time:Red Eye Reduction:Hologram AF:

MonitorPrecisionOffOff

Auto Review: OffAuto

CancelOK

Setup 2File Number:USB Connect:Video Out:Clock Set:

18

The Ppowefor thappea

To tuSlide the arand th

OWER lamp lights in green and the r is on. When you turn on the camera e first time, the Clock Set screen rs (page 19).

rn off the powerthe POWER switch in the direction of row again, the POWER lamp goes out, e camera turns off.

or the A/V OUT (MONO) jackscseWsethWmitth

T

, Sd

urning your camera on/off

lide the POWER switch in the irection of the arrow.

POWER switch

POWER lamp

The Auto Power Off functionIf no tasks are performed for about three minutes when shooting, viewing images, or setting up the camera while using the battery pack, power is automatically shut off to preserve battery power.However, in the following circumstances, even if the battery pack is being used to power the camera, the Auto Power Off function will not work.• Movies are being played back• A slide show is being shown• A cable is connected to the (USB) jack

Tc

19

Getting started

Setting the date and time

Select the desired date format by moving the multi-selector to v/V, then press the center.

can select from [Y/M/D] (year/month/, [M/D/Y], and [D/M/Y].

the rechargeable button battery, which vides the power for saving the time data, is r fully discharged (page 144), the Clock Set een will appear again. When this happens, et the date and time by starting from Step 3 ove.

2003 11/ / 00AM

Clock Set

D/M/YM/D/YY/M/D

OK

Cancel

12 :

, Set

• You canmode d

.• To set t

dial to S2) (pag

1
the mode dial to .
carry out this operation even when the ial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN, or

he time and the date again, set the mode ET UP, select [Clock Set] in (Setup

es 48, 142), then proceed from Step 3.

, Slide the POWER switch in the direction of the arrow to turn on the power.

The POWER lamp lights in green and the Clock Set screen appears on the screen.

,

Youday)

• If proevescrresab

Mode dial

2

Clock Set

2003 11/ /

D/M/YM/D/YY/M/D

00AM

OK

Cancel

12 :POWER switch

3

Move the multi-selector to B to select [OK], then press the center.

he date and time are set and the clock will art to keep time.

To cancel the setting process, select [Cancel], then press the center.

6

2004 11/ / 30AM

Clock Set

D/M/YM/D/YY/M/D

OK

Cancel

10 :

20

, Shts

v is sselect

4
elect the year, month, day, our, or minute item you want
o set by moving the multi-elector to b/B.

hown above and V is shown below the ed item.

, Set the desired numerical value by moving the multi-selector to v/V, then press the center.

After setting the current numerical value, set the next item. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until all of the items have been set.

• If you select [D/M/Y] in Step 3, set the time on a 24- hour cycle.

• 12:00 AM stands for midnight and 12:00 PM stands for noon.

,

Tst

•

2003 11/ / 00AM

Clock Set

D/M/YM/D/YY/M/D

OK

Cancel

12 :

5

2004 11/ / 00AM

Clock Set

D/M/YM/D/YY/M/D

OK

Cancel

10 :

21

Shooting still im

agesInserting and removing a recording medium Switching the recording

dium

Select the recording medium with the /CF switch.

: When recording images onto a “Memory Stick” or playing back images from a “Memory Stick.”

: When recording images onto a Microdrive/CF card or playing back images from a Microdrive/CF card.

/CF switch

Shooting still images

MicrodrHitachi DSCM-1

We havecards coand Typproper o

• The Microdrive is a compact and lightweight hard disk drive that complies with CompactFlash Type II standards. For more information about the Microdrive, see page 145.

• Before using a Microdrive/CF card, be sure to format it using this camera. Otherwise, satisfactory performance may not be obtained (page 45).

iveGlobal Storage Technologies, Inc.1000 (1 GB)

checked the compatibility of CF mpliant with CompactFlash Type I e II, however, we cannot guarantee peration of all CF cards.

CF

You canMicrodrcard) as

• Copying between media cannot be done with this camera.

• For more information about the “Memory Stick,” see page 144.

use a “Memory Stick,” ive, or CompactFlash card (CF a recording medium.

“Memory Stick” Microdrive/CompactFlash

me

,

Close the battery/“Memory Stick” cover.

o remove the “Memory Stick”pen the battery/“Memory Stick” cover, en push the “Memory Stick” to pop it out.

Whenever the access lamp is lit, the camera is recording or reading out an image. Never remove the “Memory Stick” or turn off the power at this time. The data may be corrupted.

3 Access lamp

22

Inse

, OS

Slide

21

rting and removing a “Memory Stick”

pen the battery/“Memory tick” cover.

the cover in the direction of the arrow.

, Insert the “Memory Stick.”

Insert the “Memory Stick” all the way in until it clicks as shown in the illustration.

• Whenever you insert a “Memory Stick,” push it as far as it can go. If you do not insert it correctly, a proper recording or playback may not be carried out.

,

TOth

•

3

2

1

2

Label sideTerminal side

23

Shooting still im

agesInserting and removing a Microdrive/CF card

Close the CF card cover.

ose the CF card cover properly, otherwise u cannot record or play back images using Microdrive/CF card.

, Op

Slide thedirection

1
en the CF card cover.
OPEN (CF) lever in the of the arrow.

, Insert the Microdrive/CF card.

Insert the Microdrive/CF card all the way in as shown in the illustration.

• Whenever you insert a Microdrive/CF card, push it as far as it can go. If you do not insert it correctly, a proper recording or playback may not be carried out.

,

• Clyothe

2 Front (The v mark-printed side) 3

size

Select (Image Size) by moving the multi-selector to b/B, then select the desired image size by moving the multi-selector to v/V.

he image size is set.fter the setting is completed, press ENU. The menu disappears from the reen.

For more information about the image size, see page 25.This setting is maintained even when the power is turned off.

2

8M3:25M3M1M

Image Size

8M

Mode

8M3:2

5M3M1M

Image Size

5M

Mode

24

To reOpencard ecard i

• Noteafter

• WhecamimacardTheMicunu

that the Microdrive may be heated right using the camera.never the access lamp is lit, the era is recording or reading out an

ge. Never remove the Microdrive/CF or turn off the power at this time.

data may be corrupted or the rodrive/CF card may become sable.

leverAccess lamp MENU.

The menu appears.

• You can carry out this operation even when the mode dial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN.

TAMsc

•

•

move the Microdrive/CF card the CF card cover, then push the CF ject lever so that the Microdrive/CF s ejected.

CF card eject

Setting the still image

, Set the mode dial to and turn on the power, then press

1

8M3:25M3M1M

Image Size

8M

Mode

MENU

,

25

Shooting still im

agesImage size and quality

age quality using this camera.rtion of 3:2 to match the size of the print

ed in a “Memory Stick”3)

dard)4) mode are shown below. (Units:

see pages 134, 135. ratio) mode, see page 49.

ages or printing A3 size or fine A4 size

fine A5 size images.

ze images.

ages, attaching images to e-mail, or home page.

MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G

59 (109) 121 (223) 247 (456)

59 (109) 121 (223) 247 (456)

92 (174) 188 (354) 384 (723)

148 (264) 302 (537) 617 (1097)

) 357 (649) 726 (1320) 1482 (2694)

) 1428 (3571) 2904 (7261)5928

(14821)

You canpixels) aratio) bato shoot.size andquality, larger thyour imaimages iChoose appropriwant to

choose image size (number of nd image quality (compression sed on the kind of images you want The larger you make the image the higher you make the image the better your image, but also the e amount of data needed to preserve ge. This means you can save fewer n your recording medium.an image size and quality level ately for the kind of images you shoot.

1) The default setting is [8M]. This size can give the highest im2) This option records images in a horizontal to vertical propo

paper used.

The number of images that can be savThe number of images that can be saved in Fine (Stannumber of images)

3) When [Mode] (REC Mode) is set to [Normal]For the number of images that can be saved in other modes,

4) For more information about the image quality (compression

Image size Examples8M 1) (3264×2448) • For storing important im

images.3:2 2) (3264×2176)

5M (2592×1944) • For printing A4 size or

3M (2048×1536)

1M (1280×960) • For printing postcard si

VGA (640×480) • For shooting a lot of imposting images to your

Capacity16MB 32MB 64MB 128MBImage

size

8M 4 (7) 8 (15) 16 (30) 32 (60)

3:2 4 (7) 8 (15) 16 (30) 32 (60)

5M 6 (11) 12 (23) 25 (48) 51 (96)

3M 10 (18) 20 (37) 41 (74) 82 (149)

1M 24 (46) 50 (93) 101 (187) 202 (376

VGA 97 (243) 196 (491) 394 (985) 790 (1975

Larger

Smaller

26

The be sThe nFine ((Units

3) WheFor othe

4) For (com

Cap

Imagsize

8M

3:2

5M

3M

1M

VGA

number of images that can aved in a Microdrive3)

umber of images that can be saved in Standard)4) mode are shown below. : number of images)

n [Mode] (REC Mode) is set to [Normal]the number of images that can be saved in r modes, see page 136.more information about the image quality pression ratio) mode, see page 49.

• When the images recorded using other Sony devices are played back, the image size indication may be different from the actual image size.

• When the images are viewed on the screen of the camera, they all look the same size.

• Number of shooting images can differ from these values according to shooting conditions.

• When the remaining number of images recordable is more than 9999, “>9999” is indicated on the screen. And when it is more than 999, “999” is indicated on the display window.

• You can resize the images later (Resize function, see page 90).

acity1G (DSCM-11000)e

273 (505)

273 (505)

426 (801)

684 (1217)

1643 (2988)

6573 (16434)

27

Shooting still im

agesBasic still image shooting – Using auto mode

Press and hold the shutter button halfway down.

camera beeps. When the AE/AF lock cator stops flashing and remains on, the era is ready for shooting. (The screen be frozen for a split second depending he subject.)n the surroundings are dark, the flash matically pops up and strobes.

you release your finger from the shutter tton, shooting will be canceled.hen the camera does not beep, the AF justment is not complete. You can continue to ot, but the focus is not set properly (except

Continuous AF, page 66).

8M

F2.0 0EV

80min

250

98FINE 101

MAF

AE/AF lock indicator Flashes in green t Remains on

, Settur

The recothe screeRemove

• Select tCF swi

• You canmedium(page 5

1
the mode dial to , and n on the camera.
rding folder name is indicated on n for about five seconds. the lens cap.

he recording medium using the /tch (page 21). create a new folder in the recording and select the folder for storing images

0).

, Hold the camera steadily with both hands and position a subject in the center of the focus frame.

• The minimum focal distance to a subject is 50 cm (19 3/4 inches) (W)/60 cm (23 5/8 inches) (T). To shoot subjects at distances closer than this, use the macro mode (page 33).

• The frame indicated on the screen shows the focus adjustment range. (AF range finder, see page 65.)

,

Theindicammayon tWheauto

• If bu

• Wadshoin

Mode dial

2 3

(Manual exposure)ou can manually adjust the shutter speed

nd the aperture value (page 57). In ddition, you can set the desired shooting nctions using menus (pages 47 and 137).

CN (Scene Selection)ou can select from the following modes to oot according to the scene conditions age 37).– (Twilight mode)– (Twilight portrait mode)– (Landscape mode)– (Portrait mode) addition, you can set the desired shooting nctions using menus (pages 47 and 137).

28

, Pd

The scompthe re

• Wheno tacamoff t

4
ress the shutter button fully own.
hutter clicks, the shooting is leted, and the still image is saved in cording medium.

n you are shooting with the battery pack, if sks are performed for a while with the

era turned on, power is automatically shut o preserve battery power (page 18).

Mode dial for still image shootingWhen shooting still images with your camera, you can choose from the following shooting methods.

(Auto adjustment mode)The focus, exposure and white balance are automatically adjusted to allow easy shooting. The image quality is set to [Fine] (page 49).

P (Program auto shooting)Shooting adjustment is automatically carried out just as in the auto adjustment mode. However, you can intentionally adjust the focus, exposure, etc. In addition, you can set the desired functions using the menu (pages 47 and 137).

S (Shutter speed priority)You can select the shutter speed (page 55). In addition, you can set the desired shooting functions using menus (pages 47 and 137).

A (Aperture priority)You can select the aperture value (page 56). In addition, you can set the desired shooting functions using menus (pages 47 and 137).

MYaafu

SYsh(p

Infu

8M97101

MAF

80min

29

Shooting still im

agesChecking the last image

shutter button lightly or press 7 (quick

Shooting images with the der

the FINDER/LCD switch, you can se to shoot either using the finder or the screen. When you use the finder, the e does not appear on the LCD screen. st the finder adjustment lever until the e appears clearly within the finder,

shoot the image.

NDER/LCD itch

Finder adjustment lever

window• A fast-m• The sub

mirror, lustrous

• A flash• A back

There arrange finpositionand sizethe cameSee page

oving subjectject has a reflection, such as that from a or there is a luminous body and a subject

ing subjectlit subject.

e two Auto Focus functions: “AF der frame” which sets the focus

according to the subject position , and “AF mode” which sets when ra starts and stops focusing on. 65 for details.

review) again.

To delete the image displayed on the screen

1 Press (delete).

2 Select [Delete] by moving the multi-selector to v, then press the center. The image is deleted.

imagAdjuimagthen

AboutWhen yoto focuschange tbeep doeAF, pagThe Autuse withcases, rerecompo• The sub• The con

backgro• The sub

Auto Focusu try to shoot a subject that is hard

on, the AE/AF lock indicator will o flashing slowly and the AE lock s not sound (except in Continuous

e 66).o Focus function may be difficult to in the following subjects. In such lease the shutter button, then try to se the shot and focus again.ject is distant from the camera and darktrast between the subject and its und is poorject is seen through glass, such as a

shot – Quick Review

, Press 7 (quick review).

To return to shooting mode, press the

10:30PM2004 1 1101-0008

Review8/8101

8M80min

fin

WithchooLCD

FIsw

sing the zoom feature

Turn the zoom ring to choose the desired image size for shooting.

ou can zoom in up to 7.1× using the ptical zoom.

he minimum distance needed to cus on a subjecthen the zoom is set all the way to e W side:

pproximately 50 cm (19 3/4 inches) from e end of the lenshen the zoom is set all the way to e T side:

pproximately 60 cm (23 5/8 inches) from e end of the lens

When not using the camera, retract the lens in by setting the lens to its W-end position to protect it.

10198

10198

8M8M

x1.1x5.0

80min 80min

W (wide-angle) (telephoto)

Zoom ring

30

• The indicback

• For page

• For page

• Thisis tu

status of the screen changes between ators-on and indicators-off when playing or shooting movies.a detailed description of the indicators, see 150.

a detailed description of the histogram, see 60. setting is maintained even when the power rned off.

rIndicators off

MAF

MAF

Yo

TfoWthathWthath

•

Indi

Each displa

cators on the screen during shooting

time you press (screen status), the y changes in the following order.

Indicators on

rHistogram on

(Image information is displayed during playback)

8M80min98

MAF

101

8M9810180min

U

,

T

31

Shooting still im

ages

cision digital zoomrges the image two times larger than ptical zoom scaling now selected. The imum zoom scaling is about 14× rdless of the selected image size. Since recision digital zoom cuts part of the e and enlarges the rest, the image

ity deteriorates.Digital Zoom] to [Precision] in the SET settings (page 140). default setting is [Precision].

DigitaEnlargesPressingdigital zdigital zdigital zzoom.” Bmethodscapacityyour sho

The to the zoOptical PrecisioSmart zo

l zoom the image using digital processing. (digital zoom) activates the oom. There are two modes in the oom function. One is “Precision oom” and the other is “Smart

ecause each mode uses different and has different magnifying , choose the mode according to oting.

icon changes as follows according om mode.

zoom: n digital zoom: om:

• The digital zoom cannot be used when shooting in RAW mode (page 79).

• AF range finder frame is not shown when using the digital zoom. The AF range finder frame indicator flashes and a centrally-located subject has priority when the camera is focusing.

PreEnlathe omaxregathe pimagqualSet [UP The

hanging the lens rientation

ou can adjust the angle by turning the lens art upward up to 70 degrees and downward p to 30 degrees.

Lens part

32

• Whe• The

zoom• Whe

effec

To caPress the op

1M

VGA

n the image size is set to [8M] or [3:2], the smart zoom does not work.digital zoom cannot be used when shooting in Multi Burst mode (page 76). When using the smart , selecting (Multi Burst) using the /BRK button cancels the smart zoom.

n using the smart zoom, the image on the screen may look rough. However, this phenomenon has no t on the recorded image.

ncel the digital zoom (digital zoom) again. The zoom scaling returns to the number that was in effect using

tical zoom.

x2.6

x5.1x5 x10 x15

x18

x36

u

SmarYou czoomThe zthe opSet [DThe mdispla

5M

3M

t zooman zoom in the image with much less image quality deterioration. You can use the smart as though it were the optical zoom.oom scaling becomes the number that multiplies the following smart zoom scaling by tical zoom scaling now selected.igital Zoom] to [Smart] in the SET UP settings (page 140).aximum zoom scale is as follows and it depends on the image size. The zoom scale yed on the screen is an approximate value.

x1.3

x1.6

x8.9

x11

Co

Yp

33

Shooting still im

agesShooting close-ups – Macro

Center the subject in the frame, and press and hold the shutter button halfway down, then press the shutter button fully down.

eturn to normal shootings (macro) again. The indicator ppears from the screen.

hen shooting in macro mode, the focus range ery narrow and you may not be able to focus

the whole of the subject.hen shooting in macro mode, the focus justment becomes slower to accurately focus a close subject.

971018M80min

MAF

For closinsects, can shoo(13/16 incend. Howdependsrecommend duri

When tthe W sApprox.the lens

When tthe T sApprox.of the le

• We reco(page 6

e-ups of subjects like flowers or shoot using the macro feature. You t subjects approaching up to 2 cm hes) when the zoom is set to its W-ever, the available focus distance

on the zoom position. We end that you set the zoom to its W-ng shooting.

he zoom is set all the way to ide: 2 cm (13/16 inches) from the end of

he zoom is set all the way to ide: 60 cm (23 5/8 inches) from the end ns

mmend that you use Flexible Spot AF 5).

, Set the mode dial to , and press (macro).

The (macro) indicator appears on the screen.

• You can carry out this operation even when the mode dial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN (other than

(Twilight mode) or (Landscape mode)) or .

,

To rPresdisa

• Wis von

• Wadon

1

981018M80min

MAF

2

sing the flash

he flash automatically pops up and strobes hen the surroundings are dark. Close the ash by hand after using it.

When [ISO] is set to [Auto] in the menu settings, the recommended shooting distance using the flash is approx. 0.5 m to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to 14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W)/0.6 m to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to 10 feet 10 inches) (T).Attaching the supplied lens hood blocks the flash light.While the flash is being charged, the (flash) lamp flashes. After charging is completed, the lamp goes out.You can also select the following flash modes:

(Forced flash), (Slow synchro), and (No flash). For details on these modes, see page 68.

lash emitter

Hologram AF emitter

34

The screen

• Youmod

(self-timer) indicator appears on the .

can carry out this operation even when the e dial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN or .

button halfway down, then press the shutter button fully down.

The self-timer lamp (page 9) will flash, and you will hear a beeping sound. The image will be shot after approximately 10 seconds.

To cancel the self-timer during the operationPress / (self-timer) again. The indicator dissapears from the screen.

• If you stand in front of the camera and press the shutter button, the focus and the exposure may not be correctly set.

fl

•

•

•

•

Usin

, Sp

1

M

8

g the self-timer

et the mode dial to , and ress / (self-timer).

101

988M

AF

0min

/

, Center the subject in the frame, and press and hold the shutter

2

101

98FINE8M

MAF F2.0 0EV250

80min

U

Tw

F

35

Shooting still im

ages

out Hologram AFlogram AF (Auto-Focus)” is an AF fill t system that applies laser holograms to le you to shoot still images in dark es. The Hologram AF system uses ler radiation than conventional high-htness LEDs or lamps, thus satisfying r Class 1* specifications and taining higher safety for human eyes.afety problems will be caused by ing directly into the hologram AF ter at a close range. However, it is not mmended to do so, because you may rience such effects like several minutes sidual image and dazzling, that you unter after looking into a flashlight.

logram AF satisfies Class 1 (time base 000 seconds), specified in JIS (Japan), IEC

U), and FDA (US) industry standards. mplying with these standards identifies the er product as safe, under the condition that a man can look at the laser light either directly focused through a lens for 30 000 seconds.

RecorhologThe holoeasily on

appeAF emitis presse

When no[Holograsettings • If holog

sufficiefocus wdistance16 feet (23 5/8recomm

• Focus ireachesoff the

• When athe holo

• If the hhologra

ON

ding images with the ram AFgram AF is fill light to focus more a subject in dark surroundings.ars on the screen and the hologram s red light when the shutter button d halfway until the focus is locked.

t using this function, set m AF] to [Off] in the SET UP

(page 140). ram AF light does not reach the subject ntly or the subject has weak contrast, ill not be achieved. (An approximate of 0.5 m to 5.0 m (19 3/4 inches to

4 7/8 inches) (W)/0.6 m to 3.5 m inches to 11 feet 5 7/8 inches) (T) is ended.)

s achieved as long as hologram AF light the subject, even if the light is slightly center of the subject.djusting the focus manually (page 67), gram AF does not function.

ologram AF emitter is dirty, the m AF light may be dimmed and focus

may not be achieved. In this case, wipe the hologram AF emitter with a dry cloth.

• Do not block the hologram AF emitter during recording.

• The AF range finder frame is not displayed. AF range finder frame indicator flashes and the centrally-located subject has priority to focus on.

• When you attach the supplied lens hood to the camera, the hologram AF light is blocked.

• The hologram AF does not function when [SCN] (Scene) is set to (Twilight mode) or

(Landscape mode).

Ab“HolighenabplacgentbrigLasemainNo slookemitrecoexpeof reenco

* Ho30(EColashuor

Select the date and time setting by moving the multi-selector to v/V, then press the center.

ay&Time: Inserts the date and the time of ooting into the imageate: Inserts the year, the month and the ate of shooting into the imageff: Does not insert date/time data into the age

fter the setting has been completed, set the ode dial to to shoot your image.

You can shoot even when the mode dial is set to P, S, A, M or SCN.When you chose [Date], the date will be inserted in the order set in “Setting the date and time” (page 19).This setting is maintained even when the power is turned off.

3


MonitorPrecisionDateOff


PAGE SELECT

36

Inse

, S

The S

• The Burs

• Wheinselater

• Wheinsedispon thare iwhe

1

rting the date and time on a still image

et the mode dial to SET UP.

ET UP screen appears.

date and time cannot be inserted in Multi t mode.n images are shot with the date and time

rted, the date and time cannot be removed . n shooting images with the date and time

rted, the actual date and time are not layed on the screen, and is displayed e screen instead. The actual date and time

ndicated in red on the lower-right corner n the image is played back.

, Select (Camera 1) by moving the multi-selector to v, then move to B.Select [Date/Time] by moving the multi-selector to v/V, then move to B.

,

DshDdOim

Am

•

•

•

SELECT




2

Day&TimeDateOff

Camera 1AF Mode:Digital Zoom:Date/Time:Red Eye Reduction:Hologram AF:Auto Review:

1

37

Shooting still im

agesShooting according to scene conditions – Scene Selection

ortrait modekgrounds blur away, and the subject is pened.

Portrait mode

When shpeople ashootingbelow toimages.

TwUnder dshoot a dbecause these cotripod.• You can

Twiligh– Macr– Shoo– Expo– Burst– Multi

Twi

ooting night scenes, shooting t night, shooting landscapes, or portraits, use the modes listed increase the quality of your

ilight modeark lighting conditions, you can istant night view. However, the shutter speed is slower under nditions, we recommend you use a

not use the following functions in t mode:o mode shootingting with the flashsure Bracket mode shooting Burst mode shooting

Twilight portrait modeUse this mode when shooting people in the foreground at night. This mode allows you to shoot images of people in the foreground with distinct outlines without losing the feeling that you are shooting at night.Because the shutter speed is slow, it is recommended that you use a tripod.• The flash is set to (Slow synchro).• You cannot shoot in Exposure Bracket, Burst,

or Multi Burst mode.

Landscape modeFocuses on images far away, so is convenient for shooting landscapes at a distance.• You cannot shoot in macro mode.• The flash is set to (Forced flash) or (No

flash).

PBacshar

light mode Twilight portrait mode Landscape mode

Select the desired mode by moving the multi-selector to v/V.

he mode is set. hen the setting is complete, press MENU that the menu disappears from the screen.

o cancel the Scene Selectionet the mode dial to a different mode.

When the shutter speed becomes slower than particular time, the NR slow shutter function (page 55) activates automatically. In such cases, shooting may take some time.This setting is maintained even when the power is turned off.

3

SCN ISO Mode BRKScene

38

, Sp

The m

1
et the mode dial to SCN, then ress MENU.
enu appears.

, Select [SCN] (Scene) by moving the multi-selector to b.

,

TWso

TS

•

•

MENU

2

SCN ISO Mode PFXScene

39

View

ing still images

Viewing images on the screen of your Viewing on the single-image een

Set the mode dial to , and turn on the camera.

The newest image in the selected recording er (page 83) is displayed.

e image may be too rough for image cessing right after it is displayed.

select the recording medium, use the / switch (page 21).

BACK/NEXT10:30PM2004 1 101-0008

VOLUME

8/91018M80min

Viewing still images

You can

Index sNine im

• You can• For det• For a de

view one image at a time, occupying the entire screen.

creenages are displayed simultaneously in separate panels on the screen.

easily view the next/previous image by turning the command dial.ails on the movies, see page 101.tailed description of the screen indicators, see page 153.

fold

• Thpro

• ToCF

ca

You canthe follo

Single

mera

view images shot with the camera almost immediately on the screen. You can select wing two methods for viewing images.

screen

BACK/NEXT VOLUME10:30PM2004 1 1101-0008

8/91018M80min

SINGLE DISPLAY

Single screen Index screen

scr

,

1

1

40

, Sbb

b : DB : D

2

/B.

isplays the previous image.isplays the next image.

To display the next (previous) Index screenMove the multi-selector to v/V/b/B to move the yellow frame up/down/left/right.

To return to the single-image screenPress / (index) again, or press the center of the multi-selector.

elect the desired still image y moving the multi-selector to

BACK/NEXT10:30PM2004 1 1101-0003

VOLUME

3/91018M80min

Viewing on the index screen

, Press / (index).

The display switches to the Index screen.

SINGLE DISPLAY

/

41

View

ing still images

Viewing images on a TV screen

Set the mode dial to , and turn on the camera.

e the multi-selector to b/B to select the red image.

hen using the camera abroad, it may be cessary to switch the video output signal to tch that of your TV system (page 142). select the recording medium, use the / switch (page 21).

BACK/NEXT10:30PM2004 1 1101-0002

VOLUME

2/91018M80min

, CoconOUcaminp

If your Tconnect connectijack.

• Turn ofconnecconnec

1A(Mja

A/V conneccable (suppl

nnect the supplied A/V necting cable to the A/V T (MONO) jack of the era and the audio/video

ut jacks of the TV.

V has stereo type input jacks, the audio plug (black) of the A/V ng cable to the Lch audio input

f both the camera and the TV before ting the camera and the TV with the A/V ting cable.

, Turn on the TV, and set the TV/Video switch to “Video.”

• The name and location of this switch may differ depending on your TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.

,

Movdesi

• Wnema

• ToCF

/V OUT ONO)

ck

ting

ied)

2 TV/Video switch 3

42

WatcIf youneed aA/V cThe cthat ofollow

NTSCBahamAmerJamaiSurinU.S.A

PAL AustrRepubHollaMalaySingaSwedKingd

PAL-Brazi

PAL-Argen

hing images on a TV screen want to view images on a TV, you TV having a video input jack and the onnecting cable (supplied).olor system of the TV must match as f your digital still camera. Check the ing list:

systema Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central

ica, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, ca, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, am, Taiwan, the Philippines, the ., Venezuela, etc.

systemalia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech lic, Denmark, Finland, Germany,

nd, Hong Kong, Italy, Kuwait, sia, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal,

pore, Slovak Republic, Spain, en, Switzerland, Thailand, United om, etc.

M systeml

N systemtina, Paraguay, Uruguay

SECAM systemBulgaria, France, Guiana, Hungary, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Poland, Russia, Ukraine, etc.

43

Deleting still im

agesDeleting images

Select [Delete] by moving the multi-selector to v , then press the center.

cess” appears on the screen and the e will be deleted.

elete other images continuouslyct the image you want to delete by ing the multi-selector to b/B. Next, ct [Delete] by moving the multi-selector , then press the center.

ancel the deletionct [Exit] by moving the multi-selector , then press the center.

2/91018M

Delete

ExitBACK/NEXT

80min

Deleting still images

, SetturSeldelsel

• To selecCF swi

• Note threcover

1

BACK/101-000

80mi

the mode dial to , and n on the camera.ect the image you want to ete by moving the multi-ector to b/B.

t the recording medium, use the /tch (page 21).at the images once deleted cannot be ed.

, Press (delete).

The image has not yet been deleted at this point.

• You cannot delete protected images (page 89).

,

“Acimag

To dSelemovseleto v

To cSeleto V

NEXT10:30PM2004 1 12

2/9

VOLUME

1018Mn

2

2/9101

Delete

ExitBACK/NEXT

8M80min

3

Select the image you want to delete by moving the multi-selector to v/V/b/B, then press the center.

he (delete) mark is indicated on the lected image. The image has not yet been

eleted at this point. Put the mark on all f the images you want to delete.

To cancel your selection, select images you want to cancel and press the center of the multi-selector again. The mark disappears.

3

TO NEXT• Select

44

Dele

, W((

• Notereco

1

ting on the Index screen

hile an Index screen page 40) is displayed, press delete).

that the images once deleted cannot be vered.

, Select [Select] by moving the multi-selector to b/B, then press the center.

,

Tsedo

•

Select All In This FolderExitDelete

2

Select All In This FolderExitDelete

45

Deleting still im

agesFormatting a recording medium

Insert the recording medium you want to format into the camera. Select the recording

medium with the /CF switch. Set the mode dial to SET UP, and turn on the camera.

e term “formatting” means preparing a ording medium to record images; this cess is also called “initialization.” e “Memory Stick” is already formatted, and be used immediately.

sure to format the Microdrive/CF card using s camera. Otherwise, satisfactory rformance may not be obtained.hen you format a recording medium, aware that all of the data in the cording medium will be permanently ased. Protected images are also ased.

/CF switch

the

“Accessthe imag

To canSelect [Eto b, the

center.

” appears on the screen and all of es with marks will be deleted.

cel the deletionxit] by moving the multi-selector n press the center.

• Threcpro

• Thcan

• Bethipe

• Wbereerer

, PreSelmu

4
ss (delete). ect [OK] by moving the lti-selector to B, then press
Exit OKDelete

To delete all the images in the folderIn Step 2, Select [All In This Folder] by moving the multi-selector to B, then press the center. Next, select [OK], then press the center. All of the unprotected images in the folder are deleted. To cancel the deletion, select [Cancel], then press the center.

,

1

Select [OK] by moving the multi-selector to v , then press the center.

he “Formatting” message appears on the reen. When this message disappears, the rmat is complete.

4

Ready?

Format

All data will be erased

CancelOK

46

, WSSmWCTsSmto

• Wherecoprev

2
hen you format a “Memory tick,” select (Memory tick Tool) by moving the ulti-selector to v/V.hen you format a Microdrive/F card, select (CF Card ool) by moving the multi-elector to v/V.elect [Format] by moving the ulti-selector to B, then move B.
n formatting a recording medium, we mmend that you use the AC Adaptor to ent the camera turning off.

, Select [OK] by moving the multi-selector to v , then press the center.

To cancel the formattingSelect [Cancel] by moving the multi-selector to V, then press the center.

,

Tscfo

Memory Stick Tool

CancelOKFormat:

Create REC. Folder:Change REC. Folder:

3

Memory Stick Tool

CancelOKFormat:

Create REC. Folder:Change REC. Folder:

47


Changing menu settings To turn off the menu displays MENU.

u cannot select the dim items.r details on the menu items, see page 137.


How to setup and operate your camera

This section describes how to operate the menu and the SET UP screen. The multi-selector is used for these operation.

• For details on the mode dial, see page 28.

a Press MENU.

The menu appears.

b Select the setting item you want to change by moving the multi-selector to b/B.

c Select the desired setting by moving the multi-selector to v/V.The frame of the selected setting is scaled up, and the setting is entered.

When the v mark is indicated above the item or the V mark is indicated below the itemAll of the available items are not displayed on the screen. Moving the multi-selector to v/V displays the hidden items.

Pres

• Yo• Fo

Mode dial

Multi-selector (v/V/b/B)

MENU

8M3:25M3M1M

Image Size

8M

Mode

Mode

RAWTIFFVoiceE-Mail

NormalREC Mode

Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M, SCN or .

Press and hold the button you want to operate and turn the command dial.

The value or setting that is indicated on the screen is entered.

Release the button.The indicators disappears from the screen.

/BRK

Command dial

NIGHTSHOT/NIGHTFRAMING

WB

Mode dial

48

Changing items in the SET UP screen

a Set the mode dial to SET UP.

The SET UP screen appears.

b Select the setting item you want to change by moving the multi-selector to v/V/b/B.The frame of the item you select turns yellow.

c Press the center of the multi-selector to enter the setting.

To turn off the SET UP screen displaySet the mode dial to any position other than SET UP.

• For details on the SET UP items, see page 140.

How to use the command dial

There are two methods for operating the command dial. One is using only the command dial and the other is using the command dial in combination with other buttons. This section describes the method used when operating the commnad dial in combination with other buttons.

This method is used for the following functions.• Manual exposure (page 57)• Metering mode (page 58)• Exposure adjustment (page 59)• Exposure Bracket (page 63)• Flash mode (page 68)• White balance (page 73)• Burst (page 75)• Multi Burst (page 76)• Nightshot/Nightframing (page 77)

a

b

c

SELECT




CancelOK


49


• The following functions can be set by simply b Press MENU.The menu appears.

Select (P. Quality) with b/B, then select the desired image quality with v/V.

Fine FINEStandardP. Quality

ISO Mode BRK

turning the command dial.– Program shift (page 54)– Shutter speed priority mode (page 55)– Aperture priority mode (page 56)

• You can view the next/previous image during playback.

Deciding the still image quality

Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCNYou can select the still image quality from [Fine] or [Standard].This camera is equipped with other methods to select the image quality. You can select these settings using the [Mode] (REC Mode) item in the menu. These items are as follows: [RAW] which records raw data (page 79), [TIFF] which records uncompressed data (page 80), and [E-Mail] which records data suitable for sending e-mail (page 81).

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M or SCN.

c

Mode dial


MENU

Images are recorded in the newly created folder until a different folder is created or selected.

50

Creating or selecting a folder

Mode dial: SET UPYour camera can create multiple folders within a recording medium. You can select the folder used to store images. When not creating a new folder, “101MSDCF” folder is selected as the recording folder.You can create folders up to “999MSDCF.”

• Up to 4000 images can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new folder is automatically created.

Creating a new folder

a Set the mode dial to SET UP, and select the recording medium with the /CF switch.

b Select (Memory Stick Tool) or (CF Card Tool) with v/V, [Create REC. Folder] with B/v/V, and [OK] with B/v , then press the center.The following screen appears.

c Select [OK] with v , then press the center.A new folder is created with a number one higher than the largest number in the recording medium, and the folder becomes the recording folder.

To cancel folder creationIn Step 2 or 3, select [Cancel].

• Once you create a new folder, you cannot delete the new folder with the camera.

•

Mode dial


/CF switch

Create REC. Folder

Creating REC. folder 102MSDCFReady?

OKCancel

80min

51


Selecting the recording • The image is stored in the newly selected

folder

a Set the mode dial to SET UP, and select the recording medium with the /CF switch.

b Select (Memory Stick Tool) or (CF Card Tool) with v/V, [Change REC. Folder] with B/V, and [OK] with B/v , then press the center.The recording folder selection screen appears.

c Select the desired folder with b/B, and [OK] with v , then press the center.

To cancel changing the recording folderIn Step 2 or 3, select [Cancel].

• You cannot select the “100MSDCF” folder as a recording folder.

folder. You cannot move images to other folders using the camera.

BACK/NEXT

Select REC. Folder

CancelOK

Folder Name:102 2/2

Created:No. Of Files:

2004

102MSDCF0

1 1 1::05:34AM

: To shoot a night scene?

Shooting with shutter speed riority mode (page 55)sing the flash in the auto adjustment mode stricts the shutter speed and the flash light

oes not reach distant subjects. The image, erefore, is not captured clearly. In such

ases, slow the shutter speed manually, set e flash to (No flash), and reduce the ght using the EV adjustment. You can then oot a clear night scene.

Advanced still image shooting

52

Manual features to photo-shooting situationsAfter you are familiar with your camera, let’s shoot an image in various situations with some settings changed. This section describes some representative manual shooting examples.

Q: To shoot a portrait with its background blurred?

, Shooting with aperture priority mode (page 56)When you want to enhance the person with the background blurred, adjust the aperture manually. The more the aperture is opened (the aperture value becomes smaller), the narrower the focus is. The background is blurred accordingly.

Q: To shoot a portrait against light?

, Selecting a flash mode (page 68)Shooting a human subject in a bright place can create dim facial shadows. This occurs when the background is brighter than the person. In such cases, set the flash to (Forced flash). You can shoot both the person and the background clearly.

• You can use the flash within the reach of the flash light.

Q

,

pUredthcthlish

53

Advanced still im

age shootingQ: To shoot without flash? Q: To shoot a moving subject? Q: To shoot the beautiful

rglow of the sunset

Adjusting color tones (page 73)e image you shot is not expressed in favorite colors, change the white nce mode. Setting the white balance e to (Daylight) enhances the redness e sunset.

, Selecting the ISO sensitivity (page 64)When you cannot use the flash or set the shutter speed slower, increase the ISO rating. The higher rated ISO setting helps maximize the effect of the surrounding light to shoot.

, Shooting with shutter speed priority mode (page 55)When shooting a moving person or subject, set the shutter speed higher to freeze the motion or set the shutter speed slower to get the flow of motion of the subject. Adjust the shutter speed to express a moment that is beyond the speed of the naked eye.

afte

, If thyourbalamodof th

You may not be able to change the aperture value and shutter speed combination depending on your shooting situations.When the flash mode setting is changed, Program Shift is canceled.Setting the mode dial to other than P or turning off the power cancels Program Shift.

54

Shooting with Program auto

Mode dial: PIn program auto mode, the camera automatically adjusts the shutter speed and the aperture according to the brightness of the subject just as in the auto adjustment mode (mode dial: ). In addition, the program auto mode can change the shooting settings in the menu, a feature which the auto adjustment mode does not have (page 137).

Program Shift

You can change the aperture value and shutter speed combination while keeping the brightness fixed.

a Set the mode dial to P.

b Select the aperture value and shutter speed combination with the command dial.

is indicated while the aperture value and shutter speed combination is shifted.

c Shoot the image.

To cancel Program ShiftTurn the command dial to return the indication from to .

• You cannot shift the aperture value and shutter speed combination when the shutter button is pressed halfway down.

• When the brightness changes, the aperture value and shutter speed also change while maintaining the shift amount.

•

•

•

Mode dial

Command dial

Shutter button

8M

F2.0

80min

250

98FINE

MAF

P101

55

Advanced still im

age shootinga Set the mode dial to S.

R slow shuttere NR slow shutter mode removes noise m recorded images, providing clear ages. When using shutter speeds of 1/25 cond or slower, the camera automatically orks the NR slow shutter mode and “NR” indicated next to the shutter speed dicator.

Press the shutter button fully down.

r

Then the screen turns black.

r

Finally, when “Processing” disappears, the image has been recorded.

To eliminate the effects of vibration, use of a tripod is recommended.When a slow shutter speed is set, the processing may take some time. This is because the camera works to remove noise during the time set by the shutter speed setting.

F2.8NR2''

Capturing

Processing

Shooting with shutter speed priority mode

Mode dial: SYou can adjust the shutter speed manually. If you shoot a moving subject at a higher shutter speed, it appears as if frozen on the image. At a lower shutter speed, the subject appears as if it flowing.Aperture value is automatically adjusted to attain correct exposure according to the brightness of the subject.

b Select a shutter speed with the command dial.

The shutter speed can be selected from 1/2000 to 30 seconds.If you select 1/25 second or slower shutter speeds, the NR slow shutter function is automatically activated. In such cases, “NR” is indicated at the left of shutter speed indicator.

c Shoot the image.

• Shutter speeds of one second or longer are indicated with ["] after the value, such as 1".

• If the proper exposure is not obtained after making the settings, the setting value indicators on the screen flashes when the shutter button is pressed halfway down. You can shoot in this condition, but we recommend that you adjust the flashing values again.

• The flash is set to (Forced flash) or (No flash).

• When the shutter speed is high, the amount of flash light may be insufficient even if you strobes the flash.

• You can adjust the exposure value (page 59).

High shutter speed Slow shutter speed

Mode dial

Command dial

Shutter button

8M

F2.0 0EV

S

98FINE

MAF

10180min

250200

320

S

NThfroimsewis in

•

•

Set the mode dial to A.

Select an aperture value with the command dial.

The range of values that can be selected varies, depending on the zoom position. The aperture value can be selected from F2 to F8 (W)/ from F2.8 to F8 (T).

Shoot the image.

Mode dial

Command dial

Shutter button

8M

250 0EV

F

98FINE

MAF

10180min

2.22.0

2.5

A

56

Shooting with aperture priority mode

Mode dial: AYou can adjust the amount of light that passes through the lens. If you open the aperture (a smaller F-number), the amount of light allowed into the lens increases and the in-focus range becomes narrower. Only the main subject is then in focus. When the aperture is closed (a larger F-number), the amount of light decreases and the in-focus range becomes wider. The whole image is sharpened.The shutter speed is automatically adjusted to obtain correct exposure according to the brightness of the subject.

a

b

c

Shooting techniquesWhen shooting a moving person, car, or spindrift, etc., using the high shutter speed, you can express moment that is beyond what the human eye can see.

When shooting a subject such as the flow of a river at a slower shutter speed, you can create an image that captures the subject’s flowing movement. In such cases, use of a tripod is recommended to prevent camera shake.

• When you hand-hold the camera, adjust the shutter speed in a range where (Vibration warning indicator) is not indicated.

Open the aperture Close the aperture

57

Advanced still im

age shooting• The shutter speed is automatically adjusted

ooting with manual posure mode

de dial: M can manually adjust the shutter speed aperture values. difference between the set value and ppropriate exposure determined by the era is displayed on the screen as the EV e (page 59). 0EV indicates the most ble value set by the camera.

camera maintains the setting even n the power is turned off. Once you set lue you like, you can reproduce the e exposure by simply setting the mode to M.

from 1/2000 to 8 seconds. When you set an aperture value of F8, the values start from 1/3200 second.


• The flash is set to (Forced flash), (Slow synchro) or (No flash).

• You can adjust the exposure value (page 59).

Shex

MoYouand Thethe acamvalusuitaThewhea vasamdial

Shooting techniquesThe depth of field is the in-focus range. Opening the aperture makes the depth of field shallower (the in-focus range becomes narrower) and closing the aperture makes the depth of field wider (the in-focus range becomes wider).

Adjust the aperture to suit your purpose, either to sharpen the specific area of image, or to focus on the entire image.

Close the apertureBoth the subject and its background are focused on.

Open the apertureThe subject is clear and its background is blurred.

Mm

electing the etering mode

ode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/ou can select a metering mode to etermine the exposure, depending on what art of the subject is used to measure.

ulti-pattern metering ( )he image is slipt up into multiple zones, ach of which are evaluated individually. he camera calculates the best-fit exposure ased on the subject’s position and ackground brightness.he default setting is multi-pattern etering.

enter-weighted metering ( )etering is performed with priority given the center of the image. The camera

etermines the exposure based on the rightness of a subject near the center.

58

a Set the mode dial to M.

b Select a shutter speed with the command dial.

c Press and hold (exposure) and select an aperture value with the command dial.

d Shoot the image.


• The flash is set to (Forced flash) or (No flash).

Sm

MYdp

MTeTbbTm

CMtodb

Mode dial

Command dial

Shutter button

8M

F2.0 0EV

S

98FINE

MAF

10180min

250200

320

M

8M

250 0EV

F

98FINE

MAF

10180min

2.22.0

2.5

M

59

Advanced still im

age shootingSpot metering ( ) c When selecting Spot metering

justing the posure

V adjustment

de dial: P/S/A/SCN/ can manually shift the exposure value rmined by the camera. Use this mode n you do not get the proper exposure, nstance, the subject and its background high contrast (light and dark). The e can be set a range from +2.0EV to EV, in 1/3EV increments.

djust ward

Adjust toward +

Spot metering allows you to meter for the subject directly in a small area of the whole image. This lets you adjust the exposure to the subject even when the subject is backlit or there is strong contrast between the subject and the background.

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M, SCN or .

b Press and hold (metering mode) and select the desired metering mode with the command dial.

in Step 2, position the spot metering cross hair on one point of the subject you want to shoot.

• When using center-weighted metering or spot metering, to focus on the same spot as used for metering, we recommend using the center weighted AF range finder frame (page 65).

• You cannot select the metering mode when using the NightShot/NightFraming function.

Adex

– E

MoYoudetewhefor ihavevalu–2.0

Mode dial

Command dial

8M

F2.0250

98FINE

MAF

10180minP

Spot metering cross hair

Ato–

isplaying a histogram

histogram is a graph showing the rightness of an image. The horizontal axis ows the brightness, and the vertical axis ows the number of pixels. The graph

isplay indicates a dark image when ewed to the left side, and a bright image hen skewed to the right side. The istogram is a useful reference for checking e exposure during recording and playback hen the screen is hard to be seen.

Set the mode dial to P, S, A or SCN.

Press (screen status) to display the histogram.

Adjust the exposure based on the histogram.

The histogram also appears when the mode dial is set to or M, but the EV adjustment is deactivated.

80 8M4

FINE 101

0EV

Nu

mb

er o

f p

ixel

s

Dark Bright

Brightness

60

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A,

SCN or .

b Press and hold (exposure) and select the desired exposure value with the command dial.The value of the exposure adjustment is displayed.Adjust the exposure value while checking the brightness of the background.

To reactivate auto exposureIn Step 2, select [0EV].

• When the subject is extremely bright or extremely dark, or when you are using the flash, the adjustment may not work.

D

Abshshdskwhthw

a

b

c

•

Mode dial

Command dial

8M

250 F2.0

98FINE

MAF

10180min

+1.3EV+1.7EV

+1.0EV

P

61

Advanced still im

age shooting• The histogram also appears when you press

n shooting a darker overall image, the ra judges that the subject is dark and may

brighter exposure for the image. In such , adjustment of the exposure in the – s direction is effective.

can check the exposure referring to the gram chart. Be careful not to overexpose derexpose your subject (giving a whitish rkish image).

can try to adjust the exposure to suit your .

m

Adjust in the – direction

(screen status) while playing back a single image (page 39) or during Quick Review (page 29).

• The histogram does not appear in the following cases:– When the menu is displayed– During Quick Review of an image recorded

in Exposure Bracket mode– When using playback zoom– When shooting or playing back movies

• appears and the histogram does not appear in the following cases:– When recording in the digital zoom range– When the image size is [3:2]– When playing back Multi Burst mode images– When a still image is rotated

• The histogram before recording represents the histogram of the image displayed on the screen at that time. A difference occurs in the histogram before and after you press the shutter button. When this happens, check the histogram while playing back a single-image or during Quick Review.In particular a large difference may appear in the following cases:– When the flash strobes– When using the NightFraming function– When [PFX] (P.Effect) is set to [Solarize]– When the shutter speed is slow or high

• The histogram may not appear for images recorded using other cameras.

Shooting techniquesWhile shooting images, the camera automatically determines the exposure. When shooting a whitish overall image such as a backlit subject or a snowy scene, the camera judges that the subject is bright and may set a darker exposure for the image. In such cases, adjustment of the exposure in the + plus direction is effective.

Whecameset acasesminu

You histoor unor da

You taste

mAdjust in the + direction

Shooting techniquesThe camera automatically adjusts the exposure according to the subject. If you change the composition of your shot, the exposure may be changed, such as by changes in the brightness of the background. In such cases, use the AE lock function. You can shoot freely, regardless of the brightness of the subject.

To determine the exposure, measure the exposure of the desired portion of the subject using either center-weighted metering or the spot metering function. Press AE LOCK to lock the exposure, and then recompose the picture and shoot.

m

Portion of the image used to determine the exposure

62

Shooting with the exposure fixed

– AE LOCK

Mode dial: P/S/A/SCN/You can lock the exposure before recomposing the image. This is useful when the contrast of the subject and its background is extremely high or you shoot a backlit subject.

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, SCN or .

b Target the subject for which you want to meter the exposure, then press AE LOCK.The exposure is fixed and the indicator appears.

c Recompose the image and press and hold the shutter button halfway down.The focus is automatically adjusted.

d Press the shutter button fully down.

To release AE LOCKCarry out one of the followings:• Press AE LOCK again after Step 2.• Release your finger from the shutter

button after Step 3.• Press down the shutter button in Step 4.

Mode dial

Shutter button

AE LOCK

8M

F2.0250

98FINE

MAF

10180minP

63

Advanced still im

age shooting

Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M or SCN.

Press and hold /BRK (bracket) and select [BRK] with the command dial.

Press MENU.The menu appears.

Mode dial

Command dial

Shutter button

MENU/BRK

8M

250 F2.0

98FINE

MAF

10180min

BRK

P

Shooting three images with the exposure shifted

– Exposure Bracket

Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCNIn addition to an image with the exposure automatically set by the camera, two other images are recorded with exposure values shifted to the + and – sides.If you cannot shoot with the proper brightness due to the brightness of the subject, use the Exposure Bracket mode. You can select the image that has a suitable exposure after shooting.

a

b

c

First shot (Adjusted in the + direction)

Second shot (Proper exposure set by the camera)

Third shot (Adjusted in the – direction)

electing the ISO ensitivity

ISO

ode dial: P/S/A/Mou can change the camera’s sensitivity to ght. When you select a high-number tting, you can shoot in a dark place. ormally, the ISO sensitivity is set to uto]. When set to [Auto], the ISO nsitivity is automatically increased in a

ark place.

Set the mode dial to P, S, A or M.


Mode dial


MENU

64

d Select [BRK] (Bracket Step) with b/B, then select the desired bracket step value with v/V.±1.0EV: Shifts the exposure value by plus or minus 1.0EV.±0.7EV: Shifts the exposure value by plus or minus 0.7EV.±0.3EV: Shifts the exposure value by plus or minus 0.3EV.

e Shoot the image.

To return to normal modeIn Step 2, select [Normal].

• When [Mode] (REC Mode) is not set to [Normal], you cannot use the Exposure Bracket mode.

• You may not be able to use the Exposure Bracket mode depending on the Scene Selection mode (page 37).

• You cannot use the flash in this mode.• During shooting in this mode, the images are

not displayed on the screen. Compose the image before pressing the shutter button.

• The focus and white balance are adjusted for the first image, and these settings are also used for the other images.

• When the exposure is manually adjusted (page 59), the exposure is shifted based on the adjusted brightness.

• The recording interval is approximately 0.42 second.

• If the subject is too bright or too dark, you may be unable to shoot properly with the selected bracket step value.

• You cannot select shutter speeds of 1/25 second or slower.

Ss

–

MYliseN[Ased

a

b

65

Advanced still im

age shootingc Select [ISO] with b, then select Choosing a focus range

der frame

F range finder

de dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/

ltipoint AF ( ) camera calculates the distance in five es to the top, the bottom, the left, the t, and in the center of the image, letting shoot using the auto focus function out worrying about the image position. This is useful when it is cult to focus on the subject because it is in the center of the frame. You can k the position where the focus was sted using the green frame. default setting is Multipoint AF.

ter AF ( ) AF range finder is only the center of the e. You can shoot in desired image position using the AF lock method.

desired setting with v/V.Choose from [800], [400], [200], [100], [64], or [Auto].

To return to normal modeIn Step 3, select [Auto].

• To reduce camera shake, select a large number. You can shoot a subject with higher shutter speed.

• When selecting a large number, the image becomes noisy. To give priority to image quality, select a small number.

Choosing an auto focus method

You can set the AF range finder frame and the AF mode.

AF range finder frameThe AF range finder frame selects the focus position according to the subject position and size.

AF ModeThe AF mode is set automatically when the camera starts and stops focusing on a subject.

fin

– A

Mo

MuTheplacrighyou withcomdiffinot checadjuThe

CenTheframcom

Mode dial


FOCUS

hoosing a focus operation

AF Mode

ode dial: SET UP

ingle AF ( )his mode is useful for shooting stationary bjects. The focus is not adjusted before

ou press and hold the shutter button alfway down. After you press and hold the utter button halfway down and AF lock is

omplete, the focus is locked.

onitoring AF ( )his shortens the time needed for focusing. he camera automatically adjusts the focus efore you press and hold the shutter button alfway down, letting you compose images ith the focus already adjusted. After you ress and hold the shutter button halfway own and AF lock is complete, the focus is cked.he default setting is Monitoring AF.

Battery consumption may be higher than in Single AF mode.

S AF

M AF

66

Flexible Spot AF ( )This is useful when focusing on an extremely small subject or a narrow area. Flexible Spot AF lets you shoot in the desired image composition. This is useful when you shoot using a tripod and the subject is out of the center area. When shooting a moving subject, take care to hold the camera steady so that the subject does not deviate from the range finder frame.


b Set the FOCUS switch to AUTO.

c Press the center of the multi-selector repeatedly to select the desired mode.

d When selecting Flexible Spot AF in Step 3, move the AF range finder frame to the portion you want to focus on with v/V/b/B.

When you press and hold the shutter button halfway down, and the focus is adjusted, the color of the AF range finder frame changes from white to green.

• When you are shooting movies and you choose Multipoint AF, the distance to the center of the screen is estimated as an average, so the AF works even with a certain amount of vibration. The AF range finder frame indicator is . Center AF and Flexible Spot AF automatically focus only on selected frame, so this is convenient when you want to focus only on what you aim at.

• When you use the digital zoom or hologram AF, priority AF movement is given to subjects in or near the center of the frame. In this case, the AF range finder frame indicator flashes and the AF range finder frame is not displayed.

C

–

M

STsuyhshc

MTTbhwpdloT

•

8M

F2.0250

98FINE

MAF

10180minP

AF range finder frame

AF range finder frame indicator

8M

F2.0250

98FINE

MAF

10180minP

67

Advanced still im

age shootingContinuous AF ( ) a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M,

SCN or .

Set the FOCUS switch to MANUAL.The 9 (manual focus) indicator appears on the screen.

Turn the manual focus ring to achieve a sharp focus.The focus distance information indicator is displayed. You can adjust the focus in the following macro ranges. T-side: about 60 cm (23 5/8 inches) to ∞ (infinite)W-side: 2 cm (13/16 inches) to ∞ (infinite).If [Expanded Focus] in the SET UP settings is set to [On], the image is zoomed to 2× to achieve the focus easily when recording still images.The default setting is [On]. When the image returns to normal size and the 9 (manual focus) indicator changes from yellow to white, a sharp focus is achieved.When the 9 indicator flashes, the focus distance has reached its limit.

reactivate auto focusingthe FOCUS switch to AUTO.

C AF

The camera adjusts the focus before you press and hold the shutter button halfway down, and then continues to adjust the focus even after AF lock is completed. This allows shooting of moving subjects with continued focus. However, focus adjustment may not be able to keep up when shooting fast moving subjects. The AF range finder frame is Center AF.

• The focus is not adjusted after the lock is completed in the following cases, and the “C AF” indicator flashes. The camera operates in Monitoring AF mode.– When shooting in the dark place– When shooting with a slow shutter speed– When using the NightShot/NightFraming

functions• There is no lock sound when the focus is

achieved.• When you press the shutter button all the way

down using the self-timer, the focus is locked.• Battery consumption may be higher than in any

other AF mode.


b Select (Camera 1) with v , then select [AF Mode] with B/v.

c Select the desired mode with B/v/V, then press the center.

Focusing manually

Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/Normally the focus is automatically adjusted. However, the auto focus may not work well, such as in the following cases. In these cases, adjust the focus manually.

Subjects that are hard to be focused on• Subjects with little contrast with

backgrounds such as walls, and sky• Subjects in very dark places• Metals that have great reflection, or

subjects with the light source behind them and that have great reflection.

• Subjects through a chain-link fence or glasses.

b

c

To Set

1

Mode dial

Manual focus ring

FOCUS

Far

Near

Set the mode dial to , P, S, A, M or SCN.

Press and hold (flash) and select the desired mode with the command dial.

Note that the surface of the flash emitter may be hot right after you use the flash several times in succession.The recommended distance using the flash is about 0.5 m to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to 14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W)/0.6 m to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to 10 feet 10 inches) (T) (when [ISO] is set to [Auto]).

Mode dial

Command dial

8M9810180min

MAF

68

• The focus distance information indicator is approximate, and should be used as a reference.

• The focus distance information indicator does not appear when using the NightShot function.

• When focusing manually, the following functions cannot be used:– Macro mode shooting– NightFraming function

• When recording movies, the expanded focus function cannot be used.

Selecting a flash mode

Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCNNormally, the flash automatically pops up and strobes when the surroundings are dark. You can intentionally change the flash mode.

Auto (No indicator)The camera decides to use the flash based on lighting conditions. The default setting is Auto.

Forced flash ( )The flash fires regardless of the amout of ambient light.

Slow synchro ( )The flash fires regardless of the amout of ambient light. In this mode, the shutter speed becomes slower under dark conditions, so you can clearly shoot a background that is out of the flash-lit area.

No flash ( )The flash does not fire regardless of the amount of ambient light.

a

b

•

•

69

Advanced still im

age shooting• Attaching the supplied lens hood blocks a flash

reduce “red-eye” when ooting live subjectse flash pre-strobes before shooting

reduce the red-eye phenomenon. Set ed Eye Reduction] to [On] in the T UP settings (page 140). pears on the screen.

The amount of red-eye reduction possible varies according to the individual. In addition, the distance to the subject, and whether or not the subject has seen pre-strobe light begin to strobe may also reduce the effectiveness of the red-eye reduction process.

m

light.• Because the shutter speed is slower under dark

conditions when (Slow synchro) or (No flash) is selected, it is recommended that you use a tripod.

• While the flash is being charged, the lamp flashes. After charging is completed, the lamp goes out.

• You can change the brightness of the flash using [Flash Level] in the menu settings (page 70). (Except when the mode dial is set to

.)• You can mount an external flash on this camera

(page 71).

To pop up the flash manually (Pop-up Flash mode)Normally, the flash strobes automatically according to lighting conditions. However, you can pop up the flash only when you want to use it. Set [Pop-up Flash] to [Manual] in the SET UP settings (page 140).

To strobe the flash

1 Slide the OPEN (FLASH) switch in the arrow direction.The flash pops up.

2 Set the flash mode to (Forced flash) or (Slow synchro).

3 Shoot the image.

To return to auto modeSet [Pop-up Flash] to [Auto] in the SET UP settings.

OPEN (FLASH)

ToshThto[RSEap

•

djusting the flash evel

Flash Level

ode dial: P/S/A/M/SCNou can adjust the amout of flash light.

Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M or SCN.


Mode dial


MENU

70

such situations, setting the flash mode to (No flash) slows the shutter speed automatically. This is effective when you shoot the trail of a car, the spectrum of a light, or the sunset. We recommend you use a tripod to prevent camera shake.

a

b

Shooting techniquesMaking the best of the flash gives you various options.

When you set the flash mode to (Forced flash), you can shoot a back-lit subject brightly. An effect in which the flash light reflects in the subject’s eye is also available.

When the flash mode is set to Auto, the flash may strobe regardless of your intentions. In

The (Slow synchro) is effective when you shoot a person during a sunset and the like. You can shoot the person clearly using the flash light and the background using a long exposure. If the camera cannot shoot clearly using the slow shutter, it automatically increases the ISO number. We recommend you use a tripod to prevent camera shake.

Al

–

MY

71

Advanced still im

age shootingc Select [ ] (Flash Level) with • You cannot have an external flash and the built-

flash strobe at the same time.you use two or more external flashes at the

e time, note that the camera may not be able function properly, or that may cause a lfunction.

hen the proper white balance is not set using external flash, set the flash mode to rced flash) or (Slow synchro), then set white balance using the (one-push T) (page 73).

b/B, then select the desired setting with v/V.High: Makes the flash level higher than normal. Normal: Normal setting.Low: Makes the flash level lower than normal.

Using an external flash

Mode dial: /P/S/A/M/SCNYou can mount an optional external flash. Using an external flash increases the amount of light and that will allow you to shoot more vivid flash pictures than when using the internal flash. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with your flash.

• When an external flash is mounted, the weight prevents the lens portion from becoming steady. We recommend supporting the lens portion with your left hand or using a tripod for recording.

in • If

samto ma

• Wan(FotheSE

Mode dial


Shutter buttonAdvanced accessory shoe

ACC (accessory) jack

Set the most appropriate aperture value according to the guide number of the flash used and the distance to the subject.The flash guide number varies according to the ISO sensitivity (page 64) of the camera, so be sure to check the ISO number.Note that the camera may not function properly or may malfunction when using a flash manufactured by another company for a specific camera (generally a flash with multiple contact points on the advanced accessory shoe), a high-voltage type flash, or a flash accessory.Depending on the type of commercially available external flash, you may be unable to use some functions, and other operations may be difficult.

72

Using the Sony Flash

You can mount the Sony HVL-F32X or HVL-F1000 flash on the advanced accessory shoe of your camera. The HVL-F32X is also equipped with automatic flash level adjustment and AF fill light shooting functions.

a Mount the external flash on the advanced accessory shoe.

b Plug the flash into the ACC (accessory) jack.When using the HVL-F32X, skip Step 2.

c Turn on the external flash.

d Set the mode dial to , P, S, A, M or SCN.

e Shoot the image.

• Check that [Hot Shoe] is set to [Off] in the SET UP settings (page 140).

• When [ISO] is set to [800], you cannot use the AUTO “B” mode of the HVL-F32X.

Using a commercially available external flash

You can mount a commercially available external flash that supports the advanced accessory shoe.

a Mount the external flash to the advanced accessory shoe.

b Set the mode dial to SET UP.

c Select (Camera 2) with v/V, [Hot Shoe] with B/v/V, [On] with B/v, then press the center.

d Turn on the external flash.

e Set the mode dial to M or A.The flash also strobes when the mode dial is set to , P, S or SCN, but we recommend recording with the mode dial set to M or A.

f Shoot the image.

• If you record with [Hot Shoe] set to [Off] in the SET UP settings, the built-in flash may pop up. If this happens, return the built-in flash to its original position and set [Hot Shoe] to [On] (page 140).

• When you set [Hot Shoe] to [On] in the SET UP settings, is indicated. In this case, the built-in flash is disabled.

•

•

•

•2

73

Advanced still im

age shooting (Fluorescent)

Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M, SCN or .

Press and hold WB and select the desired setting with the command dial.

return to automatic settingstep 2, select [Auto].

Mode dial


WB

Command dial

8M

250 F2.0

98FINE

MAF

10180minP

Adjusting color tones

– White Balance

Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/Normally, this camera adjusts color tones automatically, but you can also select the following modes according to your shooting situations. The color of the subject that you see will be captured according to the lighting conditions. When you want to fix the conditions under which the image is captured, or when the color of the entire image seems to be a bit unnatural, it is recommended that you adjust the white balance.

Auto (No indicator)The white balance is set automatically in response to the condition of the subject.The default setting is Auto.(Color temperature: about 3000-7000 K)

(Daylight)Used when shooting outdoors, and for shooting at night, under neon lights, for fireworks, sunrise, and twilight gloom.(Color temperature: about 5500 K)

(Cloudy)Used when shooting under a cloudy sky.(Color temperature: about 6500 K)

Used when shooting under fluorescent lights.(Color temperature: about 4000 K)

(Incandescent)• Used when shooting, for example, at a

party, where the lighting conditions change often.

• Used in a studio, or under video lights.(Color temperature: about 3200 K)

(Flash)Adjusts the white balance only to the flash conditions. This mode cannot be used with movies.(Color temperature: about 6000 K)

(One push)For adjusting the white balance depending on the light source.(Color temperature: about 2000-10000 K)

(One push SET)Memorizes the basic white color which will be used in (One push) mode.

a

b

To In S

WB

electing color eproduction

Color

ode dial: P/S/A/Mou can select the color reproduction mode.

tandard (No indicator)hoots to make the resulting shot easier on e eyes. The image becomes vivid

ompared to its real color and the contrast ecomes higher.he default setting is [Standard].

eal (REAL)hoots for faithfulness to the actual texture nd color, which the contrast, brightness, nd saturation become lower. This mode is itable for modifying the image on a

omputer.

74

• Under fluorescent lights that flicker, even if you choose , the white balance may not be properly adjusted.

• When the flash strobes, the manual setting is canceled, and the image is recorded in [Auto] mode (except in (Flash) mode or (One push) mode).

To capture the basic white color in (one-push SET) modeThis mode memorizes the basic white color in the shooting situation for the (One push) mode. Use this mode when the other modes cannot set the color properly.

1 In Step 2, select [ ] (One push SET).The indicator appears.

2 Frame a white object such as a piece of paper filling the screen under the same lighting conditions as you will shoot the subject.

3 Press the center of the multi-selector.The screen momentarily turns black and the indicator flashes quickly. When the white balance has been adjusted and stored in the memory, the

indicator lights up.

• When the indicator flashes slowly, the white balance is not set or was not able to be set. Record in automatic white balance mode.

• Do not shake or strike the camera while the indicator flashes quickly.

• When flash mode is set to (Forced flash) or (Slow synchro), the white balance is

adjusted to the condition with the flash emitting.

Sr

–

MY

SSthcbT

RSaasuc

WB

75

Advanced still im

age shooting


Press and hold /BRK (Burst) and select (Speed Burst) or

(Framing Burst) with the command dial.

Shutter button

Mode dial

/BRK Command dial

8M98

MAF

10180min

BRK

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A or M.

b Press MENU.The menu appears.

c Select COLOR (Color) with b/B, then select the desired mode with v/V.

Shooting images in succession

Mode dial: /P/S/A/M/SCNYou can shoot up to seven images in succession while pressing the shutter button only once.

Speed Burst ( )The frame interval becomes shorter (about 0.38 second), but the images are not displayed on the screen.

Framing Burst ( )The images are displayed on the screen during Burst shooting, but the frame interval becomes longer (about 0.42 second).

• When the capacity of the recording medium is used up, recording stops even if you press and hold the shutter button.

a

b

Mode dial


MENU

Press and hold /BRK (Burst) and select (Multi Burst) with the command dial.


Select (Interval) with b/B, then select the desired between-frame interval with v/V.You can choose from [1/7.5], [1/15], [1/30].

Shoot the image.16 frames in a row will be recorded in a single image (image size: 1M).

8M9810180min

BRK

NormalMAF 250 F2.0

FINEP

1/151/30"1/30

1/7.5

IntervalISO Mode BRK

76

c Shoot the image.You can shoot up to seven images when you press and hold the shutter button.You can do the next shooting after “Recording” disappears from the screen.


• The flash cannot be used.• When [Mode] (REC Mode) is not set to

[Normal], you cannot use the Burst mode.• You may not be able to use the Burst mode

depending on the Scene Selection mode (page 37).

• When using the self-timer, pressing the shutter button records up to seven images in succession.

• You cannot select shutter speeds of 1/25 second or slower.

Shooting in Multi Burst mode

– Multi Burst

Mode dial: /P/S/A/M/SCNPressing the shutter button once records 16 frames in a row. This is convenient for checking your form in sports, for example.

a Set the mode dial to , P, S, A, M or SCN.

b

c

d

e

Shutter button

Mode dial

MENU

Command dial

/BRK


77

Advanced still im

age shooting• When [Mode] (REC Mode) is not set to NightShot

NightShot function lets you shoot ects in dark places without the flash as camp scenes at night or nocturnal ts and animals. Note that images rded using the NightShot function me greenish.

Set the mode dial to , P or .

Press and hold NIGHTSHOT/NIGHTFRAMING and select (Night shot) with the command dial.The flash emitter pops up and the and “Night shot” indicators light for about five seconds.

Shoot the image.

ancel the NightShot functiontep 2, select [Off].

hile using the NightShot function:he white balance is set to Auto.he metering mode is set to center weighted.

8M4

101

"Night shot"

80min

MAF

[Normal], you cannot use the Multi Burst mode.

• The following functions cannot be used in Multi Burst mode:– Smart zoom– Shooting with the flash– Inserting the date and time– NightShot– NightFraming

• When the mode dial is set to , frame interval is automatically set to [1/30].

• You cannot set the shutter speed to lower than the frame interval time.

• For the number of images that can be recorded, see pages 135, 136.

• When you play back images recorded in Multi Burst mode on the camera, see page 87.

Shooting in the dark

Mode dial: /P/

• The infrared ray light covers within approx. 0.5 m to 2.1 m (19 3/4 inches to 6 feet 10 3/4 inches) (W)/0.6 m to 2.1 m (23 5/8 inches to 6 feet 10 3/4 inches) (T).

• Since the infrared emitter is located below the flash emitter, you have to pop up the flash to shoot in these modes.

Thesubjsuchplanrecobeco

a

b

c

To cIn S

• W– T– T

Shutter button

Mode dial

Command dial

Infrared ray emitter


While using the NightFraming function:– The white balance is set to Auto.– The metering mode is set to multi-pattern

metering.– The AF range finder frame is not displayed.

The centrally-located subject has priority to focus on.

– The AE lock cannot be used.– If you perform any invalid operation while

using the NightFraming function, the indicator flashes and the “Night framing” indicator lights for about five seconds.

When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual] in the SET UP settings, pop up the flash emitter using the OPEN (FLASH) switch.When attaching the supplied lens hood, flash light and infrared ray may be blocked.When you press the shutter button halfway down, you will hear a sound, but this is not the sound of the shutter releasing. The image is not recorded yet.When [Hologram AF] is set to [Off], you may not get a clear focus. Setting [Hologram AF] to [Auto] is recommended (page 35).When using the following functions, you cannot use the NightFraming function.– Manual focus– Exposure Bracket– Burst– Multi Burst

78

– If you perform any invalid operation, the indicator flashes, and the “Night shot” indicator lights for about five seconds.

• While using the NightShot function, you cannot use the following functions:– AE LOCK– Shooting with hologram AF– Shooting with the flash– Selecting the color reproduction mode

• While the camera is in Multi Burst mode, the NightShot function cannot be used.

• When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual] in the SET UP settings, pop up the flash emitter using the OPEN (FLASH) switch.

• When attaching the supplied lens hood, infrared ray may be blocked.

• Do not use the NightShot function in bright places (e.g. outdoors in the daytime). This may cause your camera to malfunction.

NightFraming

The NightFraming function enables you to check a subject even at night and then record with natural colors using the flash.

a Set the mode dial to or P.

b Press and hold NIGHTSHOT/NIGHTFRAMING and select

(Night framing) with the command dial.The flash emitter pops up and the and “Night framing” indicators light for about five seconds.

c Press and hold the shutter button halfway down.The focus is automatically adjusted.

d Press the shutter button fully down.The shutter sounds, the flash strobes and the image is recorded.

To cancel the NightFraming functionIn Step 2, select [Off].

•

•

•

•

•

•

8M4

101

"Night framing"

80min

MAF

79

Advanced still im

age shooting

ooting still images RAW mode

AW

de dial: /P/S/A/M/SCNd when you want to record the raw data ctly onto the recording medium as it is. data can be reproduced with much less rioration in image processing and be layed using the exclusive software ided. A compressed JPEG format e like that is recorded in normal ting is recorded at the same time.


Shutter button

Mode dial

MENU Multi-selector (v/V/b/B)

Shooting with special effects

– Picture Effect

Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/You can add special effects to bring out the contrast in your images.



c Select [PFX] (P.Effect) with b/B, then select the desired mode with v/V.

d Shoot the image.

To cancel Picture EffectIn Step 3, select [Off].

• You cannot select the color reproduction mode when using the picture effect.

Shin

– R

MoUsedireThedetedispprovimagshoo

a

SolarizeLike an illustration with clearly delineated bright and dark portions

Sepia

Neg.Art

Colored to look like an old photograph

Made to look like a negative image

Mode dial


MENU

Shutter button

Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with b/B, then select [TIFF] with v/V.

Shoot the image.You can do the next shooting after “Recording” disappears from the screen.

o return to normal mode Step 3, select [Normal].

JPEG images are also recorded in the image size selected by the Image Size setup (page 24). Uncompressed (TIFF) images are recorded in [8M] size except when [3:2] is selected. Writing data takes more time than in normal recording mode.For the number of images that can be recorded, see pages 134, 136.

80


c Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with b/B, then select [RAW] with v.

d Shoot the image.You can do the next shooting after “Recording” disappears from the screen.


• To reproduce the RAW data file using a computer, the exclusive software is required. Install the exclusive software on the supplied CD-ROM to your computer. Since the RAW data file is a special kind of file, general software cannot open the RAW data file.

• The JPEG image is also recorded in the image size selected by the Image Size setup (page 24). (However, [3:2] cannot be selected.) RAW data images are recorded in [8M] size.

• Writing data takes more time than in normal recording mode.

• Digital zoom cannot be used.• For the number of images that can be recorded,

see pages 134, 136.

Shooting still images in TIFF mode

– TIFF

Mode dial: /P/S/A/M/SCNUsed when you record an image in uncompressed file format. The image quality does not deteriorate. Images recorded in this mode are suitable for fine printing. A compressed JPEG format image like that recorded in normal shooting is recorded at the same time.



c

d

TIn

•

•

•

Shutter button

Mode dial


81

Advanced still im

age shootingc Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with

ooting still images th audio files

oice

de dial: /P/S/A/M/SCN can record still images with audio files.



Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with b/B, then select [Voice] with v/V.

Shutter button

Mode dial


Shooting still images for e-mail

– E-Mail

Mode dial: /P/S/A/M/SCNYou can shoot images and save them in a file that is small enough (320×240) to attach to an e-mail message. The normal mode image that was selected using the Image Size item (page 24) is also recorded.



b/B, then select [E-Mail] with v/V.

d Shoot the image.You can do the next shooting after “Recording” disappears from the screen.


• For instructions on how to attach your images to an e-mail message, refer to the Help files of the e-mail software you are using.


Shwi

– V

MoYou

a

b

c

Shutter button

Mode dial


82

d Shoot the image.If you press and release the shutter button, sound is recorded for five seconds. If you hold down the shutter button, sound is recorded until you release the shutter button for up to 40 seconds.


• To view images recorded in Voice mode, carry out the same procedure described in “Viewing movies on the screen” (page 101).

• Be careful not to touch the microphone (page 12) during shooting.


83

Advanced still im

age viewing

d Select the desired folder with On the single screen

he Index screen

hen no images are stored in the folder, “No in this folder” appears.u can play back images from a last-shot one thout selecting the folder.

ACK/NEXT VOLUME

VGA

10:30PM2004 1 1-0009

9/91010min

GLE DISPLAY

Advanced still image viewing

Selecting the folder and playing back images

– Folder

Mode dial: Select the folder that images you want to play back are stored.

a Set the mode dial to .


c Select (Folder) with b, then press the center of the multi-selector.

b/B.

e Select [OK] with v , then press the center of the multi-selector.

To cancel the selectionIn Step 5, select [Cancel].

When multiple folders are created in the recording mediumWhen the first or last image in the folder is displayed, the following icons are indicated on the screen.

: Moves to the previous folder.: Moves to the next folder.: Moves to both the previous and next

folders.

On t

• Wfile

• Yowi

Mode dial


MENU

BACK/NEXT

Select Folder

CancelOK

Folder Name:102 2/2

Created:No. Of Files:

2004

102MSDCF9

1 1 1::05:34AM

B101

8

SIN

Adjust the zoom with the command dial.

o cancel enlarged viewingress (playback zoom) again.

You cannot use Playback zoom with movies or images recorded in Multi Burst mode.The images displayed in Quick Review (page 29) can be enlarged using the procedures outlined in Steps 3 to 5.

84

Enlarging a portion of a still image

Mode dial: You can enlarge an image up to five times the size of the original image. You can also record the enlarged image as a new file.

Enlarging an image – Playback zoom


b Display the image you want to enlarge with b/B.

c Press (playback zoom).The image is enlarged twice.

d Select a portion of the image to enlarge with v/V/b/B.

e

TP

•

•

Mode dial


MENU

Command dial

Move to v

Move to V

Moveto b

Move to B

v: To view a portion of the top of the image

V: To view a portion of the bottom of the image

b: To view a portion of the left side of the image

B: To view a portion of the right side of the image

85

Advanced still im

age viewing

Recording an enlarged c Select (Slide) with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.Set the following items with v/V/b/B.

Interval settings3 sec/5 sec/10 sec/30 sec/1 min

ImageFolder:Plays back all the images in the

selected folder.All:Plays back all the images in the

recording medium.

RepeatOn:Plays the images back repeatedly.Off:Plays through the images one time

and then stops.

Select [Start] with V/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.The slide show begins.

cancel the slide show settingtep 3, select [Cancel].

stop slide show playbacks the center of the multi-selector, select t] with B, then press the center.

image – Trimming

a After you have viewed an image using playback zoom, press MENU.

The menu appears.

b Select [Trimming] with B, then press the center of the multi-selector.

c Select the image size with v/V, then press the center of the multi-selector.The image is recorded, and the screen image returns to the size it was before enlargement.

• The trimmed image is recorded in the recording folder as the newest file, and the original image is retained.

• The trimmed image may suffer some deterioration in image quality.

• You cannot trim to 3:2-sized image.• You cannot trim RAW data file/uncompressed

(TIFF) images.• You cannot trim images displayed with Quick

Review.

Playing back successive images

– Slide show

Mode dial: You can play back recorded images in succession, one after another. This is useful for checking your images, or for giving a presentation.



d

To In S

To Pres[Exi

Mode dial


MENU

Set the mode dial to , and display the image you want to rotate.


Select (Rotate) with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.

Select with v , and rotate the image with b/B.

Select [OK] with v/V, then press the center of the multi-selector.

o cancel the rotation Step 4 or 5, select [Cancel].

You cannot rotate protected images, movies, Multi Burst mode, RAW data file and uncompressed (TIFF) images.You may not be able to rotate images shot with other cameras.When viewing images on a computer, the image rotation information may not be reflected depending on the application software.

86

To skip to the next/previous image during slide showMove the multi-selector to B (next) or b (previous).

• The interval setting time is approximate, and may vary according to the playback image size.

Rotating still images

– Rotate

Mode dial: Images shot when holding the camera vertically can be rotated and displayed horizontally.

a

b

c

d

e

TIn

•

•

•

Mode dial


MENU

87

Advanced still im

age viewing

Playing back continuously Playing back frame by frame

Set the mode dial to .

Select the Multi Burst image with b/B.The selected Multi Burst image is played back continuously.

Press the center of the multi-selector when the desired frame is displayed.“Step” appears.

Advance the frame with b/B.B:The next frame is displayed. When

you move the multi-selector to B and hold it, the frame advances.

b:The previous frame is displayed. When you move the multi-selector to b and hold it, the frame advances in the reverse direction.

return to normal playbacktep 4, press the center of the multi-ctor. The playback starts from the frame layed on the screen.

10:30PM2004 1 1101-0014

14/14

3/16Step

101

PLAY FRAME BACK/NEXT VOLUME

80min

Playing back images shot in Multi Burst mode

Mode dial: You can play back Multi Burst images continuously or play them back frame by frame. This function is used for checking the images.

• When Multi Burst images are played back on a computer or on a camera without the Multi Burst function, the 16 frames you shot will be displayed at the same time as part of one image.

• You cannot divide the Multi Burst image.


b Select the Multi Burst image with b/B.The selected Multi Burst image is played back continuously.

To pausePress the center of the multi-selector. To resume playback, press the center again. The playback starts from the frame displayed on the screen.

a

b

c

d

To In Sseledisp

Mode dial


PAUSE10:30PM2004 1 1101-0014

14/14101

BACK/NEXT VOLUME

80min

88

To delete shot imagesWhen using this mode, you cannot delete only certain frames. When you delete images, all 16 of the frames are deleted at the same time.

1 Display the Multi Burst image you want to delete.

2 Press (delete).

3 Select [Delete], then press the center of the multi-selector.All of the frames are deleted.

89

Still im

age editingOn the single screen On the Index screen

Set the mode dial to , press / (index) to switch to the

Index screen.


Select - (Protect) with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.

Select [Select] with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.

Select the image you want to protect with v/V/b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.The green - (Protect) mark is indicated on the selected image.

To protect other images, repeat Step 5.

TO NEXTMENUSELECT

Still image editing

Protecting images

– Protect

Mode dial: To prevent accidental erasure of an important image, you can protect it.

• Note that formatting the recording medium erases all the data in the recording medium even if images are protected, and these images cannot be recovered.

• It may take some time to protect the images.


b Display the image you want to protect with b/B.

c Press MENU.The menu appears.

d Select - (Protect) with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.The image currently being displayed is now protected, and the - (Protect) mark is indicated on the screen.

e To protect other images, display the image you want to protect with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.

To cancel the protectionIn Step 4 or 5, press the center of the multi-selector again. The - mark disappears.

a

b

c

d

e

f

/

Mode dial


MENU

VGA101 2/9

ProtectExit

BACK/NEXT

80min

hanging image size

Resize

ode dial: ou can change the image size of a corded image, and save it as a new file.ou can resize to the following sizes.M, 5M, 3M, 1M and VGA.he original image is retained even after sizing.

Set the mode dial to .

Display the image you want to resize with b/B.


Mode dial


MENU

90

g Press MENU.

h Select [OK] with B, then press the center of the multi-selector.The - mark turns white and the selected image is protected.

To cancel the protectionIn Step 4, select [Cancel], or in Step 8, select [Exit].

To release protectionIn Step 5, select an image for which you want to release protection with v/V/b/B and press the center of the multi-selector. The - mark turns gray and repeat this operation for all the images for which you want to release protection. Then, press MENU, select [OK], and press the center of the multi-selector.

To protect all the images in the folderIn Step 4, select [All In This Folder], then press the center of the multi-selector. Next, select [On], then press the center.

To release protection of all the images in the folderIn Step 4, select [All In This Folder], and press the center of the multi-selector. Then select [Off], and press the center.

C

–

MYreY8Tre

a

b

c

91

Still im

age editingd Select (Resize) with b/B, • In E-Mail mode, the print (DPOF) mark is

rked on the normal size image that was orded at the same time.

hen you mark images shot in Multi Burst de, all the images are printed on one sheet ided into 16 panels.ou mark an image shot in TIFF mode with a

nt (DPOF) mark, only the uncompressed IFF) image is printed, and the JPEG image orded at the same time is not printed.u cannot set the number of print sheets.

then press the center of the multi-selector.

e Select the new size with v/V, then press the center of the multi-selector.The resized image is recorded in the recording folder as the newest file.

To cancel the resizingIn Step 5, select [Cancel].

• You cannot change the size of movies, Multi Burst mode, RAW data file or uncompressed (TIFF) images.

• When images are resized from a smaller to a larger size, the image quality will deteriorate.

• You cannot resize to 3:2-sized image.• If you resize a 3:2-sized image, black bands

will appear at the top and bottom of the image.

Choosing images to print

– Print (DPOF) mark

Mode dial: You can designate certain images to be printed.This function is convenient when you want to print images at a shop or using a printer that conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard or using PictBridge-compliant printers.

• You cannot mark movies or images recorded in RAW mode.

marec

• Wmodiv

• If ypri(Trec

• Yo

/

Mode dial


MENU

To mark other images, repeat Step 5 for each of them.

Press MENU.

Select [OK] with B, then press the center of the multi-selector.The mark turns white and the setting is completed.

o delete the mark Step 5, select the image you want to

elete the mark with v/V/b/B, and ress the center of the multi-selector.

o delete all the marks from e images in the folder Step 4, select [All In This Folder], then

ress the center of the multi-selector. Next, lect [Off], then press the center.

o cancel the marking Step 4, select [Cancel], or in Step 8, lect [Exit].

92

On the single screen


b Display the image you want to print with b/B.


d Select [DPOF] (DPOF) with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.The mark is indicated on this image.

e To mark other images, display the image you want to mark with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.

To delete the markIn Step 4 or 5, press the center of the multi-selector again. The mark disappears.

On the Index screen

a Set the mode dial to and press / (index) to switch to the Index screen.


c Select [DPOF] (DPOF) with B, then press the center of the multi-selector.

d Select [Select] with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.• You cannot mark using the [All In This

Folder] option.

e Select the images you want to mark with v/V/b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.The green mark is indicated on the selected image.

f

g

h

TIndp

TthInpse

TInse

DPOFExit

VGA101 2/9

BACK/NEXT

80min

TO NEXTMENUSELECT

93

Still im

age printing (PictB

ridge printer)Preparing the camera Connecting the camera to

printer

nect the (USB) jack on the camera the USB connector on the printer using B cable. The connection can be made

rdless of whether the camera is turned r off.n the camera is turned on, the camera

s to playback mode regardless of the e dial position and the newest image in elected recording folder is displayed on creen.

2/91018M

BACK/NEXT VOLUME10:30AM2004 1 1101-0002

After the connection is made, the mark is indicated on the screen.

Printer

Still image printing (PictBridge printer)

Connecting to a PictBridge printer

Even if you do not have a computer, you can easily print images shot using your camera by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compliant printer. For preparation, you only need to select the USB connection in the SET UP settings and connect the camera to the printer.Using a PictBridge-compliant printer allows you to easily print the Index prints*.

* An Index print function may not be provided depending on the printer.

• When printing images, we recommend that you use the AC Adaptor to prevent the camera turning off.

Set the USB mode on the camera to connect the camera with a printer.


b Select (Setup 2) with V, then select [USB Connect] with B/v/V.

c Select [PictBridge] with B/v, then press the center of the multi-selector.

The USB mode is set.

the

Conand a USregaon oWheturnmodthe sthe s

Mode dial



PTPNormal

PictBridge

n the single screen

Select the recording medium with the /CF switch and display the image you want to print with b/B.


Select (Print) with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.

Select [This image] with v/V, then press the center of the multi-selector.The Print screen appears.

Select [Quantity] with v/V, select the number of images with b/B.You can select the number up to 20.

2/91018M

Exit OK

1

Print

OffOff

QuantityDateIndex

94

When [USB Connect] is not set to [PictBridge] in the SET UP settingsYou cannot use the PictBridge function, even when you turn on the camera. Set [USB Connect] to [PictBridge]. 1 Press MENU and select [USB Connect],

then press the center of the multi-selector.

2 Select [PictBridge] with v , then press the center.

Printing imagesYou can select an image and print it. Set up the camera following the procedure on page 93, and then connect the printer.

• You cannot print movies and images recorded in RAW mode.

• When printing E-mail mode images or uncompressed (TIFF) images, only their corresponding JPEG files are printed.

• If an error message is sent from the connected printer during the connection, flashes for about five seconds. In such cases, check the printer.

• Note that printing is canceled if you switch the /CF switch while printing images.

O

a

b

c

d

e

PTP

Normal

PictBridge

USB Connect

/


MENU /CF switch

95

Still im

age printing (PictB

ridge printer)f Select [OK] with V/B, then To insert the date and time on On the Index screen

Select the recording medium with the /CF switch and press / (index) to switch to the Index screen.

The screen turns to the index screen.


Select (Print) with B, then press the center of the multi-selector.


Select the image you want to print with v/V/b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.The mark is indicated on the selected image.

TO NEXTMENUSELECT

press the center of the multi-selector.The image is printed.Do not disconnect the USB cable while the (Not disconnect USB cable) mark is indicated on the screen.

To cancel printingIn Step 4, select [Cancel] or in Step 6, select [Exit].

To print other imagesAfter Step 6, select another image, then select [Print] with v .

To print all the images indicated with the markIn Step 4, select [DPOF image]. All the images indicated with the mark are printed in the specified number, regardless of the image displayed.

imagesIn Step 5, select [Date], then select the date format with b/B. You can select from [Day&Time] or [Date]. The date is inserted in the images printed.This function may not be provided depending on the printer.

a

b

c

d

e

2/9

1/3

1018M

Exit

Printing

rinting index-imagesou can print some images side-by-side. e refer to this function as an index print*. ou can lay single images side-by-side in a ecified number and print them, or lay

ifferent images side-by-side to make a set y combining multiple different images and rint the set in the specified number of opies.et up the camera following the procedure n page 93, and connect the printer.

An index print function may not be provided depending on a printer.

/


MENU /CF switch

96

f To print other images, repeat Step 5.

g Press MENU.The Print screen appears.

h Select [Quantity] with v/V, select the number of images with b/B.You can select the number up to 20.All the images selected are printed in the specified number.

i Select [OK] with V/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.The images are printed.Do not disconnect the USB cable while the mark is indicated on the screen.

To cancel printingIn Step 4, select [Cancel] or in Step 9, select [Exit].

To print all the images indicated with the markIn Step 4, select [DPOF image]. All the images indicated with the mark are printed in the specified number, regardless of the image displayed.

To print all the images in the folderIn Step 4, select [All In This Folder], then press the center of the multi-selector.

To insert the date and time on imagesIn Step 8, select [Date], then select the date format with b/B. You can select from [Day&Time] or [Date]. The date is inserted in the images printed.This function may not be provided depending on the printer.

PYWYspdbpcSo

*

Exit OK

1

Print

OffOff

QuantityDateIndex

Exit

2/3Printing

97

Still im

age printing (PictB

ridge printer)• You cannot print movies and images recorded On the single screen f Select [Quantity] with v/V,

select the number of images laid side-by-side with b/B.You can select the number up to 20.You can lay the specified number of images side-by-side.

Select [OK] with V/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.The image is printed.Do not disconnect the USB cable while the (Not disconnect USB cable) mark is indicated on the screen.

cancel printingtep 4, select [Cancel] or in Step 7, ct [Exit].

print other imagesr Step 7, select another image, then ct [Print] with v . Then repeat from 4.

Exit

Printing Index

2/9

1/1

1018M

in RAW mode.• When printing E-mail mode images or

uncompressed (TIFF) images, only their corresponding JPEG files are printed.

• If an error message is sent from the connected printer during the connection, flashes for about five seconds. In such cases, check the printer.

• Note that printing is canceled if you switch the /CF switch while printing images.

a Select the recording medium with the /CF switch and display the image you want to print with b/B.


c Select (Print) with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.

d Select [This image] with v/V, then press the center of the multi-selector.The Print screen appears.

e Select [Index] with v , select [On] with b/B.

g

To In Ssele

To AfteseleStep

2/91018M

Exit OK

1

Print

OffOff

QuantityDateIndex

Press MENU.

Select [Index] with v , then select [On] with b/B.

Select [Quantity] with v/V, select the number of copies you want to print with b/B.You can select the number up to 20.

Select [OK] with V/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.The images are printed.Do not disconnect the USB cable while the mark is indicated on the screen.

o cancel printing Step 4, select [Cancel] or in Step 0, lect [Exit].

Exit

Printing Index1/3

98

To print all the images indicated with the markIn Step 4, select [DPOF image]. All the images indicated with the mark are printed, regardless of the image displayed.


• All the images may not be laid on a sheet depending on the number of images.

On the Index screen

a Select the recording medium with the /CF switch and press / (index) to switch to the Index screen.


c Select (Print) with B, then press the center of the multi-selector.

d Select [Select] with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.

e Select the desired image with v/V/b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.The mark is indicated on the selected image.

f To print other images, repeat Step 5.

g

h

i

j

TInse

TO NEXTMENUSELECT

99

Still im

age printing (PictB

ridge printer)To print all the images indicated
with the markIn Step 4, select [DPOF image]. All the images indicated with the mark are printed, regardless of the image displayed.
To print all the images in the folderIn Step 4, select [All In This Folder], then press the center of the multi-selector.


o shoot close-ups (Macro)et the mode dial to and follow the rocedure on page 33.

o shoot with a self-timeret the mode dial to and follow the rocedure on page 34.

Be careful not to touch the microphone (page 12) during shooting.The following functions cannot be used.– Digital zoom– Shooting with the flash– Inserting date and timeWhen you select [640 (Fine)] with the supplied A/V connecting cable plugged in the A/V OUT (MONO) jack, you cannot check the shooting image using the screen. The screen turns blue.See pages 135, 136 for the recording time allowed for each image size.

Enjoying movies

100

Shooting movies

Mode dial: You can shoot movies with audio.



c Select (Image Size) with b, then select the desired size with v/V.You can choose from [640 (Fine)], [640 (Standard)], or [160].

• The [640 (Fine)] image size can be used only when you record the image into the “Memory Stick PRO” or Microdrive.

d Press the shutter button fully down.“REC” appears on the screen and the camera starts recording the image and sound.

• When the capacity of the recording medium is used up, recording stops.

e Press the shutter button fully down again to stop recording.

Indicators on the screen while you are shooting moviesThese indicators are not recorded.Each time you press (screen status), the status of the screen changes as follows: Indicators off t Indicators on.A histogram is not displayed.See page 152 for a detailed description of the indicated items.

TSp

TSp

•

•

•

•

Mode dial


Shutter button

MENU

00:00:02[00:10:48]10180min

REC

101

Enjoying m

oviesb Select the desired movie with To adjust the volume

st the volume with v/V.

fast-forward / rewind e the multi-selector to B (next) or b

vious) while playing back a movie. eturn to normal playback, press the er of the multi-selector.

icators on the screen while are viewing movies time you press (screen status), tatus of the screen changes as follows:

cators off t Indicators on.stogram is not displayed.page 154 for a detailed description of ndicated items.

e procedure for viewing movies on a TV is same as that for viewing still images ge 41).

movie recorded using other Sony devices y be displayed a size smaller than still ages.

Viewing movies on the screen

Mode dial: You can view movies on the screen of the camera and hear sounds from the speaker of the camera.


b/B.Movies with the image size [640 (Fine)] or [640 (Standard)] are displayed on the full screen.

Movies with the image size [160] are displayed a size smaller than still images.

c Press the center of the multi-selector.The movie images and sound are played back. B (playback) appears on the screen while a movie is playing back.

To stop playbackPress the center of the multi-selector again.

Adju

To Mov(preTo rcent

IndyouEachthe sIndiA hiSee the i

• Ththe(pa

• A maim

Mode dial

Speaker


10/10 00:00:00

101

PLAY BACK/NEXT VOLUME10:30PM2004 1 1101_0010

80min

00:00:03

10:30PM101_0010

10/10101

2004 1 1STOP REV/CUE VOLUME

80min

Playback bar

n the Index screen

Set the mode dial to and press / (index) button to switch to the Index screen.

Press (delete).


Select the movies you want to delete with v/V/b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.The (delete) mark is indicated on the selected movie.

The movie has not yet been deleted at this point.

Repeat Step 4 to delete other movies.

Press (delete).

TO NEXTSELECT

102

Deleting movies

Mode dial: You can delete unwanted movies.

• You cannot delete the protected movies.• Note that the movies once deleted cannot be

recovered.

On the single screen


b Select the movie you want to delete with b/B.

c Press (delete).The movie has not yet been deleted at this point.

d Select [Delete] with v , then press the center of the multi-selector.“Access” appears on the screen and the movie is deleted.

e To delete other movies, display the movie you want to delete with b/B, then repeat Step 4.

To cancel the deletionIn Step 4 or 5, select [Exit].

O

a

b

c

d

e

f

/

Mode dial


103

Enjoying m

oviesg Select [OK] with B, then press <Example> Cutting the movie numbered

0002

2

101_0002

101_0003

3

0001

2 3A B

101_0002

101_0004

23 BA

101_0005

3 2

101_0006

101_0004 101_0007

A B

3 2

101_0006

utting scene A.

eleting scenes A and B if they are nnecessary.

utting scene B.

nly the desired scenes remain.

Divide point

Divide point

Delete Delete

the center of the multi-selector.“Access” message appears on the screen and the movie will be deleted.

To cancel the deletionIn Step 3 or 7, select [Exit].

To delete all the images in the folderIn Step 3, select [All In This Folder], then press the center of the multi-selector. Next, select [OK], then press the center. To cancel the deletion, select [Cancel] with b, then press the center.

Editing movies

Mode dial: You can cut movies, or delete unnecessary portions of movies. This is the recommended mode to use when the recording medium capacity is insufficient, or when you attach movies to your e-mail messages.

The file numbers assigned when movies are cutThe cut movies are assigned new numbers and recorded as the newest files in the recording folder. The original movie is deleted and its file number is skipped.

101_

1

101_

1

1

1

1

1. C

3. Du

2. C

4. O

eleting unnecessary ortions of movies

Cut an unnecessary portion of a movie.

Display the portion of the movie you want to delete.

Press (delete).The movie has not yet been deleted at this point.

Select [Delete] with v , then press the center of the multi-selector.The movie currently displayed on the screen is deleted.

104

Cutting movies


b Select the movie you want to cut with b/B.


d Select (Divide) with B, then press the center of the multi-selector. Next, select [OK] with v , then press the center.The playback of the movie starts.

e Decide on a cutting point.Press the center of the multi-selector at the desired cutting point.

When you want to adjust the cutting point, select [c/C] (frame forward/ rewind) and adjust the cutting point with b/ B. If you want to change the cutting point, select [Cancel]. The playback of the movie starts again.

f When you have decided on a cutting point, select [OK] with v/V, and press the center of the multi-selector.

g Select [OK] with v , then press the center of the multi-selector.The movie is cut.

To cancel cuttingIn Step 5 or 7, select [Exit]. The movie appears on the screen again.

• You cannot cut the following images.– Still images– Movies not long enough to cut– Protected movies

• You cannot restore movies once you cut them. • The original movie is deleted when you cut it. • The cut movie is recorded in the selected

recording folder as the newest file.

Dp

a

b

c

d

Mode dial


MENU

00:00:02DivideDividing

Point

CancelOK

Exit

10/10101

80min

105

Enjoying im

ages on your computer

• Operations are not guaranteed when using a Contents of the CD-ROM

SB Driver driver is needed in order to connect the era to a computer.n using Windows XP, you need not ll the USB driver.

age Transfer application is used to easily transfer es from the camera to a computer.

ageMixer application is used to display and edit es that are stored in a computer.

e required operations may differ pending on your OS.lose down all applications nning on the computer before stalling the USB driver and plication.hen using Windows XP or Windows 00, log on as Administrators.e display settings should be 800 × 600 ts or more and High Color (16-bit lor, 65000 colors) or more. When set to ss than 800 × 600 dots or 256 colors or ss, the install title screen does not pear.

Enjoying images on your computer

Copying images to your computer– For Windows users

Recommended computer environmentOS: Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows Millennium Edition, Windows XP Home Edition, or Windows XP ProfessionalThe above OS must be installed at the factory. Operation is not assured in an environment upgraded to the operating systems described above or in a multi-boot environment.CPU: MMX Pentium 200 MHz or fasterUSB connector: Provided as standardDisplay: 800 × 600 dots or moreHigh Color (16-bit color, 65000 colors) or more

• This camera is compliant with USB 2.0.• Use with a USB 2.0 (High-Speed USB)

compatible computer environment allows high-speed data transfer.

• If you connect two or more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, some equipment, including your camera, may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment.

USB hub.• Operations are not guaranteed for all the

recommended computer environments mentioned above.

USB modeThere are two modes for a USB connection when connecting with a computer, [Normal] and [PTP]* modes. The default setting is the [Normal] mode. * Compatible only with Windows XP. When

connected to a computer, only the data in the folder selected by the camera is copied to the computer. To select the folder, follow the procedure on page 83.

Communication with your computerWhen your computer resumes from the suspend or sleep mode, communication between your camera and your computer may not recover at the same time.

When a USB connector is not provided on your computerWhen neither a USB connector nor a recording medium slot is provided, you can copy images using an additional device. See the Sony Website for details.http://www.sony.net/

x UThiscamWheinsta

x ImThisimag

x ImThisimag

• Thde

• Cruinap

• W20

• Thdocoleleap

Click [Yes, I want to restart my computer now], then click [Finish].

Your computer restarts. Then, you can establish USB connection.

106

Installing the USB driver

When using Windows XP, you need not install the USB driver.Once the USB driver is installed, you need not install the USB driver.

a Turn on your computer, and insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The model selection screen appears. If it does not appear, double-click (My Computer) t (ImageMixer) in that order.

b Click [Cyber-shot] on the model selection screen.

The installation menu screen appears.

c Click [USB Driver] on the title screen.

The “InstallShield Wizard” screen appears.

d Click [Next]. When the “Information” screen appears, click [Next].

The USB driver installation starts. When the installation is completed, the screen informs you of completion.

e

Do not connect your camera to your computer at this time.

107

Enjoying im


Installing “Image Transfer” c Click [Next]. When “License e Select the folder to be installed, then click [Next].Select the program folder, then click [Next].

Confirm if the checkbox is checked on the “Image Transfer Settings” screen, then click [Next].

When the installation is completed, the screen informs you of completion.

You can use the “Image Transfer” software to copy images to your computer automatically when you connect the camera to your computer.

a Click [Cyber-shot] on the model selection screen.

The installation menu screen appears.

b Click [Image Transfer] on the installation menu screen.Select the desired language, then click [OK].

The “Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Image Transfer” screen appears.

• This section describes the English screen.

Agreement” screen appears, click [Yes].

Read the agreement carefully. If you accept the terms of the agreement, proceed with the installation. The “Information” screen appears.

d Click [Next].

f

If DirectX8.0a or a later version is not installed in your computer, the “Information” screen appears. Follow the procedure on the screen.

Restart your computer according to the screen.

Remove the CD-ROM.

108

g Click [Finish].

The “InstallShield Wizard” screen closes.If you wish to continue with the installation of “ImageMixer,” click [ImageMixer] on the installation menu screen and then follow the procedure.

• The USB driver is needed in order to use “Image Transfer.” If the necessary driver is not already installed on your computer, a screen that asks if you want to install the driver will appear. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.

Installing “ImageMixer”

You can use the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software to copy, view and edit images, and create video CDs. For details, see the software’s help files.

a Click [ImageMixer] on the installation menu screen.Select the desired language, then click [OK].

The “Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard” screen appears.

• This section describes the English screen.

b Follow instructions on each succeeding screen.Install “ImageMixer” according to the screen.

• When you use Windows 2000 or Windows XP, install “WinASPI.”

•

c

d

109

Enjoying im


Connecting the camera to c Connect the supplied USB

B Mode Normal” appears on the screen e camera. When a USB connection is

blished for the first time, your computer matically runs the used program to gnize the camera. Wait for a while.

ring communication, the access indicators n red.

USB Mode Normal” does not appear in Step , press MENU, select [USB Connect], and it to [Normal].hen using a Microdrive/CF card, opening the card cover cancels the USB connection. Do t open the CF card cover during the USB nnection.

USB ModeNormal

Memory Stick

Switch on MENU

Access indicators*

your computer

a Insert the recording medium with the images you want to copy into the camera. Connect the supplied AC Adaptor, and plug the adaptor into a wall outlet (wall socket).

• Select the recording medium with the /CF switch (page 21).

• When you copy images to your computer using the battery pack, copying may be failed or cause data corruption by battery shutoff. We recommend that you use the AC Adaptor.

b Turn on your computer and the camera.

cable to the (USB) jack of the camera.

d Connect the USB cable to your computer.

• When using a desktop computer, connect the USB cable to the USB connector on the rear panel.

• When using Windows XP, the AutoPlay wizard automatically appears on the desktop. Proceed to page 112.

“USof thestaautoreco

* Dutur

• If “4

set• W

CFnoco

AC Adaptor

To a wall outlet (wall socket)

Windows XPonnect the camera and your omputer with the USB cable.Image Transfer” starts up automatically nd the images are automatically copied to e computer.indows XP is set so that the OS AutoPlay izard activates.

you want to cancel the setting, follow the rocedure below.

Click [Start], then click [My Computer].

Right-click [Sony MemoryStick], then click [Properties].

Cancel the setting.1 Click [AutoPlay].2 Set [Content type] to [Pictures].3 Check [Select an action to perform]

under [Actions], select [Take no action], then click [Apply].

4 Set [Content type] to [Video files] and proceed Step 3. Set [Content type] to [Mixed content] and proceed Step 3.

5 Click [OK].The [Properties] screen closes.

The OS AutoPlay Wizard does not start up automatically even if the USB connection is made next time.

110

P Disconnecting the USB cable, removing the recording medium, or turning off the camera during a USB connectionFor Windows 2000, Me, or XP users

1 Double-click on the tasktray.

2 Click (Sony DSC), then click [Stop].

3 Confirm the device on the confirmation window, then click [OK].

4 Click [OK].Step 4 is unnecessary for Windows XP users.

5 Disconnect the USB cable, remove the recording medium, or turn off the camera.

For Windows 98 or 98SE usersConfirm that the access indicators (page 109) on the screen are turned white and carry out only Step 5 above.

Copying images using “Image Transfer”

– Windows 98/98SE/2000/MeConnect the camera and your computer with the USB cable.“Image Transfer” launches and the images are automatically copied to the computer. When copying is complete, “ImageMixer” automatically launches and images appear.

• Normally “Image Transfer” and “Date” folders are created inside the “My Documents” folder, and all of the image files recorded with the camera are copied into these folders.

• You can change the “Image Transfer” settings (page 111).

–Cc“athWWIfp

a

b

c

Double-click here

111

Enjoying im


Changing “Image Transfer” Copying images without d Double-click the “My Documents” folder and right-click on the “My Documents” window to display the menu, then select [Paste] from the menu.The image files are copied to the “My Documents” folder.

settings

You can change “Image Transfer” settings. Right-click the “Image Transfer” icon on the tasktray, select [Open Settings]. The settings you can set are as follows: [Basic], [Copy], and [Delete].

When the “Image Transfer” starts, the below window appears.

When you select [Settings] from the above window, you can only change the [Basic] setting.

using “Image Transfer”

– Windows 98/98SE/2000/MeIf you do not set to launch “Image Transfer” automatically, you can copy images as following procedure.

a Double-click [My Computer], then double-click [Removable Disk].

The contents of the recording medium inserted in your camera appear.

• This section describes an example of copying images to the “My Documents” folder.

• When the “Removable Disk” icon is not shown, see page 112.

• When using Windows XP, see page 112.

b Double-click [DCIM], then double-click the folder that the image files you want to copy are stored.

c Right-click the image file to display the menu, then select [Copy] from the menu.

Right-click here

Windows XP

opying images using the indows XP AutoPlay wizard

Make a USB connection (page 109). Click [Copy pictures to a folder on my computer using Microsoft Scanner and Camera Wizard], then click [OK].

The “Scanner and Camera Wizard” screen appears.

Click [Next].The images stored on the recording medium are displayed.

Click the checkbox of images that you do not want to copy to your computer to remove the checkmark, then click [Next].The “Picture Name and Destination” screen appears.

Select a name and destination for your pictures, then click [Next].Image copying starts. When the copying is completed, the “Other Options” screen appears.

112

When an image with the same file name exists in the copy destination folderThe overwrite confirmation message appears. When you overwrite the existing image with the new one, the original file data is deleted.

To change the file nameTo copy an image file to the computer without overwriting, change the file name to the desired name. However, note that if you change the file name, you may not be able to play back that image with your camera. To play back images with the camera, perform the operation on page 116.

When a removable disk icon is not shown

1 Right-click [My Computer] to display the menu, then click [Properties].The “System Properties” screen appears.

2 Display [Device Manager].1 Click [Hardware].2 Click [Device Manager].• For Windows 98, 98SE, Me users,

Step 1 is unnecessary. Click the [Device Manager] tab.

3 If [ Sony DSC] is displayed, delete it.1 Right-click [ Sony DSC].2 Click [Uninstall].

The “Confirm Device Removal” screen appears.

• For Windows 98, 98SE, Me users, click [Remove].

3 Click [OK].The device is deleted.

Try the USB driver installation again using the supplied CD-ROM (page 106).

–

CW

a

b

c

d

113

Enjoying im


e Select [Nothing. I’m finished Viewing the images on your
working with these pictures], then click [Next].The “Completing the Scanner and Camera Wizard” screen appears.
f Click [Finish].The wizard closes.

• To continue copying other images, follow the procedure given under P on page 110 to disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. Then, perform the procedure from Step 1 again.

computer

a Click [Start], then click [My Documents].

The “My Documents” folder contents are displayed.

• This section describes the procedure for viewing copied images in the “My Documents” folder.

• When not using Windows XP, double-click [My Documents] on the desktop.

• You can use the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software to view and edit images on your computer. For details, see the software’s help files.

b Double-click the desired image file.The image is displayed.

114

Image file storage destinations and file names

The image files recorded with your camera are grouped as folders in the recording medium.

Example: when viewing folders on Windows XP (when using a “Memory Stick”)

• Even when using a Microdrive/CF card, “Sony MemoryStick” may be displayed, depending on your computer environment.

• You cannot record any images to “100MSDCF” or “MSSONY” folders. The images in these folders are available only for viewing.

• For more information about the folder, see pages 50, 83.

Folder containing image data which was recorded using the camera not equipped with the folder creating function.

Folder containing image data which was recorded using your camera. When not creating any folders, there is only the “101MSDCF” folder.

Folder containing E-Mail and TIFF mode image data/movie data/ Voice mode audio data which was recorded using the camera not equipped with the folder creating function.

115

Enjoying im


81)

mode (page 80)

00)

• ssss stands for any number within the range from 0001 to 9999.

• The numerical portions of the following files are the same.– A RAW data file shot in RAW mode and its corresponding image file– An uncompressed image file shot in TIFF mode and its corresponding image file– A small-size image file shot in E-Mail mode and its corresponding image file– An audio file shot in Voice mode and its corresponding image file– A movie file recorded in movie mode and its corresponding index image file

• To view a RAW data file, you have to install exclusive application software from the supplied CD-ROM.

Folder File name File meaning

101MSDCF to 999MSDCF

DSC0ssss.JPG • Still image files shot in– Normal mode (page 27)– Exposure Bracket mode (page 63)– Burst mode (page 75)– Multi Burst mode (page 76)

• Still image files recorded simultaneously in– RAW mode (page 79)– TIFF mode (page 80)– E-Mail mode (page 81)– Voice mode (page 81)

DSC0ssss.JPE • Small-size image files shot in E-Mail mode (page

DSC0ssss.MPG • Audio files shot in Voice mode (page 81)

DSC0ssss.TIF • Uncompressed (TIFF) image file recorded in TIFF

DSC0ssss.SRF • RAW data file recorded in RAW mode (page 79)

MOV0ssss.MPG • Movie files (page 100)

MOV0ssss.THM • Index image files recorded in movie mode (page 1

116

Viewing an image previously copied to a computer

This operation is required for viewing image files that have been copied previously to a computer and already deleted from the recording medium using the camera.Copy the image files stored on your computer to a recording medium and view them on the camera.

• Skip Step 1 if you have not changed the file name assigned by this camera.

• You may not be able to view the image depending on the image size.

• Images modified with a computer or images shot using other than this camera may not be able to be played back on the camera.

• If the warning message for overwriting the data appears, enter other numbers in Step 1.

• If there is no folder to store the image file, create a new folder, then copy the image file. For details on how to create the folder, see page 50.

a Right-click the image file, then click [Rename]. Change the file name to “DSC0ssss”.

ssss stands for any number within the range from 0001 to 9999.• A file extension may be indicated

depending on the setup of the computer. The extension of a still image is “JPG” and that of a movie is “MPG”. Do not change the extension.

b Copy the image file to a folder on the recording medium.1 Right-click the image file, then

click [Copy].2 Select the [DCIM] folder from

[Removable Disk] or [Sony MemoryStick] in [My Computer].

3 Right-click the [sssMSDCF] folder, then click [Paste].sss stands for any number within the range from 100 to 999.

117

Enjoying im


computer. To select the folder, follow the Disconnecting the USB cable, oving the recording medium, or ing off the camera during a USB nection and drop the drive icon or the icon of ecording medium to the “Trash” icon, remove the USB cable, remove the rding medium, or turn off the camerayou are using Mac OS X v10.0, remove the B cable etc., after you have turned your

mputer off.

Copying images

ouble-click the newly recognized icon n the desktop.he contents of the recording medium

nserted in your camera appear.

ouble-click “DCIM.”

ouble-click the folder that the images ou want to copy are stored.

rag and drop the image files to the hard isk icon.he image files are copied to your hard isk.or details on the storage location of the

mages and file names, see page 114.

Copying images to your computer– For Macintosh users

Recommended computer environmentOS: Mac OS 9.1, 9.2, or Mac OS X (v10.0/v10.1/v10.2)The above OS must be installed at the factory.USB connector: Provided as standardDisplay: 800 × 600 dots or more

32000-color mode or more• If you connect two or more USB equipment to

a single computer at the same time, some equipment, including your camera, may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment.

• Operations are not guaranteed when using a USB hub.

• Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned above.

USB modeThere are two modes for a USB connection when connecting with a computer, [Normal] and [PTP]* modes. The default setting is the [Normal] mode. * Compatible only with Mac OS X. When

connected to a computer, only the data in the folder selected by the camera is copied to the

procedure on page 83.

Communication with your computerWhen your computer resumes from the suspend or sleep mode, communication between your camera and your computer may not recover at the same time.

When a USB connector is not provided on your computerWhen neither a USB connector nor a recording medium slot is provided, you can copy images using an additional device. See the Sony Website for details.http://www.sony.net/

a Connecting your camera to your computer

For details, see page 109.

remturnconDragthe rthenreco• If

USco

b

1 DoTi

2 D

3 Dy

4 DdTdFi

118

c Viewing the images on your computer

1 Double-click the hard disk icon.

2 Double-click the desired image file in the folder containing the copied files.The image file opens.

• Close down all applications running on the computer before installing application.

• You can use the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software to copy images to your computer and to view images on your computer. For details on installing, see operating instructions supplied with the CD-ROM. For details on operation, see the software’s help files.

• When the image cannot be displayed, increase the virtual memory capacity.

• “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” cannot be used with Mac OS X.

• “Image Transfer” cannot be used with Macintosh.

For Mac OS X usersWhen you click an E-Mail mode image file, “There is no application available to open the document "DSC0ssss.JPE".” may be shown. In this case, carry out the following setup. The screen may differ depending on your OS version.

1 Click [Choose Application...] on the screen “There is no application available to open the document "DSC0ssss.JPE".”

2 Change [Recommended Applications] to [All Applications].

3 Select [QuickTime Player] from the application list, then click [Open].

119

Troubleshooting2 Should your camera still not work 3 Should your camera still not work

roperly, consult your Sony dealer or ocal authorized Sony service facility.

age 18).

while pushing the battery eject lever dge of the battery pack (page 14).

correctly (page 14).ler or local authorized Sony service

C Adaptor (page 14).ler or local authorized Sony service

correctly (page 14).

Troubleshooting

TroubleshootingIf you have trouble with your camera, try the following solutions.

1 First, check the items on pages 119 to 129. If the screen shows “C:ss:ss,” the self-diagnosis function is working. Please see page 133.

properly, press the RESET button located inside the battery/“Memory Stick” cover, then turn on the camera again. (This will clear the date and time settings, etc.)

pl

Battery and power

RESET

Symptom Cause Solution

You cannot charge the battery pack.

• The camera is turned on. p Turn the camera off (p

The battery pack cannot be installed.

• The battery pack is not installed correctly. p Install the battery packdown using the front e

The e on the display window flashes quickly when charging a battery pack.

• The battery pack is not installed correctly.• The battery pack has malfunctioned.

p Install the battery packp Consult your Sony dea

facility.

The r on the display window does not flash when charging a battery pack.

• The AC Adaptor is disconnected.• The AC Adaptor has malfunctioned.

• The battery pack is not installed correctly.• The battery pack is completely charged.

p Properly connect the Ap Consult your Sony dea

facility.p Install the battery pack

—

ack after using it completely. The battery displays the correct time (page 15).ttery pack (page 14). pack with a new one.

ith a cotton bud, etc., and charge the battery

pack with a new one.

ack correctly (page 14).e AC Adaptor (page 17).dealer or local authorized Sony service

ttery pack (page 14). pack with a new one.

again (page 18) or use the AC Adaptor

arged battery pack (page 14).

29).

justment lever (page 29).

, M, SCN or (pages 27 and 100).

120

Shooting still images / movies

The battery remaining indicator is incorrect, or sufficient battery remaining indicator is displayed but the power runs out soon.

• You have used the camera for a long time in an extremely hot or an extremely cold location.

• A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.

• The battery pack is discharged. • The battery pack is dead (page 147).

p See page 146.

p Charge the battery premaining indicator

p Install a charged bap Replace the battery

The battery pack runs down too quickly.

• You have used the camera in an extremely cold location.

• The DC plug is dirty so the battery pack is not charged enough.

• The battery pack is dead (page 147).

p See page 146.

p Clean the DC plug wpack (page 143).

p Replace the battery

You cannot turn on the camera.

• The battery pack is not installed correctly.• The AC Adaptor is disconnected.• The AC Adaptor has malfunctioned.

• The battery pack is discharged.• The battery pack is dead (page 147).

p Install the battery pp Properly connect thp Consult your Sony

facility.p Install a charged bap Replace the battery

The power turns off suddenly.

• If you do not operate the camera for about three minutes when using a battery pack, the camera turns off automatically to prevent wearing down the battery (page 18).

• The battery pack is discharged.

p Turn on the camera(page 17).

p Replace it with a ch


The LCD screen is not turned on even when the power is turned on.

• The FINDER/LCD switch is set to FINDER. p Set it to LCD (page

The subject is not visible on the finder.

• The diopter scale is not properly adjusted. p Adjust the finder ad

The subject is not visible on the screen.

• The mode dial is not set to , P, S, A, M, SCN or .

p Set it to , P, S, A


121

Troubleshooting

nnecting cable.ny setting other than [640 (Fine)].

g mode. Make sure to place the lens ubject than the shortest shooting distance 3). page 37).

to AUTO (page 67).

[Precision] (pages 30, 48, 140).

om cannot be used in RAW mode (pages

[Smart] (pages 30, 48, 140).

r settings except [8M] and [3:2]

t be used in Multi Burst mode (pages 30,

t be used in RAW mode (pages 30, 79).

de (page 58).age 59). (Forced flash) (page 68).f the screen (pages 48, 141).

age 59).

f the screen (pages 48, 141).

ct on the image you shoot.

on.


The shooting image is not displayed on the screen during a movie shooting.

• The image size is set to [640 (Fine)] when the A/V connecting cable is connected to the A/V OUT (MONO) jack.

p Disconnect the A/V cop Set the image size to a

The image is out of focus. • The subject is too close.

• (Twilight mode) or (Landscape mode) is selected for the Scene Selection function.

• Manual focus mode is selected.

p Set the macro recordinfarther away from the swhen shooting (page 3

p Set it to other modes (

p Set the FOCUS switch

Precision digital zoom does not function.

• [Digital Zoom] is set to [Smart] in the SET UP settings.

• You are shooting in RAW mode.

p Set [Digital Zoom] to

p The precision digital zo30, 79).

Smart zoom does not function.

• [Digital Zoom] is set to [Precision] in the SET UP settings.

• The image size is set to [8M] or [3:2].

• You are shooting in Multi Burst mode.

• You are shooting in RAW mode.

p Set [Digital Zoom] to

p Set image size to othe(page 24).

p The smart zoom canno76).

p The smart zoom canno

The image is too dark. • You are shooting a subject with a light source behind the subject.

• The brightness of the screen is too low.

p Select the metering mop Adjust the exposure (pp Set the flash mode to p Adjust the brightness o

The image is too bright. • You are shooting a spot lighted subject in a dark location such as on a stage.

• The brightness of the screen is too high.

p Adjust the exposure (p

p Adjust the brightness o

When looking at the screen in a dark place, some noise may show up on the screen.

• The camera temporarily brightens the screen to allow you to check the image being displayed while you are using the camera in a dark place.

p This will have no effe

Vertical streaks appear when you are shooting a very bright subject.

• The smear phenomenon is occurring. p This is not a malfuncti

edium (pages 22, 23).aved in the recording medium (page 43).g medium.

e proper position (page 21).

ng position (page 144).

over (page 23).

, P, S, A, M or SCN (page 27).

(page 100).

ck PRO” or Microdrive (pages 100, 144).o any position other than [640 (Fine)].

er speed than 1/25 second (page 55).

ction.

ot/NightFraming functions (pages 77 and

ct (page 79).

(only for NightShot) (pages 77 and 78).function cannot be used when manual focus et the FOCUS switch to AUTO (page 67).

122

You cannot shoot images. • No recording medium is inserted. • The capacity of the recording medium is

insufficient.• The /CF switch is not set to the proper

position.• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick”

is set to the LOCK position.• The CF card cover is open.• You cannot shoot while the flash is charging. • The mode dial is not set to , P, S, A, M or

SCN when you want to shoot a still image.• The mode dial is not set to when you want to

shoot a movie.• The image size is set to [640 (Fine)] when you

shoot a movie.

p Insert a recording mp Delete the images sp Change the recordinp Set the switch to th

p Set it to the recordi

p Close the CF card c—

p Set the mode dial to

p Set the mode dial to

p Use a “Memory Stip Set the image size t

Recording takes a long time.

• NR slow shutter function is activated. p Set to a faster shutt

A sound is made when changing between the NightShot and NightFraming modes, or when the shutter button is lightly pressed while NightFraming is set.

• The sound is made by the lens in operation. p This is not a malfun

The image colors are not correct.

• The NightShot or NightFraming function is set.

• Picture effect is activated.

p Cancel the Nightsh78).

p Cancel Picture Effe

NightShot or NightFraming does not function.

• The mode dial is set to S, A, M or SCN.• Manual focus mode is selected.

p Set it to , P or p The NightFraming

mode is selected. S


123

Troubleshooting

, P, S, A, M or SCN (page 27). (No indicator), (Forced flash), or 68).(page 37).

ed flash) (page 37).

t, Burst, or Exposure Bracket mode.

8 and 140).Auto] in the SET UP settings (pages 48, p using the OPEN (FLASH) switch

ng function or cancel the NightShot 78).

(page 37).

n] to [On] (page 69).

d time (page 19).

age 59).


Cannot shoot images with the flash.

• The mode dial is set to .• The flash is set to (No flash).

• (Twilight mode) is selected for the Scene Selection function.

• (Landscape mode) is selected for the Scene Selection function.

• The camera is in Multi Burst, Burst, or Exposure Bracket mode.

• [Hot Shoe] in the SET UP settings is set to [On].• When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual] in the

SET UP settings, you did not pop the flash up using the OPEN (FLASH) switch.

• NightShot is activated.

p Set the mode dial to p Set the flash to “Auto”

(Slow synchro) (pagep Set it to other settings

p Set the flash to (Forc

p Cancel the Multi Burs

p Set it to [Off] (pages 4p Set [Pop-up Flash] to [

140) or pop the flash u(page 69).

p Select the NightFramifunction (pages 77 and

The macro mode does not function.

• (Twilight mode) or (Landscape mode) is selected for the Scene Selection function.

p Set it to other settings

Cannot record in Multi Burst, Burst, or Exposure Bracket mode.

• [Mode] (REC Mode) is set to other than [Normal].

p Set it to [Normal].

The eyes of the subject come out red.

— p Set [Red Eye Reductio

The date and time are recorded incorrectly.

• The date and time are not set correctly. p Set the correct date an

The aperture value and shutter speed flash when you press and hold the shutter button halfway down.

• The exposure is incorrect. p Adjust the exposure (p

(page 39).

unication (page 110).over (page 23).

ction.

[NTSC] or [PAL] (pages 48 and 142).

on (page 41).

n (page 89). ng position (page 144).

e can prevent accidental erasure (page 89).itch on the “Memory Stick” will prevent

mages by mistake (page 144).

n (page 89).

124

Viewing images

Deleting/editing an image


The image cannot be played back.

• The mode dial is not set to .• You changed the folder/file name on a computer.• You cannot play back the image on the camera if

you modify the image on a computer.• The camera is in USB mode.• The CF card cover is open.

p Set the mode dial top See page 116.

—

p Cancel USB commp Close the CF card c

The image is coarse right after being played back.

• The image momentarily becomes rough for image processing.

p This is not a malfun

The images cannot be played back on a TV.

• The [Video Out] setting for the camera in SET UP is incorrect.

• The connection is not correct.

p Set [Video Out] to

p Check the connecti

The images cannot be played back on a computer.

— p See page 125.


Your camera cannot delete an image.

• The image is protected.• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick”

is set to the LOCK position.

p Cancel the protectiop Set it to the recordi

You have deleted the image by mistake.

• Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it.

p Protecting the imagp The write-protect sw

you from deleting i

The resizing function does not work.

• You cannot resize movies, Multi Burst, RAW data files, and uncompressed (TIFF) images.

—

You cannot attach a print (DPOF) mark.

• Print (DPOF) marks cannot be attached to movies or images recorded in RAW mode.

—

You cannot cut a image. • The movie is not long enough to cut.• Protected movies cannot be cut.• Still images cannot be cut.

—p Cancel the protectio

—

125

TroubleshootingComputers

computer environment” (pages 105,

on as Administrator (authorized 105).

age 18). page 17). cable (page 109).ble, and securely connect it again. Make is displayed on the screen (page 109). e 142).

ables except for those connected to the se.

mera and your computer without using a

(page 106). recognized device from your computer, river (pages 106, 112).

er (page 23).

d your computer correctly (page 109).

dure for your OS (pages 110, 111, 117).

mage Transfer” software, see page 110.mageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software,


You do not know whether or not your OS can be used with the camera.

— p Check “Recommended117).

You cannot install the USB driver.

— p In Windows 2000, logAdministrators) (page

Your computer does not recognize your camera.

• The camera is turned off. • The battery level is too low. • You are not using the supplied USB cable.• The USB cable is not connected securely.

• [USB Connect] is not set to [Normal] in the SET UP settings.

• The USB connectors on your computer are connected to other equipment besides the keyboard, the mouse.

• The camera is not directly connected to your computer.

• The USB driver is not installed. • Your computer does not properly recognize the

device because you connected the camera and your computer with the USB cable before you installed the “USB Driver” from the supplied CD-ROM.

• The CF card cover is open.

p Turn on the camera (pp Use the AC Adaptor (p Use the supplied USBp Disconnect the USB ca

sure that “USB Mode”p Set it to [Normal] (pag

p Disconnect the USB ckeyboard and the mou

p Directly connect the caUSB hub.

p Install the USB driverp Delete the erroneously

then install the USB d

p Close the CF card cov

You cannot copy images. • The camera is not correctly connected to your computer.

• The copy procedure differs depending on your OS.

—

—

p Connect the camera an

p Follow the copy proce

p If you are using the “Ip If you are using the “I

click on HELP.

ge Transfer automatically when the camera, at [Basic] setting (page 111).ction when the computer is turned on.

ftware from the supplied CD-ROM

“ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software,

er or software manufacturer.

the hard disk of the computer and then play from the hard disk (pages 110, 111, 117).

ttings. “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software,

e of your computer as follows: 600 dots or more, high color (16-bit color, re.

× 600 dots or more, 32000 colors or more.

ht side (page 22).


images (pages 43, 102). (page 21).

k PRO” or the Microdrive (pages 100, 144).o any setting other than [640 (Fine)].


126

“Memory Stick”

After making a USB connection, “Image Transfer” does not automatically start.

—

—

p Select [Launch Imaetc., is connected.]

p Make a USB conne

The image cannot be played back on a computer.

• You try to play back the image recorded in the RAW mode.

—

—

p Install exclusive so(page 79).

p If you are using theclick on HELP.

p Consult the comput

The image and sound are affected by noise when you play back a movie on a computer.

• You are playing back the movie directly from the recording medium.

p Copy the movie to the movie file back

You cannot print an image.

——

p Check the printer sep If you are using the

click on HELP.

The error message appears when loading the supplied CD-ROM.

• The computer display is not set correctly. p Set the display modFor Windows, 800 ×65000 colors) or moFor Macintosh, 800


You cannot insert a “Memory Stick.”

• You are inserting it backwards. p Insert it from the rig

You cannot record on a “Memory Stick.”

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to the LOCK position.

• The “Memory Stick” is full.• The /CF switch is set to CF.• When shooting movies, the image size is set to

[640 (Fine)].


p Delete unnecessaryp Set the switch to p Use a “Memory Sticp Set the image size t

You cannot format a “Memory Stick.”

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to the LOCK position.



127

Troubleshooting

ou set the “Memory Stick” write-protect osition to protect accidental erasure

side (page 23).

ages (pages 43, 102).

er (page 23).age 21).RO” or the Microdrive (pages 100, 144).

ny setting other than [640 (Fine)].

on.

r manufacturer.

is turned on and can connect with the

page 142).


Microdrive/CF card

PictBridge-compliant printer

You have formatted a “Memory Stick” by mistake.

• All the data on the “Memory Stick” are erased by formatting. You cannot restore them.

p We recommend that yswitch to the LOCK p(page 144).


You cannot insert a Microdrive/CF card.

• You try to insert an unusable CF card.• You are inserting it backwards.

—p Insert it from the right

You cannot record on a Microdrive/CF card.

• The Microdrive/CF card is full.• An unusable CF card is inserted.• The CF card cover is open.• The /CF switch is set to .• When shooting movies using a CF card, the

image size is set to [640 (Fine)].

p Delete unnecessary im—

p Close the CF card covp Set the switch to CF (pp Use a “Memory Stick Pp Set the image size to a

The Microdrive is heated. • You are using the Microdrive for a long time. p This is not a malfuncti

You have formatted a Microdrive/CF card by mistake.

• All the data on the Microdrive/CF card are erased by formatting. You cannot restore them.

—


The connection cannot be established.

• The printer is not compliant with the PictBridge standard.

• The printer does not set for the connection with the camera.

• [USB Connect] is not set to [PictBridge] in the SET UP settings.

p Consult with the printe

p Check that the printer camera.

p Set it to [PictBridge] (

era and the printer are properly connected e. For further information, refer to the ns supplied with it.

inter manufacturer whether the printer tion or not.inter manufacturer.

not have the recording date data cannot be e inserted. Set [Date] to [Off] and print it.

UM” battery pack (page 146).

ack (page 14).

to the DC IN jack of the camera and to a wall (page 17).

after one minute, reinstall the battery pack era. If this does not work, press the RESET e the battery/“Memory Stick” cover with a turn the power on again. (This will clear the gs, etc.)

128

Others

You cannot print images. • The camera does not connect to the printer.

• The printer is not turned on.

• Movies and images recorded in RAW mode cannot be printed.

• Images modified with a computer or images shot using other than this camera may not be able to be printed.

p Check that the camusing the USB cabl

p Turn on the printer.operating instructio—

—

Printing is canceled. • You disconnected the USB cable before the (Not disconnect USB cable) mark

disappears.• You switched the /CF switch while

printing.

—

—

You cannot insert the date or print images in the index mode.

• The printer does not provide these functions.

• The date may not be inserted in the index mode depending on the printer.

p Consult with the prprovides these func

p Consult with the pr

“---- -- --”is printed on the date-inserted part.

• The recording date data is not recorded on the image.

p The images that do printed with the dat


The camera does not work, no operations can be performed.

• You are not using an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.

• The battery level is low or zero (The indicator appears.).

• The AC Adaptor is not connected securely.

p Use an “InfoLITHI

p Charge the battery p

p Connect it securely outlet (wall socket)

The power is on, but the camera does not work.

• The internal system is not working properly. p Remove, and then, and turn on the cambutton located insidpointed object, thendate and time settin


129

Troubleshooting

ages 149 to 154).

ave the camera for about an hour and then e 143).

on.


You cannot identify the indicator on the screen.

— p Check the indicator (p

The lens gets fogged. • Condensation is occurring. p Turn off the camera, letry to use it again (pag

The camera gets hot if you use it for a long time.

— p This is not a malfuncti

ive/CF card.

44).ry Stick” is dirty.

44).

amera.

sition. Set it to the recording position

ges. Delete unnecessary images or data (pages

ory Stick.”

rodrive/CF card is dirty.

crodrive/CF card manufacturer.

ord images. Delete unnecessary images or

ain (page 45).

130

Warnings and messages

The following messages appear on the screen.

Message Meaning/ Corrective Action

No Memory Stick • Insert a “Memory Stick” (page 22).• Set the /CF switch to CF and record the image using the Microdr

System error • Turn the power off and on again (page 18).

Memory Stick error • The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be used with your camera (page 1• The “Memory Stick” is damaged, or the terminal section of the “Memo• Insert the “Memory Stick” correctly (page 22).

Memory Stick type error • The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be used with your camera (page 1

Read only memory • You cannot record or delete images on the “Memory Stick” with this c

Memory Stick locked • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to the LOCK po(page 144).

No memory space • The capacity of the “Memory Stick” is insufficient. You cannot record ima43, 102).

No CF card • Insert the Microdrive/CF card (page 23).• Set the /CF switch to and record the image using the “Mem

CF card error • An unusable CF card is inserted (page 145).• The Microdrive/CF card is damaged, or the terminal section of the Mic• Insert the Microdrive/CF card correctly (page 23).

CF card type error • The inserted CF card cannot be used with your camera (page 21).

CF card locked • The Microdrive/CF card is set to be unrecordable. Consult with the Mi

No CF card space • The capacity of the Microdrive/CF card is insufficient. You cannot recdata (pages 43, 102)

Cover open • Close the CF card cover.

Format error • The recording medium format failed. Format the recording medium ag

For “InfoLITHIUM” battery only

• The battery pack is not the “InfoLITHIUM” type.

131

Troubleshooting

ding on the conditions of use or the type minutes of remaining battery time left.

ing medium. (For example: 123MSDCF

ing medium. You cannot create any more

ur camera. Select other folders (page 51).

slower shutter speed is set. Use the flash,

.

vie is inserted (page 100).

ue to a drop in data transmission rate.

e to a drop in data transmission rate. (This

ernal temperature problem or vibration.

ur camera.

r camera.

a non-PictBridge-compliant device.


• The battery level is low or zero. Charge the battery pack (page 14). Depenof battery pack, the indicator may flash even though there are still 5 to 10

Folder error • A folder with the same first three digits number already exists on the recordand 123ABCDE) Select other folders, or create a new folder.

Cannot create more folders • The folder whose first three digits of the name is “999” exists on the recordfolders.

Cannot record • You attempted to select the folder that is available only for viewing with yo

• The amount of light is not sufficient, or camera shake may occur because aor mount the camera on a tripod to steady the camera.

“Night shot” • An operation that is not valid while NIGHTSHOT is set was attempted.

“Night framing” • An operation that is not valid while NIGHTFRAMING is set is attempted

Manual focus is invalid • The FOCUS switch is set to MANUAL when the mode dial is set to .

The flash is not open • Pop the flash up using the OPEN (FLASH) switch (page 69).

640 (Fine) is not available • A recording medium that does not correspond to the [640 (Fine)] size mo

Busy • When using the Microdrive, the data writing process was not performed d

Buffer over • When using the Microdrive, the data writing process was not performed dumessage is indicated after the “Busy” message appeared.)

Read error • The movies stored on the Microdrive cannot be played back due to an int• The file is corrupted.

File error • An error occurred while playing back the image.

Image size over • You are playing back an image of a size that cannot be played back on yo

No file in this folder • No images have been recorded in this folder.

Cannot divide • The movie is not long enough to be divided.• The file is not a movie.

Invalid operation • You are playing back a file that was created on equipment other than you

Enable pritner to connect • [USB Connect] is set to [PictBridge], however the camera is connected toCheck the device.

Connect to device • You tried to print images before the printer connection was established.

t stores only movies or images recorded in de.

nter.

rinter.

ck the image you want to print is corrupted.

cable.

132

No printable image • You tried to execute [DPOF image] without checking the mark.• You tried to execute [All In This Folder] while selecting the folder tha

RAW mode. You cannot print movies or images recorded in RAW mo

Printer busy • Since the printer is busy, it cannot receive print requests. Check the pri

Paper error • A paper error occurred, such as paper-out, paper-jam, etc. Check the p

Ink error • An ink error occurred. Check the printer.

Printer error • The camera received an error from the printer. Check the printer, or che

• The data is being transferred to the printer. Do not disconnect the USB


133

TroubleshootingCode Cause Countermeasure

rn the power off and on again (page 18).

-insert the recording medium several es.

rmat the recording medium (page 45).

sert a new recording medium (pages 21, , 23).

ess the RESET button (page 119) located ide the battery/“Memory Stick” cover, n turn on the camera again.

Self-diagnosis display

–If a code starting with an alphabet letter appearsYour camera has a self-diagnosis display. This function displays the condition of the camera on the screen using a combination of a letter and four numerical digits. If this occurs, check the following code chart and take the corresponding countermeasure. The last two digits (indicated by ss) will differ depending on the state of the camera.

Self-diagnosis display

If your camera is not still functioning well after trying the countermeasure a couple of times, the camera may need to be repaired. Contact your Sony dealer or local autholized Sony service facility and inform them of the 5-digit code.

C:32: ss There is trouble with your camera’s hardware.

Tu

C:13: ss The camera cannot read or write data on the recording medium.

Retim

An unformatted recording medium is inserted.

Fo

The inserted recording medium cannot be used with your camera, or the data is damaged.

In22

E:61: ss

E:91: ss

A camera malfunction that you cannot reverse has occurred.

Prinsthe

(Units: images)

(Units: images)

(Units: images)

MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G6) 10 (11) 22 (24) 45 (49)

— — —

6) 11 (12) 23 (25) 48 (51)

7) 12 (12) 25 (26) 51 (53)

7) 12 (13) 26 (26) 53 (54)

7) 13 (13) 27 (27) 55 (55)

MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G4) 8 (8) 17 (18) 34 (37)

5) 9 (9) 18 (20) 38 (41)

5) 8 (9) 17 (18) 36 (38)

5) 9 (9) 18 (19) 38 (39)

5) 9 (9) 19 (19) 39 (39)

5) 9 (9) 19 (19) 40 (40)

MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G58) 58 (106) 119 (216) 242 (442)

58) 58 (106) 119 (216) 242 (442)

91) 90 (166) 183 (337) 375 (689)

138) 142 (246) 290 (500) 592 (1022)

316) 324 (549) 660 (1117) 1347 (2280)

987) 1020 (1785) 2074 (3630) 4234 (7410)

Additional information

134

The number of images that can be saved/shooting timeThe number of images that can be saved and the shooting time are different, depending on the capacity of the recording medium, the image size, and the image quality. Refer to the following charts when you choose a recording medium.

• The number of images is listed in Fine (Standard) order.

• The values for the number of images that can be saved and the shooting time may vary, depending on the shooting conditions.

• For normal shooting times and numbers of images that can be saved, see pages 25, 26.

• When the remaining number of images recordable is more than 9999, “ >9999 ” is indicated on the screen. And when it is more than 999, “ 999 ” is indicated on the display window.

“Memory Stick”

RAW

TIFF

Voice*

* For five-second audio recording

16MB 32MB 64MB 1288M 0 (0) 1 (1) 3 (3) 6 (

3:2 — — — —

5M 0 (0) 1 (1) 3 (3) 6 (

3M 0 (0) 1 (1) 3 (3) 6 (

1M 0 (0) 1 (1) 3 (3) 7 (

VGA 0 (0) 1 (1) 3 (3) 7 (

16MB 32MB 64MB 1288M 0 (0) 1 (1) 2 (2) 4 (

3:2 0 (0) 1 (1) 2 (2) 5 (

5M 0 (0) 1 (1) 2 (2) 4 (

3M 0 (0) 1 (1) 2 (2) 5 (

1M 0 (0) 1 (1) 2 (2) 5 (

VGA 0 (0) 1 (1) 2 (2) 5 (

16MB 32MB 64MB 1288M 3 (7) 8 (14) 16 (29) 32 (

3:2 3 (7) 8 (14) 16 (29) 32 (

5M 6 (11) 12 (22) 25 (45) 50 (

3M 9 (17) 19 (34) 39 (69) 79 (

1M 22 (38) 45 (78) 91 (157) 183 (

VGA 69 (121) 140 (245) 281 (492) 564 (

135

Additional inform

ationE-mail (Units: images)

Multi Burst (Units: images)

Movie

The numbers indicate the recording time. For example: “1:31:33” indicates “1 hour, 31 minutes, 33 seconds.”

16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G8M 4 (7) 8 (14) 16 (29) 32 (59) 59 (108) 120 (220) 244 (449)

3:2 4 (7) 8 (14) 16 (29) 32 (59) 59 (108) 120 (220) 244 (449)

5M 6 (11) 12 (23) 25 (46) 50 (94) 91 (170) 186 (345) 380 (705)

3M 9 (17) 20 (35) 40 (71) 80 (143) 145 (255) 296 (518) 604 (1058)

1M 23 (42) 47 (85) 96 (171) 192 (343) 340 (595) 691 (1210) 1411 (2470)

VGA 81 (162) 163 (327) 328 (657) 658 (1317) 1190 (2381) 2420 (4841) 4940 (9881)

16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G1M 24 (46) 50 (93) 101(187) 202 (376) 357 (649) 726 (1320) 1482 (2694)

16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G640 (Fine) — — — — 0:02:57 0:06:02 0:12:20

640 (Standard)

0:00:42 0:01:27 0:02:56 0:05:54 0:10:42 0:21:47 0:44:27

160 0:11:12 0:22:42 0:45:39 1:31:33 2:51:21 5:47:05 11:44:22

136

Microdrive

RAW (Units: images)

TIFF (Units: images)

Voice* (Units: images)

* For five-second audio recording

E-mail (Units: images)

Multi Burst (Units: images)

Movie

The numbers indicate the recording time. For example: “12:42:06” indicates “12 hours, 42 minutes, 6 seconds.”

1G (DSCM-11000)8M 50 (55)

3:2 —

5M 54 (57)

3M 56 (58)

1M 59 (60)

VGA 61 (61)

1G (DSCM-11000)8M 38 (41)

3:2 42 (45)

5M 40 (42)

3M 42 (43)

1M 43 (44)

VGA 44 (44)

1G (DSCM-11000)8M 269 (490)

3:2 269 (490)

5M 416 (764)

3M 657 (1133)

1M 1494 (2528)

VGA 4695 (8217)

1G (DSCM-11000)8M 271 (498)

3:2 271 (498)

5M 421 (782)

3M 670 (1173)

1M 1565 (2739)

VGA 5478 (10956)

1G (DSCM-11000)1M 1643 (2988)

1G (DSCM-11000)640 (Fine) 0:13:41

640 (Standard)

0:49:13

160 12:42:06

137

Additional inform

ation

mages (page 24).

JPEG file (page 79).ition to the JPEG file (page 80). in addition to the JPEG file (page 81).le in addition to the selected image size

ding mode.

This setting can be made only in SCN

under dark conditions or shooting a fast-When recording high-quality images, use g cannot be made in SCN mode.)

mages (page 24).

de. / Records images in the standard

Menu itemsMenu items that can be changed differ depending on the position of the mode dial. The screen shows only the items you can operate based on the current position of the mode dial. Default settings are indicated with x.

When the mode dial is set to

When the mode dial is set to P, S, A, M or SCN

Item Setting Description

(Image Size) x 8M/3:2/5M/3M/1M/VGA Selects the image size when shooting still i

Mode (REC Mode) RAWTIFFVoiceE-Mail

xNormal

– Records RAW data file in addition to the– Records uncompressed (TIFF) file in add– Records an audio file (with a still image)– Records a small-size (320×240) JPEG fi

(page 81).– Records an image using the normal recor


SCN (Scene) / / / x Sets the Scene Selection mode (page 37). (mode.)

ISO (ISO) 800 / 400 / 200 / 100 / 64 / xAuto Selects the ISO sensitivity. When shootingmoving subject, use a high-number setting. a low-number setting (page 64). (This settin

(Image Size) x 8M/3:2/5M/3M/1M/VGA Selects the image size when shooting still i

(P.Quality) xFine / Standard Records images with fine image quality moimage quality mode (page 49).

the JPEG file (page 79).addition to the JPEG file (page 80).ge) in addition to the JPEG file (page 81). file in addition to the selected image size

cording mode.

hen recording three images with each tting can be made only in Exposure Bracket

utter interval (page 76). (This setting can be e /BRK button.)

0).

ge 79).

ge 74).

indicator appears (except when the e made in SCN mode.)

indicator appears (except when the setting in SCN mode.)

indicator appears (except when the e made in SCN mode.)

vies (page 100).

ge 79).

138

When the mode dial is set to

Mode (REC Mode) RAWTIFFVoiceE-Mail

xNormal

– Records RAW data file in addition to – Records uncompressed (TIFF) file in – Records an audio file (with a still ima– Records a small-size (320×240) JPEG

(page 81).– Records an image using the normal re

BRK (Bracket Step) ±1.0EV/x±0.7EV/±0.3EV Sets the exposure compensation value wexposure value shifted (page 63). (This semode using the /BRK button.)

(Interval) 1/7.5 / 1/15 / x1/30 Selects the Multi Burst between-frame shmade only in Multi Burst mode using th

(Flash Level) High / xNormal / Low Selects the amount of flash light (page 7

PFX (P.Effect) Solarize / Sepia /Neg.Art / xOff Sets the special effects for the image (pa

COLOR (Color) Real/ xStandard Selects the color reproduction mode (pa

(Saturation) + / xNormal / – Adjusts the saturation of the image. Thesetting is Normal.) (This setting cannot b

(Contrast) + / xNormal / – Adjusts the contrast of the image. The is Normal.) (This setting cannot be made

(Sharpness) + / xNormal / – Adjusts the sharpness of the image. Thesetting is Normal.) (This setting cannot b


(Image Size) 640 (Fine)/ x 640 (Standard)/160 Selects the image size when shooting mo

PFX (P.Effect) Solarize / Sepia /Neg.Art / xOff Sets the special effects for the image (pa


139

Additional inform

ationWhen the mode dial is set to

ou want to play back (page 83).

tal erasure (page 89).

el the print (DPOF) mark (page 91).

t printer (page 93).

or single-image screen only.)

rding media.

slide show.

. (For single-image screen only.)

le-image screen only.)

age screen only.)


(Folder) OK/Cancel Selects the folder that contains the images y

- (Protect) — Protects/unprotects images against acciden

DPOF (DPOF) — Selects still images you want to attach/canc

(Print) — Prints images using a PictBridge-complian

(Slide) Interval

Image

Repeat

StartCancel

– Sets the slide show interval (page 85). (Fx3 sec/ 5 sec/ 10 sec/ 30 sec/ 1 min

– Selects images from either folder or recoxFolder/All

– Repeats the slide show.xOn/Off

– Starts the slide show.– Cancels the settings and execution of the

(Resize) 8M / 5M / 3M / 1M / VGA / Cancel Changes the recorded image size (page 90)

(Rotate) (counter-clockwise) / (clockwise) / OK / Cancel

Rotates the still image (page 86). (For sing

(Divide) OK / Cancel Divides a movie (page 104). (For single-im

6).

.

e into the image (page 36). When shooting t mode, the date and time cannot be inserted l not be displayed when shooting. The date ge is played back.

using a flash (page 69).

ht. Used when it is difficult to focus on the

her to display the image just after you shoot the recorded images for about two seconds. ext image.

nlarged to 2× (page 67).

vailable external flash (page 72).

matically (page 69).

140

SET UP items

(Camera 1)

(Camera 2)


AF Mode Single / xMonitor / Cont Selects the focus operation mode (page 6

Digital Zoom Smart / xPrecision Selects the digital zoom mode (page 30)

Date/Time Day&Time / Date / xOff Selects whether to insert the date and timmovies or images recorded in Multi Bursin the image. Also, the date and time wiland time will be displayed when the ima

Red Eye Reduction On / xOff Reduces the red-eye phenomenon when

Hologram AF xAuto / Off Selects whether to emit hologram AF ligsubject in dark conditions (page 35).

Auto Review On / xOff When shooting still images, selects wheta still image. Setting this to [On] displaysDuring this time, you cannot shoot the n


Expanded Focus xOn / Off When focusing manually, the image is e

Hot Shoe On / xOff Selects whether to use a commercially a

Pop-up Flash xAuto / Manual Selects whether to pop up the flash auto

Set the mode dial to SET UP. The SET UP screen appears. Default settings are indicated with x.

1

2

141

Additional inform

ation (Memory Stick Tool) (When the /CF switch is set to )

ata on a “Memory Stick,” including even

l data on a Microdrive/CF card, including he Memory Stick Duo Adaptor that is

images.

] makes the screen bright and easy to see ut also uses up the battery charge faster. y pack.

] makes the screen bright and easy to see ut also uses up the battery charge faster.

n.f the multi-selector/the shutter button.

(CF Card Tool) (When the /CF switch is set to CF)

(Setup 1)


Format OK / Cancel Formats the “Memory Stick.” Note that formatting erases all dprotected images (page 45).

Create REC. Folder

OK / Cancel Creates a folder for recording images (page 50).

Change REC. Folder

OK / Cancel Changes a folder for recording images (page 51).


Format OK / Cancel Formats the Microdrive/CF card. Note that formatting erases aleven protected images (page 45). You cannot format it using tcompliant with the CompactFlash slot (page 145).

Create REC. Folder

OK / Cancel Creates a folder for recording images (page 50).

Change REC. Folder

OK / Cancel Changes a folder for recording images (page 51).


LCD Brightness Bright/ xNormal/ Dark

Selects the LCD brightness. This has no effect on the recorded

LCD Backlight Bright/ xNormal Selects the brightness of the LCD backlight. Selecting [Brightwhen using the camera outdoors or in other bright locations, bDisplayed only when you are using the camera with the batter

EVF Backlight Bright/ xNormal Selects the brightness of the finder backlight. Selecting [Brightwhen using the camera outdoors or in other bright locations, b

Beep Shutterx OnOff

– Turns on the shutter sound when you press the shutter butto– Turns on the beep/shutter sound when you press the center o– Turns off the beep/shutter sound.

d language.

medium is changed or the recording folder

the folder is changed. (When the recording st number is assigned.)

or a PictBridge-compliant printer using the

USA).

142

(Setup 2)

Language — Displays the menu items, warnings and messages in selecte


File Number x Series

Reset

– Assigns numbers to files in sequence even if the recordingis changed.

– Resets the file numbering and starts from 0001 each timefolder contains a file, a number one higher than the large

USB Connect PictBridge/PTP/xNormal

Switches the USB mode when connecting with a computer USB cable.

Video Out NTSCPAL

– Sets the video output signal to NTSC mode (e.g., Japan, – Sets the video output signal to PAL mode (e.g., Europe).

Clock Set OK / Cancel Sets the date and time (pages 19, 48).


143

Additional inform

ationCleaning the DC plug On moisture condensation

e camera is brought directly from a cold warm location, or is placed in a very p room, moisture may condense inside utside the camera. This moisture ensation may cause a malfunction of amera.

sture condensation occurs easily n: e camera is brought from a cold

cation such as a ski slope into a warmly ated room. e camera is taken from an air-nditioned room or car interior to the hot tdoors, etc.

revent moisture condensationn bringing the camera from a cold e to a warm place, seal the camera in a tic bag and leave it in the new location bout an hour. Remove the plastic bag n the camera has adapted to the new erature.

oisture condensation occurs off the camera and wait about an hour

he moisture to evaporate. Note that if attempt to shoot with moisture aining inside the lens, you will be le to record clear images.

Precautions

Do not leave the camera in the following places• In extremely hot place, such as in a car

parked in the sun. The camera body may become deformed or this may cause a malfunction.

• Under direct sunlight or near a heater. The camera body may become deformed or this may cause a malfunction.

• On rocking vibration• Near strong magnetic place• On sandy or in dusty place

Do not let sand get into the camera. Sand or dust may cause the camera to malfunction and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.

CleaningCleaning the LCD screenClean the screen surface with an LCD cleaning kit (not supplied) to remove fingerprints, dust, etc.

Cleaning the lensWipe the lens with a soft cloth to remove fingerprints, dust, etc.

Clean the DC plug of the AC Adaptor with a dry cotton bud. Do not use the dirty plug. Use of the dirty plug may not properly charge the battery pack.

Cleaning the camera surfaceClean the camera surface with a soft cloth slightly moistened with water, then wipe the surface with a dry cloth. Do not pour volatile insecticide on the camera, contact with rubber or vinyl for a long time, or use the following as this may damage the finish or the casing.• Thinner• Benzine• Alcohol• Diposable cloth

Note on operating temperatureThe camera is designed for use within a temperature range of 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). (When using a Microdrive: 5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F)) Shooting in extremely cold or hot locations that exceed this range is not recommended.

If thto a damor ocondthe c

Moiwhe• Th

lohe

• Thcoou

To pWheplacplasfor awhetemp

If mTurnfor tyou remunab

4) [640 (Fine)] size movies can be recorded or played back only using a “Memory Stick PRO” or Microdrive.The “Memory Stick” formatted with a computer is not guaranteed to operate with this camera.The data read/write time differs depending on the combination of the “Memory Stick” and a device.

otes on use of the “Memory Stick”You cannot record, edit, or delete images when the write-protect switch is set to LOCK. The position or the shape of the write-protect switch may differ depending on the “Memory Stick” you use.

Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while reading or writing data.Data may be damaged in the following cases:– Removing the “Memory Stick” or turning off

the camera while reading or writing data. – Using the camera in a location subject to the

effects of static electricity or noise. We recommend you back up any important data.Do not attach any other material than the supplied label on the labeling position.

Terminal

Write-protect switch

Labeling position

144

The internal rechargeable button batteryThis camera has an internal rechargeable button battery for maintaining the date and time and other settings regardless of whether the power is on or off. This rechargeable button battery is continually charged as long as you are using the camera. However, if you use the camera for only short periods it discharges gradually, and if you do not use the camera at all for about one month it becomes completely discharged. In this case, be sure to charge this rechargeable button battery before using the camera. Note that even if this rechargeable button battery is not charged, you can still use the camera as long as you do not record the date and time.

How to chargeConnect the camera to a wall outlet (wall socket) using the AC Adaptor, or install the charged battery pack, and leave the camera for 24 hours or more with the power turned off.

• The rechargeable button battery is located inside the battery/“Memory Stick” cover. Never remove the rechargeable button battery.

The “Memory Stick”“Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable and versatile IC recording medium with a data capacity that exceeds the capacity of a floppy disk.The “Memory Stick” that can be used with this camera is as follows. However, we have no guarantee of proper operation.

1) When using it with this camera, be sure to insert into the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor.

2) “MagicGate Memory Stick” is equipped with the MagicGate copyright protection technology. MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses encryption technology. However, because your camera does not support the MagicGate standards, data recorded with your camera is not subject to MagicGate copyright protection.

3) Supports high-speed data transmission using the parallel interface.

•

•

N•

•

•

•

•

“Memory Stick” Recording/playback

Memory Stick Yes

Memory Stick Duo 1) Yes

Memory Stick Duo (MagicGate/higher speed data transmission compatible) 1)

Yes 2)3)

MagicGate Memory Stick Yes 2)

MagicGate Memory Stick Duo 1) Yes 2)

Memory Stick PRO Yes2)3)

Memory Stick PRO Duo 1) Yes 2)3)

145

Additional inform

ation• When you attach the supplied label, be sure to • When formatting the “Memory Stick Duo,”

e Microdriveicrodrive is a compact and lightweight

d disk drive that complies with Compact sh TypeII. Camera operations are firmed using a Microdrive (Hitachi bal Storage Technologies, Inc. DSCM-00 (1 GB)).

tes on use of the Microdrivee sure to format the Microdrive using this mera when you use it for the first time.

he Microdrive is a compact hard disk drive. ince the Microdrive is a rotating disk, the icrodrive is not strong enough to resist

ibration and shock compared to a “Memory tick,” which uses flash memory.e sure not to transmit vibration or shock to the icrodrive during playback or shooting.ata may be damaged in the following cases:Removing the Microdrive while reading or writing data.If you store the Microdrive near corrosive material.ote that the use of the Microdrive under 5°C 1°F) may bring performance degradation.perating temperature range when using the icrodrive: 5° to 40°C (41°F to 104°F)ote that the camera cannot be used under low mospheric pressure (above 3 000 meters ove sea-level).

the data transmission rate becomes slow in an tremely high or low temperature and writing ovie data cannot be done, “Busy” is indicated

n the screen and writing data stops (page 131).

attach it to the labeling position. Be careful that the label does not stick out.

• When you carry or store the “Memory Stick,” put it in the case supplied with it.

• Do not touch the terminals of a “Memory Stick” with your hand or a metal object.

• Do not strike, bend or drop a “Memory Stick.” • Do not disassemble or modify a “Memory

Stick.”• Do not expose the “Memory Stick” to water. • Avoid using or storing the “Memory Stick” in

the following places:– In a car parked in the sun, or at a high

temperature.– Under direct sunlight.– In a humid place or near corrosive material.

Notes on use of the “Memory Stick Duo”• Be sure to insert the “Memory Stick Duo” into

the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor when using the “Memory Stick Duo” with the camera. If you insert the “Memory Stick Duo” into the camera without attaching the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor, you may not be able to remove the “Memory Stick Duo.”

• Verify that you are inserting the “Memory Stick Duo” in the proper direction when inserting it into the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor.

• Verify that you are inserting the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor in the proper direction when inserting it into the camera. Inserting it in the wrong direction may cause a malfunction.

• Do not insert a “Memory Stick Duo” that is not inserted into a Memory Stick Duo Adaptor into a “Memory Stick”-compatible unit. This may cause a malfunction of the unit.

insert the “Memory Stick Duo” into the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor and use the “Memory Stick” slot.

• When the “Memory Stick Duo” is equipped with the write protect switch, release its lock.

• You can use the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor that is compliant with the CompactFlash slot, however, you cannot format it using this camera and cannot record [640 (Fine)] movies.

Note on use of the “Memory Stick PRO”“Memory Stick PRO” with a capacity of up to 1 GB is verified for this camera.

ThA MharFlaconGlo110

No• B

ca• T

SMvSBM

• D–

–

• N(4OM

• Natab

• Ifexmo

ffective use of the battery packBattery performance decreases in low-temperature surroundings. So, the time that the battery pack can be used is shorter in cold places. We recommend the following to ensure longer battery pack use:– Put the battery pack in a pocket close to

your body to warm it up, and insert it in your camera immediately before you start shooting.

Frequently operating the zoom or flash wears out the battery charge faster.We recommend having spare battery packs handy for two or three times the expected shooting time, and making trial shots before taking the actual shots.Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.

emaining battery time indicatorhe power may go off although the battery maining indicator shows there is enough

ower to operate. Use the battery pack up nd charge the battery pack fully again so at the indication on the battery remaining dicator is correct. Note, however, that the

orrect battery indication sometimes will ot be restored if the camera is used in high mperatures for a long time or left in a fully

harged state, or the battery pack is equently used.

146

• The Microdrive may be hot just after it has been used. Be careful when you handle it.

• Do not write on the label. • Do not remove the label or attach a new label

over the label. • When you carry or store the Microdrive, put it

in the case supplied with it. • Do not expose the Microdrive to water.• Do not press on the label strongly.• Hold the sides of the Microdrive in your hand

and do not squeeze the Microdrive.

On “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack

What is the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack?The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a lithium-ion battery pack that has functions for communicating information related to operating conditions of your camera.The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack calculates the power consumption according to the operating conditions of your camera, and displays the remaining battery time in minutes.

Charging the battery packWe recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F). You may not be able to efficiently charge the battery pack outside of this temperature range.

E•

•

•

•

RTrepathincntecfr

147

Additional inform

ationHow to store the battery pack Flash Recommended distance (when ISO

sensitivity is set to Auto)0.5 to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to 14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W)0.6 to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to 10 feet 10 inches) (T)

finder Electric viewfinder (color)

tput connectors]OUT (MONO) jack (Monaural)

MinijackVideo: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced, sync negativeAudio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ load)Output impedance 2.2 kΩ

ssory jackMini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm)

jack mini-B

communicationHi-Speed USB (USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant)

D screen] panel used


l number of dots134 400 (560×240) dots

der] panel used


l number of dots235 200 (980×240) dots

• If the battery pack is not to be used for a long time, do the following procedure once per year to maintain proper function.

1 Fully charge the battery.

2 Discharge on your camera.

3 Remove the battery from your camera and store it in a dry, cool place.

• To use the battery pack up on your camera, leave the camera to on in slide show playback mode (page 85) until the power goes off.

Battery life• The battery life is limited. Battery

capacity decreases little by little as you use it more and more, and as time passes. When the battery operating time is shortened considerably, a probable cause is that the battery pack has reached the end of its life. Buy a new battery pack.

• The battery life varies according to how it is stored and the operating conditions and environment for each battery pack.

Specifications

x Camera[System]Image device 11 mm (2/3 type) color









View

[OuA/V

Acce

USB

USB

[LCLCD

Tota

[FinLCD

Tota

ccessoriesAC Adaptor (1)

Power cord (mains lead) (1)

USB cable (1)

Battery pack NP-FM50 (1)

A/V connecting cable (1)

Shoulder strap (1)

Lens cap (1)

Lens cap strap (1)

Lens hood (1)

CD-ROM (USB driver: SPVD-013) (1)

CD-ROM (Image Data Converter) (1)

Operating Instructions (1)

esign and specifications are subject to change ithout notice.

148


NP-FM50



Operating temperature range0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F)(When using the Microdrive: +5° to +40°C (41° to +104°F))


Dimensions (lens: W-end)134.4 × 91.1 × 157.2 mm (5 3/8 × 3 5/8 × 6 1/4 inches)(W/H/D, protruding portions not included)







x AC-L15A/L15B AC AdaptorPower requirements

AC 100 − 240 V, 50/60 Hz








x NP-FM50 battery pack Used battery

Lithium-ion battery




A•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Dw

149

Additional inform

ation* The selected mode mark or setting value is not

played on the display window as it is in the D screen/finder. Note that the mark on the play window is not changed even when you ange the mode or setting value.

page numbers in parentheses indicate location of additional important rmation.

Display window

A Self-diagnosis display (133)/Shutter speed indicator (55)/Available movie recording time indicator (minute) (100)/Available shooting time indicator (15)/PLAY indicator

B Flash mode (68)C Self-timer indicator (34)D White balance indicator* (73)E Battery remaining indicator (15)

F EV adjustment indicator* (59)G Aperture value indicator (56)/

Available movie recording time indicator (second) (100)

H Burst/Multi Burst/Exposure bracket indicator* (63, 75, 76)

I Metering mode indicator (58)J Remaining number of recordable

images indicator (25, 26)

disLCdisch

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

q;

Thethe info

Burst/Multi Burst indicator (75, 76)Image size indicator (24)/Multi Burst between-frame interval indicator (76)Recording mode indicator (79–81)AE/AF lock indicator (27)Battery remaining indicator (15)White balance indicator (73)/Mode dial indicator/Scene Selection indicator (37)/Flash mode (34)/Red-eye reduction (69)Sharpness indicator (138)/Saturation indicator (138)/Contrast indicator (138)/Hologram AF indicator (35, 140)Metering mode indicator (58)/Picture effect indicator (79)NightShot/NightFraming indicator (77)Low battery warning (131)Macro (33)AF mode (66)/AF range finder frame indicator (65)/Focus distance information indicator (67)

150

SOLARIZE

80min 101VGA FINE400

C:32:00 DATE

ISO400REAL

MAF F2.0 +2.0EV

0.3EV

250

5

6 w;

7 wa

8

9

q;

qa

qs

qd

qf

ws

wd

wf

wg

wh

wj

wk

1/30"

H

I

J

K

L

The LCD/finder screen

For shooting still images

1 qg

2 qh

3 qj

4 qk

ql

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

151

Additional inform

ationM NR slow shutter indicator (55)/

Shutter speed indicator (55)N Aperture value indicator (56)O Image quality indicator (49)P Recording folder indicator (50)Q Remaining number of recordable

images indicator (25, 26)R Remaining recording medium

capacity indicatorS Self-diagnosis display (133)/

Date/time indicator (36)/Color reproduction indicator (74)/ISO sensitivity (64)

T Bracket step indicator (63)U Self-timer indicator (34)V Vibration warning indicator (131)W Spot metering cross hair (58)X AF range finder frame (65)Y Histogram indicator (60)wh AE LOCK indicator (62)wj EV adjustment indicator (59)wk Menu/guide menu (47)

• Pressing the MENU button switches the menu/guide menu on/off.

The page numbers in parentheses indicate the location of additional important information.

152

A Image size indicator (100)B Recording mode indicator (100)C Battery remaining indicator (15)D White balance indicator (73)E Metering mode indicator (58)/

Picture effect indicator (79)F NightShot indicator (77)G Low battery warning (131)H Macro (33)I AF range finder frame indicator

(65)J Recording time [Maximum

recordable time] indicator (100)K Recording folder indicator (50)

L Remaining recording medium capacity indicator

M Self-diagnosis display (133)N Self-timer indicator (34)O AF range finder frame (65)P Spot metering cross hair (58)Q AE LOCK indicator (62)R EV adjustment indicator (59)S Menu/guide menu (47)

ql

For shooting movies

101[00:28:25]00:00:00

SOLARIZE

STBY80min

+2.0EV

1 q;

2 qa

3 qs

5

4 qd

6

qf

7

qg

9

qh

qk

8 qj

C:32:00

153

Additional inform

ationFor still image playback

A PictBridge connecting indicator J Image number

The page numbers in parentheses indicate location of additional important rmation.

(93)B Change folder indicator (83)C Image size indicator (24)D Recording mode indicator

(79–81)E Volume indicator (81)/

Protect mark indicator (89)/Print (DPOF) mark indicator (91)

F Zoom indicator (30)/Jog playback indicator (87)

G Not disconnect USB cable indicator (93)

H Folder-file number (114)I Playback folder indicator (83)

K Number of images recorded in the playback folder

L Remaining recording medium capacity indicator

M Self-diagnosis display (133)N EV adjustment indicator (59)/

ISO sensitivity (64)O Metering mode indicator (58)/

Flash indicator/White balance indicator (73)

P Shutter speed indicator (55)/Aperture value indicator (56)

Q Histogram indicator (60)R Recording date/time of the

image (19)/Menu/guide menu (47)

x1.3

F5.62000

ISO400AWB

80min

VOLUMEBACK/NEXT

19

2q;

3qa

4qs

5qd

6qf

7

8

qg

qh

qj

qk

VGA

+2.0EVC:32:00

12/12101

the info

154

B Image size indicator (101)C Recording mode indicator (101)D Playback indicator (101)/

Volume indicator (101)E Playback folder indicator (83)F Image number/Number of

images recorded in the playback folder

G Recording folder indicator (50)H Remaining recording medium

capacity indicatorI Counter (101)J Playback screen (101)K Playback bar (101)L Menu/Guide menu (47)

the location of additional important information.

For movie playback

A Change folder indicator (83)

00:00:128/8

80min

VOL.101

101

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

94

q;

qa

qsDPOF

The page numbers in parentheses indicate

155

Additional inform

ation

position or the setup of some functions

ial position)

e nce

Metering mode

AF range finder frame

Multi-pattern metering

Multipoint

is ble

Setup is available

Setup is available

is ble

Setup is available

Setup is available

is ble

Setup is available

Setup is available

is ble

Setup is available

Setup is available

Quick reference chartThis section describes the restrictions in the setup of the following functions, depending on the mode dial: shutter speed, aperture, flash, etc.

Quick chart of exposure, white balance, and auto focus functions (based on the mode d

• Note that shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are not as valid for the above table when the flash strobes.• When using the digital zoom or horogram AF, the AF is automatically set to focus on the centrally-located subject.

Shutter speed (second) Aperture ISO Whitbala

Auto (1/8 to 1/3200) Auto (F2 to F8) Auto (64 to 200) Auto

P Auto (1 to 1/3200) Auto (F2 to F8)Auto (64 to 200)/Setup is available from 64 to 800

Setupavaila

S Setup is available from 30 to 1/2000 F2 to F8Auto (64 fixed)/Setup is available from 64 to 800

Setupavaila

A8 to 1/2000 (aperture value F2 to F7.1) Setup is available from F2

to F8Auto (64 fixed)/Setup is available from 64 to 800

Setupavaila

8 to 1/3200 (aperture value F8)

M30 to 1/2000 (aperture value F2 to F7.1) Setup is available from F2

to F8Auto (64 fixed)/Setup is available from 64 to 800

Setupavaila

30 to 1/3200 (aperture value F8)

flash).

ulti Burst NightShot NightFraming

— —

— —

— —

— —

— —

— —

— —

156

Quick chart of flash mode

• When shooting movies, the flash mode is set to (No flash).• When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual], the flash mode is set to (Forced flash), (Slow synchro), or (No

Mode dial Normal/E-Mail/Voice/RAW/TIFF Burst Exposure Bracket M

Auto/ / /

P Auto/ / /

S /

A / /

M /

SCN

Twilight — — —

Twilight portrait — — —

Landscape /

Portrait Auto/ / /

157

Additional inform

ationThe relation between the shutter The movement of the program diagram

bination of the shutter speed and

e combination of exposure that the

: 10, ISO sensitivity: 100) (example)

recorded image is the same.

14 15 16 17 1918

51/30

1/601/125

1/2501/500

1/10001/2000

Darker subject

ed

EV

speed and apertureTo shoot clear images, selecting the proper exposure is very important, adding to the chance of achieving the proper focus. The exposure is an amount of light that is determined by the shutter speed and aperture value. The shutter speed is adjusted by the time, longer or shorter. The aperture is adjusted by the scale of the lens hole, larger or smaller. When the shutter speed is faster by one step, the aperture is opened by one step to get the same exposure.

The program diagram shows the movement of the comaperture value.The program shift function (page 54) quickly shifts thcamera has decided upon.

Program diagram (example)The movement of the program shift (EV

• When the EV value remains the same, the brightness of the

3

2

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

1F2

F2.8

F4

F5.6

F8

1/21/4

1/81/1

Brighter subject

Aperture

Shutter spe

istogram ........................................................ 60ologram AF ........................................... 35, 140ot Shoe ........................................................ 140

age quality ................................................... 49age size .................................................. 24, 25age Transfer ............................................... 107ageMixer .................................................... 108

dex screen ..................................................... 39dicators on the screen during shooting ......... 30foLITHIUM battery pack ........................... 146serting a Memory Stick ................................ 22serting a Microdrive ..................................... 23serting the date and time ............................... 36stallation ..................................... 106, 107, 108O ................................................................... 64

G ................................................................. 115

CD screen brightness ................................... 141CD screen display ........................................ 150ens hood ......................................................... 13

acro ............................................................... 33anual exposure .............................................. 57anual focus ................................................... 67emory Stick ................................................ 144enu ........................................................ 47, 137

Index

158

Index

AA/V connecting cable ...................................... 41AC Adaptor ................................................ 14, 17Access lamp ..................................................... 22Advanced accessory shoe ................................ 71AE LOCK ........................................................ 62AE/AF lock ................................................ 27, 29AF .................................................................... 27AF Mode .......................................................... 66AF range finder ................................................ 65Aperture priority .............................................. 56Auto adjustment mode ..................................... 27Auto Focus ................................................. 29, 65Auto Power Off function ................................. 18Auto Review .................................................. 140

BBattery remaining indicator ............................. 15Beep/shutter sound ........................................ 141Burst ................................................................ 75

CCD-ROM ....................................................... 106Center AF ........................................................ 65Charging the battery pack ................................ 14Charging time .................................................. 15Cleaning ......................................................... 143Clock Set ........................................... 19, 48, 142Color ................................................................ 74Command dial ................................................. 48

CompactFlash .................................................. 21Continuous AF ................................................. 67Contrast .......................................................... 138Copying images to your computer ......... 110, 111Cutting movies ............................................... 104

DDC plug ...................................................... 14, 17Deleting movies ............................................. 102Deleting still images ........................................ 43Digital zoom .................................................... 31Display window ............................................. 149Divide ............................................................ 104DPOF ............................................................... 91

EE-Mail .............................................................. 81EV adjustment ................................................. 59Exposure bracket ............................................. 63

FFile names ...................................................... 114File storage destinations ................................ 114Finder ............................................................... 29Finder adjustment ............................................ 29Flash ........................................................... 34, 68Flash Level ....................................................... 70Flexible spot AF .............................................. 66Folder ......................................................... 50, 83Format .............................................................. 45Framing burst ................................................... 75

HHHH

IImImImImInInInInInInInIS

JJP

LLLL

MMMMMM

159

IndexMetering mode .................................................58 Q USB driver ..................................................... 106

g your camera abroad ............................... 17

................................................................. 25ing images on TV .................................... 41ing movies on the LCD screen .............. 101ing the images on the LCD screen .......... 39

e ................................................................ 81

ings and messages ................................. 130e balance .................................................. 73

................................................................ 30

Microdrive ......................................................145Mode dial ..........................................................27Moisture condensation ...................................143Monitoring AF ..................................................66MPG ...............................................................115Multi Burst .................................................76, 87Multi-pattern metering .....................................58Multipoint AF ...................................................65Multi-selector ...................................................18

NNightFraming ...................................................78NightShot .........................................................77NR slow shutter ................................................55NTSC ..............................................................142Number of images that can be saved or shooting

time .....................................16, 25, 26, 134

PPAL .................................................................142PictBridge .........................................................93Picture effect .....................................................79Playback zoom .................................................84Pop-up Flash .....................................................69Power on/off .....................................................18Precautions .....................................................143Precision digital zoom ......................................31Print (DPOF) mark ...........................................91Program auto shooting ...............................28, 54Program shift ....................................................54Protect ...............................................................89

Quick reference chart .................................... 155Quick Review .................................................. 29

RRAW ................................................................ 79Red Eye Reduction .......................................... 69RESET button ................................................ 119Resize .............................................................. 90Rotate ............................................................... 86

SSaturation ....................................................... 138Scene Selection ................................................ 37Self-diagnosis display .................................... 133Self-timer ......................................................... 34SET UP .................................................... 48, 140Sharpness ....................................................... 138Shooting movies ............................................ 100Shooting still images ....................................... 27Shutter speed priority ...................................... 55Single AF ......................................................... 66Single screen .................................................... 39Slide show ....................................................... 85Smart zoom ...................................................... 31Speed burst ...................................................... 75

TTIFF ................................................................. 80Trimming ......................................................... 85

UUSB ....................................................... 109, 117

Usin

VVGAViewViewViewVoic

WWarnWhit

ZZoom

Sony Corporation Printed in Japan

30

84

99

61

1

Printed on 100% recycled paper using VOC (Volatile Organic Compound)-free vegetable oil based ink.

Additional information on this product and answers to frequent asked questions can be found at our Customer Support Website.

US ModelCanadian Model

AEP ModelUK Model

E ModelHong Kong ModelAustralian Model

Korea ModelTourist Model

Chinese ModelJapanese Model

SERVICE MANUAL

DIGITAL STILL CAMERA

LEVEL 2

• For ADJUSTMENTS (SECTION 6), refer to SERVICE MANUAL, ADJ (987627951.pdf).• For INSTRUCTION MANUAL, refer to SERVICE MANUAL, LEVEL 1 (987627941.pdf).• Reference No. search on printed wiring boards is available.• When the laser unit is repaired,

Make sure to follow the items of “NOTE ON HANDLING THE LASER DIODE”.

Link

SERVICE NOTE

DISASSEMBLY

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

REPAIR PARTS LIST

SPECIFICATIONS

SERVICE NOTE

DISASSEMBLY

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

REPAIR PARTS LIST

SPECIFICATIONS

Link

Revision HistoryRevision History

Ver 1.1 2004. 04

On the SY-096 boardThis service manual provides the information that is premised the circuit board replacement service and not intended repairinside the SY-096 board.Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board, mounted parts location and electrical parts list of the SY-096 board are notshown.The following pages are not shown.

Schematic diagram .............................Pages 4-25 to 4-44Printed wiring board ............................Pages 4-59 to 4-62

Mounted parts location .............................Pages 4-65 to 4-66Electrical parts list ................................... Pages 5-14 to 5-18

How to useAcrobat Reader


DSC-F828

— 2 —

DSC-F828

SPECIFICATIONS

xCamera[System]Image device 11 mm (2/3 type) color









Flash Recommended distance (when ISO sensitivity is set to Auto)0.5 to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to 14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W)0.6 to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to 10 feet 10 inches) (T)

Viewfinder Electric viewfinder (color)

[Output connectors]A/V OUT (MONO) jack (Monaural)

MinijackVideo: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω , unbalanced, sync negativeAudio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ load)Output impedance 2.2 kΩ

Accessory jackMini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm)

USB jack mini-B

USB communicationHi-Speed USB (USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant)

[LCD screen]LCD panel used



[Finder]LCD panel used




NP-FM50



Operating temperature range0° to+40°C (32° to +104°F)(When using the Microdrive: +5° to +40°C (41° to +104°F))


Dimensions (lens: W-end)134.4 91.1 157.2 mm (5 3/8 3× 5/8 × 6 1/4 inches)(W/H/D, protruding portions not included)







xAC-L15A/L15B AC AdaptorPower requirements

AC 100 − 240 V, 50/60 Hz








xNP-FM50 battery pack Used battery

Lithium-ion battery




Accessories• AC Adaptor (1)

• Power cord (mains lead) (1)

• USB cable (1)

• Battery pack NP-FM50 (1)

• A/V connecting cable (1)

• Shoulder strap (1)

• Lens cap (1)

• Lens cap strap (1)

• Lens hood (1)

• CD-ROM (USB driver: SPVD-013) (1)

• CD-ROM (Image Data Converter) (1)

• Operating Instructions (1)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

× ×

— 3 —

DSC-F828

1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-solderedconnections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashesand bridges.

2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors.

3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularlytransistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Pointthem out to the customer and recommend their replacement.

4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signsof deterioration. Point them out to the customer andrecommend their replacement.

5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing

• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚Cduring repairing.

• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of thecircuit board (within 3 times).

• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when solderingor unsoldering.

Unleaded solderBoards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead-free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.(Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed withthe lead free mark due to their particular size.)

: LEAD FREE MARKUnleaded solder has the following characteristics.• Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40°C higher than

ordinary solder.Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to beapplied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time.Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set toabout 350°C.Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if theheated tip is applied for too long, so be careful!

• Strong viscosityUnleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) thanordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur suchas on IC pins, etc.

• Usable with ordinary solderIt is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder mayalso be added to ordinary solder.

SAFETY CHECK-OUT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following

safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!

COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITHMARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTSLIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESECOMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERSAPPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTSPUBLISHED BY SONY.

ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORTÀ LA SÉCURITÉ!

LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LESDIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONTCRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NEREMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONYDONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OUDANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.


CAUTIONUse of controls or adjustments or performance procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

— 4 —

DSC-F828

TABLE OF CONTENTS1. SERVICE NOTE1-1. NOTE FOR REPAIR ······················································· 1-11-2. DISCHARGING OF THE FLASH UNIT’S CHARGING

CAPACITOR ··································································· 1-11-2-1.Preparing the Short Jig ····················································1-11-2-2.Discharging the Capacitor ··············································· 1-11-3. NOTES ON HANDLING THE LASER DIODE

[LASER UNIT] ······························································· 1-21-4. DESCRIPTION ON SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY ······ 1-2

2. DISASSEMBLY2-1. CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD ············ 2-22-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ·························2-32-3. ST SECTION ·································································· 2-42-4. ST-088 BOARD, LENS SECTION ·································2-42-5. ST CABINET ASSEMBLY ············································2-52-6. MT-067 BOARD ·····························································2-52-7. SI-037 BOARD, FLASH UNIT ······································ 2-62-8. LS-067 BOARD, LASER UNIT ·····································2-72-9. REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY ························ 2-82-10. EVF SECTION ································································2-82-11. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER) ······················ 2-92-12. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID), LCD UNIT ······· 2-92-13. BTH SECTION ·····························································2-102-14. SY-096 BOARD ····························································2-112-15. DD-204 BOARD ···························································2-122-16. CF-097 BOARD ····························································2-122-17. LR-018 BOARD, LITHIUM BATTERY ······················ 2-132-18. MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR ·······························2-132-19. AJ-007 BOARD ····························································2-142-20. DC-IN CONNECTOR, UA-003 BOARD ·····················2-142-21. FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD ·························· 2-152-22. HINGE/CABINET (LL) ASSEMBLY ·························· 2-162-23. SPEAKER/MICROPHONE SECTION ························2-162-24. CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY ··································2-172-25. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP) ·························· 2-192-26. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ·································2-202-27. CIRCUIT BOARDS AND

FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION ······························2-21

3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) ··························· 3-13-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) ··························· 3-33-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3) ··························· 3-53-4. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ································3-73-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ································3-9

4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS ANDSCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/4) ······················· 4-1FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/4) ······················· 4-3FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (3/4) ······················· 4-5FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (4/4) ······················· 4-7

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS• DD-204 (DC/DC CONVERTER)

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-11• LR-018 (BATTERY, RESET SW)

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-12• ST-088 (FLASH CONTROL)

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-13• LS-067 (AF LASER)

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-13• MT-067 (FLASH MOTOR)

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-14• SI-037 (FLASH, IR LED)

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-14

• AS-050 FLEXIBLESCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-14

• UA-003 (AV, USB JACK)SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-15

• LB-091 (EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT)SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-16

• CF-097 (CF CARD CONNECTOR)SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-17

• FP-756 FLEXIBLESCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-17

• SW-410 (FUNCTION KEY)SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-19

• AJ-007 (JACK)SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-19

• CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-21

• CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID)SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-22

• CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER)SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ····························4-23

Schematic diagrams of the SY-096 board are notshown.Pages from 4-25 to 4-44 are not shown.

4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS• DD-204 (DC/DC CONVERTER)

PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-49• LR-018 (BATTERY, RESET SW)

PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-50• ST-088 (FLASH CONTROL)

PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-51• MT-067 (FLASH MOTOR)

PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-51• LS-067 (AF LASER)

PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-52• SI-037 (FLASH, IR LED)

PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-53• UA-003 (AV, USB JACK)

PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-54• LB-091 (EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT)

PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-54• CF-097 (CF CARD CONNECTOR)

PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-55• AJ-007 (JACK)

PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-56• SW-410 (FUNCTION KEY)

PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-57• FP-748 (CONNECTOR)

PRINTED WIRING BOARD ·······················4-57

Printed wiring board of the SY-096 board is notshown.Pages from 4-59 to 4-62 are not shown.

4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ·································4-63

Mounted parts location of the SY-096 board is notshown.Page 4-65 to 4-66 are not shown.

5. REPAIR PARTS LIST5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 5-35-1-1.OVERALL SECTION ·····················································5-35-1-2.STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ·························5-45-1-3.CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 ················5-55-1-4.CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2 ················5-6

— 5 —

DSC-F828

5-1-5.BTH BLOCK ASSEMBLY ·············································5-75-1-6.CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY ·····················5-85-1-7.EVF ASSEMBLY ····························································5-95-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ········································5-10

Parts list of the SY-096 board are not shown.Pages from 5-14 to 5-18 are not shown.

1-1

DSC-F828

SECTION 1SERVICE NOTE

1-1. NOTE FOR REPAIR

1 kΩ/1 W

Wrap insulating tape.

Make sure that the flat cable and flexible board are not cracked of bent at the terminal.Do not insert the cable insufficiently nor crookedly.

Cut and remove the part of gilt which comes off at the point.(Take care that there are some pieces of gilt left inside)

When remove a connector, don't pull at wire of connector.Be in danger of the snapping of a wire.

When installing a connector, don't press down at wire of connector.Be in danger of the snapping of a wire.

DD-204

DD-204 board

Short jig(1kΩ /1W)

1-2. DISCHARGING OF THE FLASH UNIT’S CHARGING CAPACITOR

The charging capacitor of the FLASH unit is charged up to the maximum 300 V potential.There is a danger of electric shock by this high voltage when the capacitor is handled by hand. The electric shock is caused by the chargedvoltage which is kept without discharging when the main power of the DSC-F828 is simply turned off. Therefore, the remaining voltagemust be discharged as described below.

1-2-1. Preparing the Short JigTo preparing the short jig. a small clip is attached to each end of aresistor of 1 kΩ /1 W (1-215-869-11)Wrap insulating tape fully around the leads of the resistor to preventelectrical shock.

1-2-2. Discharging the CapacitorShort circuits between the positive and the negative terminals ofcharged capacitor with the short jig about 10 seconds.

1-2E

DSC-F828

Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective flash unit.*1: The error display is given in two ways.

Display Code

C:32:01

C:13:01

E:91:01

E:61:00 *1

E:61:10 *1

Countermeasure

Turn off the main power then back on.

Replace the memory stick.Format the memory stick with the DSC-F828.

Checking of flash unit or replacement offlash unit.

Checking of lens drive circuit

Cause

Trouble with hardware.

• The type of memory stick that cannot beused by this machine, is inserted.

• Data is damaged.• Unformatted memory stick is inserted.

Abnormality when flash is beingcharged.

When failed in the focus initialization.

Caution Display During Error

SYSTEM ERROR

MEDIA ERROR

Flash LEDFlash displayFlashing at 3.2 Hz

—

Self-diagnosis display• C: ss: ss

The contents which can be handledby customer, are displayed.

• E: ss: ssThe contents which can be handledby engineer, are displayed.

1-4. DESCRIPTION ON SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY

1-3. NOTES ON HANDLING THE LASER DIODE [LASER UNIT]

The laser diode may suffer electrostatic breakdown because of thepotential difference generated by the charged electrostatic load, etc.on clothing and the human body.During repair, pay attention to electrostatic breakdown and also usethe procedure in the printed matter which is included in the repairparts.The flexible board is easily damaged and should be handled withcare.

Laser unit (D001)

Soldering Conditions of Laser UnitTemperature of Less than 350 °Cthe Soldering Iron

Time to Solder 3 seconds

Interval to Solder Next terminal is soldered after waitingfor 1 second

Note: Adjustment is needed when laser unit is replaced.Refer to “21. AF Laser Output Adjustment” (page6-29) and “22.AF Laser Axis Check” (page6-30) of SERVICE MANUAL, ADJ(987627951.pdf).

2-1

SECTION 2DISASSEMBLY

DSC-F828

The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.

HELPHELP

DD-204

PROCEDURE OF REMOVING THE SY-096 BOARD (SERVICE POSITION)

1 2-1. CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD ................................2 2-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ...........................................3 2-9. REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY ...........................................4 2-13. BTH SECTION ..............................................................................5 2-14. SY-096 BOARD .............................................................................6 2-15. DD-204 BOARD ............................................................................7 2-16. CF-097 BOARD ............................................................................8 2-18. MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR ..................................................9 2-20. DC-IN CONNECTOR,UA-003 BOARD .........................................q; 2-21. FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD ............................................qa 2-24. CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY .....................................................

(page 2-2)(page 2-3)(page 2-8)

(page 2-10)(page 2-11)(page 2-12)(page 2-12)(page 2-13)(page 2-14)(page 2-15)(page 2-17)

Discharging the Capacitor

DISASSEMBLY

DISASSEMBLY

DISASSEMBLY

HELP

DISASSEMBLY

HELP

DISASSEMBLY

HELP

DISASSEMBLY

HELP

DISASSEMBLY

HELP

DISASSEMBLY

HELP

DISASSEMBLY

HELP

DISASSEMBLY

HELP

DISASSEMBLY

HELP

SY-096 board service position

2-2

DSC-F828

NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.

2-1. CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD

6 FP-751 flexible board (6P)

5 Tape (A)

Tape (A)


FP-751 flexible board

Note: When installing, be careful not to pinch the extra length of flexible board because it can be easily pinched during installation.

1 Six screws (M2 × 4), lock ace

3 Three screws (M2 × 4), lock ace

7 SW-410 board

4 Cabinet (LR) assembly

Caution

2-3

DSC-F828

2-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY



7 AJ-006 flexible board (6P)


Adhesion side (Ferrite core)

q; Stroboscope block assembly9 harness (PT132)

harness (PT132)

8 Two screws (M2 × 4), lock ace

ST-088 board

ST-088 board

2 Peel the Radiation sheets (LR) from flexible boards.

Radiation sheet (LR)

3 Claw

1 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4)

Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4)

Dowel

Harness processing

Caution

Note: Be careful not to drop the ferrite core.

2-4

DSC-F828

2-3. ST SECTION

2 LS-067 board (6P)

5 ST section

3 SI-037 board (26P)4 MT-067 board (16P)


2-4. ST-088 BOARD, LENS SECTION

6 Two claws



3 ST-088 board

8 Lens section

4 Flexible board (Lens)(39P)

7 Harness guide

1 Screw (M1.7 × 3), lock ace

2-5

DSC-F828

2-5. ST CABINET ASSEMBLY

1 AS-050 flexible board (10P)


3 ST blind cover

4 Four tapping screws (M1.7 × 4)

6 ST section

5 ST cabinet assembly

2-6. MT-067 BOARD

3 STFPC cover

2 Claw

1 Three tapping screws (M1.7 × 4)

7 Stroboscope motor

9 MT-067 board

8 Three claws

6 Remove the two solderings.

Stroboscope motor

5 Screw (M1.7 × 2), grip

4 Screw (M1.7 × 2), grip

2-6

DSC-F828

2-7. SI-037 BOARD, FLASH UNIT


8 Claw

(A) Section

7 Open the ST unit holder section

(B)



5 ST cover

1

2

9 ST unit holder

qd SI-037 board

qa Remove soldering from the three points

qs Flash unit

ST unit holder

q; Two claws

SI-037 board

Remove the ST unit holder from the SI-037 board by disengagingthe claw while sliding the (A) section of the SI-037 board in the direction of the arrow (B).

2-7

DSC-F828

2-8. LS-067 BOARD, LASER UNIT

When soldering the laser unit on the LS-067 board,observe the following things.(Refer to Service Note (page 1-2)).Observe the following conditions of temperatureand time of soldering.Temperature of soldering iron : 350 °CTime of contacting the soldering : 3 secondsiron with the solderThe laser diode may suffer electrostatic breakdownbecause of the potential difference generated by thecharged electrostatic load, etc. on clothing and thehuman body.During repair, pay attention to electrostatic breakdownand also use the procedure in the printed matter whichis included in the repair parts.The flexible board is easily damaged and should behandled with care.


4 ST laser holder3 Two grooves

7 LS-067 board

2 Two dowels

Caution

5 Remove the three solderings

6 Laser unit (D001)

2-8

DSC-F828

2-9. REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY

8 Rear cabinet block assembly

6 LB-091 board (22P)

7 Control switch block (under) (50P)



The LB-091 board may be damaged if youremove the rear cabinet block assembly forcibly.Be very careful not to damage the flexible board.

5 Screw (M2 × 4), lock ace



Caution

2-10.EVF SECTION

3 Three claws

7 Two claws

6 LCD (LCX044AK-1) (18P)

9 Lamp guide (20)

1 Four tapping screws (M1.7 × 4)

8 LB-091 board

2 EVF section

q; LCD (LCX044AK-1)

4 Prism sheet

5 Illuminator

2-9

DSC-F828

2-11.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER)

1 Three screws (M1.7 × 3), lock ace

7 Control switch block (under)

5 Cabinet (rear) assembly

2 Control switch block (mid)(10p)

3 Block light guide plate (6P)

4 LCD module (24P)

6 Tape (A)

Caution

Tape (A)

Control switch block (under)

Caution

Install the control switch block (under) in thecabinet (rear) assembly so that the tip of the control switch block (under) go under the bottom of the control switch block (mid).

2-12.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID), LCD UNIT

1 Five screws (M1.7 × 3), lock ace

7 Two screws (M1.7 × 3), lock ace

2 Open the CF lid8 CF lid assembly

3 Control switch block (mid)

5 Block light guide plate

Block light guide plate

6 LCD unit

4 Tape (A)

Caution

Tape (A)

2-10

DSC-F828

6 Harness (microphone)

7 Harness (speaker)

qs BTH section

q; Harness (PT-132)




8 UA-003 board (12P) qa Connector (3P)

4 Control switch block (top) (12P)


5 LCD module (26P)

Note: When installing, be careful not to pinch the flexible board or harness during installation.

Caution

Use the groove on side when installing it.

2-13.BTH SECTION

2-11

DSC-F828

2-14.SY-096 BOARD


3 FP-748 board (60P)



6 SY-096 board

5 Cushion (SY)

Caution

SY-096 board Cushion (SY)

2-12

DSC-F828

DD-204

2 Two screws (M1.7 × 3) lock ace

3 LR-018 board (6P)

9 DD-204 board

6 FP-748 board

4 Two claws

DD-204 board

1 Fuse replacement caution label

Fuse replacement caution label

5 Battery terminal board (3P)

7 Remove soldering from two point

8 Capacitor

CautionNote: The power supply capacitor of the flash unit is charged to the high tensionvoltage as high as 300 V at a maximum. You will get electrical shock whenyou touch the terminal of the charged capacitor . The charged potentialremains even after the main power of the machine is turned off. Dischargethe remaining power in the capacitor referring to Service Note(See page 1-1). High-voltage cautions. Short jig (R: 1k Ω /1W)

Caution

2-15.DD-204 BOARD

2-16.CF-097 BOARD

1 Four screws (M1.7 × 3) lock ace

2 SY retainer

6 CF-097 board



Tape (A)

Ferrite bead

Caution4 Tape (A)

5 Ferrite bead

2-13

DSC-F828

2-17.LR-018 BOARD, LITHIUM BATTERY


5 Memory stick connector

2 Hook


3 Sheet (MS)

Memory stick connector

Caution

Sheet (MS)

2-18.MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR

3 LR-018 board

4 Remove soldering from the two points.

5 Lithium battery1 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4)

2 Two claws

2-14

DSC-F828

2-19.AJ-007 BOARD

4 Three Claws

5 UA-003 board

UA-003 board

6 Jack ground plate

7 Jack holder assembly

Jack holder assembly

3 Two tapping screws (M1.7 × 4)


2 DC-IN connector

DC-IN connector

Harness processing

Hook

2 AJ-006 flexible board (6P) 3 AJ-007 board

1 Screws (M1.7 × 3), lock ace

2-20.DC-IN CONNECTOR, UA-003 BOARD

2-15

DSC-F828


3 Screw (M1.7 × 3), lock ace

9 Tape (A)

q; Tape (A)

1 Ferrite core

Tape (A)

Tape (A) qs Two claws

qf Adhesive tape

qd Flexible guide (L)

qj FP-747 flexible board



qh FP-746 flexible board

qg FP-754 flexible board


Caution

Caution

Harness processing

8 harness (PT132)

2 harness (PT132)

4 Flexible guide (R)

5 Radiation sheet (LR)

harness (PT132)

qa Ferrite core

7

Harness (PT-132)

Harness processing

Flexible guide (R)

2-21.FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD

2-16

DSC-F828

1 Rotate the Hinge/Cabinet (LL) Assembly up to the position where screw becomes visible.

4

3

2 Two screws(2 × 4), lock ace

Hinge /Cabinet (LL) Assembly Remove it while rotating the Hinge/Cabinet (LL) Assembly.

4 Microphone gom

5 Microphone

Microphone holder

3 Microphone grille

7 Claw

1 Three screws (M1.7 × 3), lock ace2 Speaker /Microphone

section


8 Speaker retainer plate

9 Speaker

Speaker

Harness processing

Microphone

2-22.HINGE/CABINET (LL) ASSEMBLY

2-23.SPEAKER/MICROPHONE SECTION

2-17

DSC-F828

Control switch block (top)

When installing it, align the switch positionas shown.

Caution

5 Control switch block (top), LCD module section

3 Cabinet upper section

7 Cabinet upper assembly

6 MD cushion


2 Notch4 Three tapping screws (M1.7 × 4)

2-24.CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY

2-18

DSC-F828

[SERVICE POSITION (SY-096 BOARD) ]

Caution

Note: High-voltage cautions.

AC INAC poweradaptor

FP-749 flexible board (10P)

ST-088 board

CD-469 board


DC-IN

DC-IN connector

Control switch block (top) (12P)

Control switch block (under) (50P)

Extension cable






CN703CN707

CN751

CN702

CN701CN711

CN601

CN001

CN001

CN103

CN404

CN401

CN402

CN401

CN709 CN451

CN706

harness (2P) (PT-132)

SW-410 board

SY-096 board

UA-003 board

DD-204 board

CN502

PROCEDURE OF REMOVING THE SY-096 BOARD (SERVICE POSITION)

1 2-1. CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD ................................2 2-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ...........................................3 2-9. REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY ...........................................4 2-13. BTH SECTION ..............................................................................5 2-14. SY-096 BOARD .............................................................................6 2-15. DD-204 BOARD ............................................................................7 2-16. CF-097 BOARD ............................................................................8 2-18. MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR ..................................................9 2-20. DC-IN CONNECTOR,UA-003 BOARD .........................................q; 2-21. FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD ............................................qa 2-24. CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY .....................................................

(page 2-2)(page 2-3)(page 2-8)

(page 2-10)(page 2-11)(page 2-12)(page 2-12)(page 2-13)(page 2-14)(page 2-15)(page 2-17)

2-19

DSC-F828

2-25.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)

4 Control switch block (top)


1 Tape (A)

2 Two claws

Tape (A)

3 LCD panel

Caution

2-20

DSC-F828

Board Name Function

SY-096

DD-204

CF-097

SW-410

UA-003

AJ-007

ST-088

CAMERA DSP, CAMERA SYSTEM CONTROL, CF DRIVE I/F, USB I/F, MODE CONTROL,AUDIO AMP, LCD DRIVER, EVF, LCD DRIVER, CONNECTOR, POWER SUPPLY

AV, USB JACK

FUNCTION KEY

JACK

FLASH CONTROL

CF CARD CONNECTOR

DC/DC CONVERTER

SY-096

DD-204

CF-097

SW-410

UA-003

AJ-007

ST-088

2-26.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

2-21E

DSC-F828

2-27.CIRCUIT BOARDS AND FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION

Board Name Function

SI-037

LS-067

MT-067

LB-091

FP-748

AF LASER

EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT

CONNECTOR

LR-018 BATTERY, RESET SW

FLASH, IR LED

FLASH MOTOR

FP-749(flexible)

AJ-006(flexible)

SI-037

FP-746(flexible)

FP-754(flexible)

LB-091

LS-067

FP-756(flexible)


FP-747(flexible)

FP-750(flexible)

MT-067

Control switch block (mid)

FP-751(flexible)


FP-748

LR-018

DSC-F828

HELP

HELPSheet attachment positions and procedures of processing the flexible boards/harnesses are shown.

2003. 12. 8 Update

FRONT CABINET SECTION

STROBOSCOPE SECTIONCABINET (LR) SECTION


Tape (A)

SW-410 board

Tape (A)


Tape (A)

Tape (A) FP-747 flexible board

AJ-007 board




FP-747 flexible board Radiation sheet (LR)

Radiation sheet (LL)

Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4)

REAR CABINET SECTION

Tape (A)


Block light guide plate

Tape (A)

DSC-F828

HELP

BTH SECTION

CF radiation sheet (B) CF radiation sheet (A)

BT holder assembly (front side) BT holder assembly (rear side)


Tape (A)

Ferrite bead

SY-096 board

Cushion (SY)


Sheet (MS)

DD-204 board

Fuse replacement caution label

DSC-F828

LinkLink

3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)

OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)

OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)





DSC-F828

3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)

3-1 3-2

SECTION 3BLOCK DIAGRAMS

( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.

AUDIO SIGNALVIDEO SIGNALVIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL

IC301CAMERA

DSP

(1/10)

BUFFER

IC304FC RINGFG AMP

(1/10)

A/D CONV.

EEPROM

IC302SRRAM512Mbit

(1/10)

TIMINGGENERATOR

S/H,AGCCCD IMAGER

342

IC251USB2.0

I/F

(4/10)

IC601AUDIOAMP

(6/10)

IC452MICRODRIVE

I/F

(3/10)

AC16

C1B1

64

F9E9

F5F6

E2F2

E1F1

A815

Y18

T23

AA7 D8

A10

B8 J1

J8J5

E7E6

HJ J2J4 G5 J3F1 C9 B9

AC20

AC12

AC19

D9

A2,B1,J2,(C,D,E,F,G) (1,3)

(AA,AB,Y)(13-17)

185

417

21 1

3 19

1 21

MCK TG

CCDINPCCDINM

CLP OB

MCK

TG

SHD,

SHP

CAM

HD

CAM

F

XCAM

RST

ADCL

K

H1A,B,CH2A,B,C

V1A,B,CV2V3A,B,CV4V5A,B,CV6RG

V OUT

ADCLK

TGCLK

D1XCAM RST

CAM HDCAM F

XCAM RSTHR EN3HR DIR3AHR DIR3B

HR EN2HR DIR2AHR DIR2B

IR FILTEREN ENIR FILTEREN DIR

IRIS RESET SENS AD

XFC RST SENS

XIR RST SENS

ZOOM POS OUT


MC D0-D15 MC D0-D15 CF D0-D15

CF A0-A10

CF RESETMC CKI0

XSYS RST

MC D0-D15

HR DQ00

HR DQ31


MSHUT ENMSHUT DIR

MSHUT EN

MSHUT DIR

SHDSHP

Y17AB18

AC15AE14

H8-H6,H4G5,G3

C3-C7B4-B8,A7

28,27,2320,19

12-1317

2122

3130

E7D7

IRIS DRIVE

FOCUS MOTORDRIVE

FOCUSMOTOR

SHUTTERDRIVE

CN702

CN712

CN713

CN701

CN701

CN702

CN702

CN701

CN711

SHUTTERMOTOR

IRISMOTOR

IRISSHUTER

IR FILTERDRIVE

G1G2H2G3

343335

181917

G4H4G5H6

C8C7B8B7

A6B5A4B4

13

C1D2

B3A2

F7

41

F8

IRIS RESETSENSOR

FOCUS RESETSENSOR

IR FILTERSENSOR

IRIS AIRIS AIRIS BIRIS B

FOCUS AFOCUS AFOCUS BFOCUS B

SHUTTER +SHUTTER -

IR +IR -

FC RING FG AFC RING FG B

ZOOM RINGPOSITIONSENSOR

FOCUSRING

FG

IC303VIDEO AMP

(1/10)

42

M

M

M

MIR FILTERMOTOR

N21

L21

P21

M21

H20

N20

AA5

U21

A8K1

54

M2D14

IR FILTEREN ENIR FILTEREN DIR W21

Y21XFC RST SENSXIR RST SENS F21

Y21

H21

U20

TOOVER ALLBLOCK DIAGRAM(2/3)

(PAGE 3-3)

1

AA4

BUFFER

MOD

E23

C23

D23

HOT STRB ON

AB3EXT STRB ON

AB4STRB ON

U20

F23

T20

IR LED ON

PANEL RPANEL GPANEL B

HDOPANEL V

V OUT

XSYS RST

C18

D17

Q302-Q304

Q601

CX25112MHz

(AA,AB,AC,U,V,W,Y)(1-4)

(H,J,K,L,M)(8-10)

(A-F)(1-4)

(A-G)(1-4),(A-D)

(13-17)

A4,(B,C,D),

(4-8)

(A-E,L-M,P,R)(1-3,7-9)

(F-J)(1-3,7-9)

CAM AD0

CAM AD13

CLP OB

MCK TG

TG CLK

CA HDCA F

HR AQ00

HR AQ12

HR QCLK

AU A OUTAU A IN

AU LRCK

MC CKIO

E26

C7

D24

H25

C7

A2D5

AE12AD11AE17AD13

AD18

AC14

AE13

XSYS RST

XACCESS LED

XCF COVER OPEN

XMINL LCD BL ON

XAE LOCK ON

XSHTR ONSTRB CHG

XSTRB FULL

EXT STRB CONTSTRB POP UP CNTSENS

XPROGRAM DIAL AXPROGRAM DIAL B

G26XCAM RSTIRIS RESET SENS AD

(J,K,L,M,N,P,R,T,U)(1-4)

B9,D12,(E,F,G)(1-3),H11

C11

B17

B16

C17

A16

D15

A7A16

B6

(H,J,K,L,M,N)(23-26)

(AA,AB,AC,T,U,W,Y)(1-4)

M7

IC501CAMERASYSTEM

CONTROL

(2/10)

E4ZOOM POS OUT

E4

3029

2223

12

A17

D16

B15

8 12 79

44 40 4543

C19

C22

B20

B21

D21

SYS SO,SI,SCK

PHY DATA0-DATA15 USBPHY D+,D-

PRELAMP AF ON

PRELAMP AF CONTPD LVSELF TIMER LED

AC3

N1 PHY CLKOUTPHY RESET

XSTRB POP UP

AD12AF14

STRB POP UP DC ENSTRB POP UP DC DIRSTRB POP UP DC BRAKE

5029

55 11

1228

E1

B9

MELODYBEEP

H4AU A INAU A OUT

A OUT

MIC INSP+SP-

MIC IN

SP+SP-

H5

MELODY EW

FR SO,SI,SCK

MS SDIO/DATA0-3,MS BS, MS SCLK

A11

X50127MHz

AC9

A2D1

SP901SPEAKER

1MICMIC901

A/V OUT (MONO)J001

B4

1110

5

5

4114049

13192137

20

4841123

39333115

32

93


(PAGE 3-6)

2


(PAGE 3-3)

3

2013

2421

13

58

3936

10

32

34

27

LENS UNIT (1/3) SY-096 BOARD (1/3)

FP-754FLEXIBLE

FP-746FLEXIBLE(1/6)

FP-746FLEXIBLE(2/6)

FP-747FLEXIBLE(1/6)

FP-747 FLEXIBLE(2/6)

FP-746FLEXIBLE(3/6)

FP-747FLEXIBLE(3/6)

CF-097 BOARD

FP-749FLEXIBLE

UA-003 BOARD

28 24

373638

151614

2940

1312

41 11

43 9

45 7

42 10

46 6 (USB)

CN707

CN706

CN451

4114049

13192137

20

CN101

4841123

39333115

32

FP-756FLEXIBLE

CN001

CAM

SO,

SCK

CAM SO,S1,SCKCAM SO,SCK

CAM SO,SI,SCK

MC A1-A25 MC A0-A10,A24MC A0-A25

(AA,AB,N,P,R,T-W,Y)(23-26)

(F,G,HJ,K,L)(1-3)

MEMORYSTICK

CONNECTOR

COMPACT FLASHMICRO DRIVE

CN103

DSC-F828


3-3 3-4

3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.

VIDEO SIGNAL

STROBPOPUPMOTORDRIVE

E1E2

IC801RGB DRVE

TIMINGGENERATOR

(LCD)

(7/10)

IC701(9/10)

IC702(9/10)

IC703 (9/10)

AF LDDRIVE


(PAGE 3-5)

4


(PAGE 3-2)

3


(PAGE 3-1)

1

42

42

CAM -7.5V

B2A1F2

403938

474846

4342

192021

4

2

25

5

1

LED DRIVE

Q501

LED DRIVE

FLASHDRIVE

TRIGGERTRANSFORMER

L001XE-H

XE-L

IC502

D504

FLASHDRIVE

Q901-903BACK LIGHT

DRIVE

ACC(Accessory)

J201

ACC STRB ON

LD OUT

PD OUT

SELF TIMER LED

BL UNREG

LANC SIG

STRB POPUP+STRB POPUP-

S001MOTOR POSITION

DETECT

M910FLASHMOTOR

S001FLASH

OPEN DETECT

DC 300V

HOT

EXT STRB ON CN

LANC SIGCN201

CN702

CN702

CN702

CN002CN703

CN901

CN701

CN701

CN501

CN001

CN004

CN001

CN503

CN001

CN504

CN505

CN502

M

XENONTUBE

D001Infrared ray emitter

D004Self-timer

D001AF LASER UNIT

42

32166

35

2

IC802BL

REG

(7/10)

3128

IC902RGB DRVE

TIMINGGENERATOR

(EVF)

(8/10)403938

474846

4342

192021

23

1628

VRVGVB

RGB

VCOM

COM

HCNT,MVLK,OE,GRES,STBYB,SRT,GSRT,GPCK,CP

BL H BLREG

STRB ON

EXT STRB ON

HOT STRB ON

STRB POPUO DC ENSTRB POPUO DC DIRSTRB POPUO DC BRAKE


HDOPANEL V

HDOPANEL V


PCGVSTVCKSTBENDWNHSTHCK2,HCK1

BL ONBL LEVEL

DC1EXTDA

3115

35

1442

11912

39

8

414340

13

44

29 23

26

27

25

30

31

15

26

25

27

22

21

37

26 26

28

29

24

23

1

292125

17139

2457

20222630

2

302226

181410236819212529

17

151614

21

312

2

6

2

6

14

16

19

12

11

10

5

15

14

6

8

2219

7

4

11

12

13

18

8

9

17

15

1

1

435

167

2

1314

69

2326

2

1

6

3

4

14

89

16

11

5

SYS SO,SI,SCK

SYS SO,SI,SCK

SYS SO,SI,SCK

EXT STRB CONT

STRB POPUP CNTSENS

PANELAMP AF ON

PANELAMP AF CONT

PD LV

SELF TIMER LED

XSTRB POPUP

STRB POPUP DC ENSTRB POPUP DC DIRSTRB POPUP DC BRAKE


HDOPANEL V

HOT STRB ON

EXT STRB ON

STRB ON

IR LED ON

LANC SIG

76

4

10

ACCESSORYSHOE

2.5INCHLCDUNIT

BACK LIGHT

ND901

D001BACK LIGHT

LCD901

COLOREVF

UNIT

LCD902

SY-096 BOARD (2/3) LENS UNIT (2/3)

FP-747FLEXIBLE(4/6)

FP-750FLEXIBLE

AJ-006FLEXIBLE

FP-747FLEXIBLE(5/6)



FP-747FLEXIBLE(6/6)

CONTROL SWITCHBLOCK(UNDER) (1/2)

LB-091 BOARD

AJ-007 BOARD

AS-050FLEXIBLE

LS-067BOARD

SI-037 BOARD

MT-067BOARD

ST-088BOARD

TOOVER ALLBLOCK DIAGRAM(3/3)(DD-204)

(PAGE 3-5)

5

73

2124

1

1089

Q502-504

DSC-F828


3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)

3-5 3-6


IC001

IC004

DC/DCCONVERTER

IC401HI CONTROL

(5/10)

SY-096 BOARD (3/3)SW-410 BOARD

DD-204 BOARD

LR-018BOARD

LENS UNIT(3/3)

FP-751FLEXIBLE

FP-746FLEXIBLE(6/6)

FP-748FLEXIBLE

CONTROL SWITCHBLOCK(TOP)

CONTROL SWITCHBLOCK(MID)

CONTROL SWITCHBLOCK(UNDER)

J8J9

J7H7

COMO-COM3,SEG1-SEG20

DDCON SO,SCK

FR SO,SI,SCK

VL 3V

RST VIN

IC201LCD

DRIVE

(8/10)

125

1237

CHARACTERDISPLAY

UNIT

LCD903

RESET

MENU,AE LOCK

3VREG

OPEN(FLASH),FLASH,METERING MODE,MACRO,BURST/BRACKET,FOCUS,

NIGHT SHOT/NIGHT FLAMING

S001-007

FINDER/LCD,SCREEN STATUS,SELF TIMER/INDEX,

DIGITAL ZOOM,QUICK REVIEW,MEMORY STICK/CF CARD

98

2425

2827

23

23

J4

J5

X40132.768KHz

D75

8

3

J6

76

A5H4

IC402(5/10)

F1A7H2E8

F2F3

EVER 3.0V

KEY AD3KEY AD4

KEY AD3KEY AD4

32KHz IN

32KHz OUT

BACK UP VCC

XRSTX

BATT SIGBATT/XEXTFAST CHARGESYS DD ON

LANC SOLANC SI

B1

H6

B2

WHITE BALANCE,EXPOSURE,

DISPLAY WINDOW BACKLIGHT

G6

MULTI-SELECTOR

POWERB8

SHUTTER

MODEDIAL

KEY AD 0

KEY AD 1

XCHARGE/XSTRB LED

MODE DIAL 0MODE DIAL 1

XPOWER LED ON

B3XSYS RST

KEY AD 2

XPWR ON

LED DRIVE

LED DRIVE

Q704

Q701

XACCESS LED

XSYS RST

XACCESS LED

XAE LOCK ON

XPWR ON

MODE DIAL 0MODE DIAL 1

X MINI LCD BL ON MINI LCD BACK LIGHT

POWER

KEY AD0 L2

KEY AD0 L5KEY AD2

KEY AD1

KEY AD0 GUI DOWN

ACCESS

FLASH

CF COVER OPEN

GUI UP


XCF COVER OPEN

XCHARGE/XSTRB LED

XMINI LCDBL ON

XACCESS LED

XCF COVER OPEN

XMINI LCD BL ON

XAE LOCK ONXSHTR ONSTRB CHG

XSTRB FULL


3937

49

45

43

41

91

35

17

4038

50

46

44

42

102

36

18

10

3

56

2

98

12

D2D1E1

FR SOFR SI

XFR SCK

S001RESET

BT001LITHIUM BATTERY

(SECONDARY)

Q001,002

50

4851

38

2728

HI VOLTAGECHARGER

Q401,402,407

LANCI/O

3335

3335

1513

252729

37

9

117

231917

1513

252729

37

9

117

231917

1

STRB CHG

SYS DD ON

DD 1.8VDD P5VDD 2.95VDD 4.7VDD 3.3VDD 4.2VDD 15VDD -7.5V

ACV UNREGBL UNREG

LANC SIG LANC SIG

LANC SI

LANC SO

RST VIN

BATT UNREG

FAST CHARGE

BATT/XEXTBATT SIG

VL 3VXRST SW

XSTRB FULL

STRB UNREG

53

DC INJ901

BT901BATTERY

TERMINALS D001

1

1

3

2

23

DDCON SO,SCKC1D3

DDCON SODDCON SCK

78

1

3

4

5

9


(PAGE 3-2)

2TOOVER ALLBLOCK DIAGRAM(2/3)

(PAGE 3-3)

4

TOOVER ALLBLOCK DIAGRAM(2/3)(ST-088)

(PAGE 3-4)

5

CN001

CN601

CN401

C405(FLASH)

DC300V

CN751CN602

CN002

CN001

CN701

CN703

CN003D001

S002,S012

CN709

CN002D001

S001-006

S003-005

D006

S002

S001

D001

CN201

COMMANDDIAL

DSC-F828


3-7 3-8

3-4. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.

IC001DC/DC CONVERTER

LANC I/O

IC401HI CONTROL

(5/10)

DD-204 BOARD

SY-096 BOARD (1/3)

SY-096 BOARD (2/3)

LR-018 BOARD

FP-748 BOARD(1/2)

FP-748BOARD(2/2)

CONTROLSWITCHBLOCK(TOP)

IC004-7.5VREG

IC7511.2V REG

,Q751

13.5V REG

Q752

BATT UNREG

AV UNREG

BATT/XEXT

BATT SIG

TOPOWERBLOCK DIAGRAM(2/2)

(PAGE 3-9)

2

TOPOWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)

(PAGE 3-10)1

DC INJ901

BT901BATTERY

TERMINALS

1

1

3

2

23

CN002

CN601

CN751 CN002 CN001 CN601

CN001

CN002

CN709

S002

D001

CN751

CN002

CN001

CN601

CN602

CN751

CN001 F002LF001

F003

F006

F004

F001

Q003,004Q001,002

F005

CHARGESWITCH

5.6VREGQ006 LANC

I/O

L002Q007

SWITCHING

57OUT1

37VREF

30RT

20IN1L003

Q008SWITCHING

58OUT2

21IN2L004 L759

L760

L761

L751

L756

L763

L753

Q009SWITCHING

59OUT3

22IN3L005

Q010SWITCHING

60OUT4

23IN4

L006

L011Q011

SWITCHING

61OUT5

24IN5L007

L001

Q012SWITCHING

DD -7.5V

LANC DC

DD 15.5V

DD 4.2V

MD 3.3V

DD 4.7V

DD 2.95V

DD P 5V

DD 1.8V

STRB CHGXSTRB FULL

BL UNREG

CN401

CN601 CN001 CN002 CN751

Q015SWITCHING

D010RECT

D011RECT

62OUT6

25IN6

63OUT7

2

2 1

IC7523.3VREG

(10/10)

5

-INE7

56 VCC

43 VIN

47

54

52

DDCON SO,SCK,XCS272826

DINCLKLD

38 CTL1

29 RST

XCTL 2

V CONT

LANC DC

A1

C1D3H1

DDCON SCKDDCON SCK

XCS DD CON

38CTL1

H8 BATT SENS

BACK UP VCC

XLANC IC ON

37

4543

3

191721

23

37

4543

3

191721

23

37

4543

3

191721

23

37

4543

3

191721

23

27 25 29 3127 25 29 31

27 25 29 3127 25 29 31

G8 ACV SENS

F1 BATT SIGA7 BATT/XEXTJ4 INIT CHARGEH2 FAST CHARGE

RESET

POWER

POWER

RESETS001

3VREG

5 D7

8

3

7

6

2

BATTER INDETECT 4 A9

IC402(5/10)

EVER 3.0V

D404VCH

A5H4

XRSTX

BATT IN

B8 XPER ONF8 DDCON SENS

EVER 3.0V

VL 3V XRST SW

49

3638404244

46485052

54565860

555759

41

1315

51

5

53

47

49

3638404244

46485052

54565860

555759

41

1315

51

5

53

47

49

3638404244

46485052

54565860

555759

41

1315

51

5

53

47

49

3638404244

46485052

54565860

555759

41

1315

51

5

53

47

35 39 3335 39 33

35 39 3335 39 33

3 5


(SECONDARY)

RST VIN

D001

BATT UNREG

STRB UNREG

MD 3.3V

STRB CHGXSTRB FULL

BL UNREG

PANEL 13.5VPANEL 2.95V

PANEL 4.7VEVER 3.0V

EVER

3.0

V

CAM P 5VD 2.95V

A 2.95VCAM 3.3V

TG 4.2V

CAM -7.5V

LANC DC

D 1.8VD 1.2V

D 1.2V

BATT UNREG

5V UNREG

BL UNREG

ACV UNREG

UNREG3

ACV UNREG

HIGHT VOLTAGECHARGER

Q401,402,407,T401

1

C405

DC 300V

CAM 15V

13

IC75315.1VREG

(10/10)

12

L757

(10/10)

L754

CAM P 5V

D 2.95V

A 2.95V

CAM 3.3V

PANEL 4.7V

PANEL 2.95V

TG 4.2V

MD 3.3V

D 1.8V

D 1.2V

CAM 15V

PANEL 13.5V

CAM -7.5V

3

1

DSC-F828


3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)

3-9 3-10E


IC802BL REG

(7/10)

FP-749FLEXIBLE

FP-746FLEXIBLE(1/2)

FP-750FLEXIBLE

AJ-006FLEXIBLE

FP-746FLEXIBLE(2/2)

FP-747FLEXIBLE

FP-756FLEXIBLE

SY-096 BOARD (3/3)

CF-097BOARD

LB-091BOARD

TOPOWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)(DD-204)

(PAGE 3-8)

1

59 3

IC452MICRODRIVE

I/F

(3/10)

K6

L452 Q451CN451

CN901 CN001

CN101 CN706

CN703 CN001

CN004

ND901

CN003 D001

CN002

CN701

CN702

CN201

CN701

CN505CN502CN501

VCC

L806L805

L803 Q801,802

Q703

D805(RECT)

EVER 3.0V

R701

Q7022528

2724

COMPACT FLASH/MICRO DRIVE

CN103

IC902RGB DRIVE

TIMINGGENERATOR

(8/10)

VDD

L902

IC501CAMERASYSTEM

CONTROL

(2/10)

E25

AE17AD13AC18

AE19

L581AVDD PLL 1.2V

D 1.2VD 1.8VA 2.95V

CAM 15V

EVER 3.0V

PANEL 2.95V

CAM P 5VD 2.95V

CAM 3.3V

TG 4.2VCAM -7.5VLANC DC

L582AVDD AD 2.95V

L583AVDD DA 2.95V

L584

L602

AVRT DA 2.95V

XMF SENS LED

XIR SENS LED

XIRIS RST LEDXFC RST LED

STRB CHGXSTRB FULL

MS PWR ONBL MODE

CAM DD ON

TG 4.2V

CAM 3.3V

A 2.95V

LANC DC

CAM DD ONXIR SENS LED

XIRIS RST LEDXFC RST LED

CAM -7.5V

CAM 15V

XMF SENS LED

D 2.95V F SENS VCC

MF VCC

XMF SENS LED

XFC RST LED

CAM P 5V

BL L IN2-

BL H BL REG

BL THH

VDC (15V)

VGH (15V)

VDD (3V)

VSH (5V)

BL UNREG

BL MODE

BL ONBL LEVEL

XCSSAVE2

PANEL 13.5V

CAM 15V

PANEL 2.95V

PANEL 4.7V

MS PWR ON

D 2.95V VCC

AU 2.95V

IC301CAMERA

DSP

(1/10)

W20

T22

V22

U22

IC601AUDIOAMP

(6/10)

IC304FC RINGFG AMP

(1/10)

IC451OR

GATE

(3/10)

IC303VIDEOAMP

(1/10)

IRIS/SHUTTER/

FOCUS/IR FILTER

DRIVE

EEPROM

AF LDDRIVE

A/DCONV.

S/HAGC

CCDIMAGER

BUFFER

IC251USB 2.0

I/F

(4/10)

IC302SDRAM512Mbit

(1/10)

IC201LCD

DRIVE

(8/10)

IC701IC702IC703

BUFFER

(9/10)

3433

3635

4543

3132

8

4239

3837

1733181921

1819

1617

79

3519343331

2120

44

1013

1415

FB301

FB901

IRIS SENS VCC

XIRIS RST LED

IR SENS VCC

3.45V

XIR SENS LED

CAM DD ON

ZOOM POSI VCC

XE H

3.45VREG3 5

ZOOM RINGPOSITIONSENSOR

FLASHDRIVE

Q502-504

R509,510

FLASH

Infrared rayemitter

D001

MEMORYSTICK

CONNECTOR

FOCUSRING

FG

FOCUSRESET

SENSOR

IRISRESET

SENSOR

IR FILTERRESET

SENSOR

XENONTUBE

IC801RGB

DRIVETIMING

GENERATOR

(7/10)

3128

24

16

L804

THERMISTOR

BACK LIGHT

PANEL 4.7V

BL UNREG

PANEL 4.7V EVF LED A

CF POWER ON

PANEL 2.95V

PANEL 13.5V

D 2.95V

MD 3.3V

PANEL 13.5V

STRB CHG

XSTRB FULL

1

19

18

D001BACK LIGHT

2.5INCHLCDUNIT

LCD901

COLOREVFUNIT

LCD902

2

48

4935

28

34

30

4745

33

47

5036

31

27

33

4846

34

1918

111220

2

3

6

1

17

18

6

5

2

69

1

31

2

35

1112

2829

TIMINGGENER

TOPOWERBLOCK DIAGRAM(1/2)

(PAGE 3-8)

2

ACC(Accessory)

J2014 4

CONTROLSWITCHBLOCK(UNDER)

CONTROL SWITCHBLOCK (MID)

ST-088 BOARDSI-037BOARD

AJ-007BOARD

LENS UNIT

2528

2724

DSC-F828

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

4-1 4-2

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/4)

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/4)

SECTION 4PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

6P

1

2

3

4

5

6

6P

1

2

3

4

5

6

2PCN502

1REG_GND

2DC_300V

10PCN001

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

6PCN201

1

2

3

4

5

6

6PCN001

1

2

3

4

5

6

22PCN501

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

16PCN503

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

6PCN504

1

2

3

4

5

6

26PCN505

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

22P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

1

A

REG_GND

KEY_AD4

KEY_AD3

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

D001Infrared ray emitter

ST-088 BOARD

XASHOE_JACK_IN

SHOE_GND

N.C.

N.C.

HOT

HOT

REG_GND

LANC_SIG

SHOE_GND

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

D001AF LASER UNIT

LANC_GND

LANC_GND

ACC_STRB_ON

XLANC_JACK_IN

LANC_SIG

LANC_DC

AJ-007 BOARD

SW-410BOARD

KEY_AD3

N.C.

REG_GND

N.C.

KEY_AD4

N.C.

LD_OUT

PD_OUT

REG_GND

STRB_POPUP+

HOT_STRB_ON

STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS

REG_GND

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

LANC_SIG

STRB_POPUP-

STRB_ON

XASHOE_JACK_IN

STRB_POPUP+

XSTRB_POPUP

REG_GND

SELF_TIMER_LED

IR_LED_ON

STRB_POPUP-

REG_GND

CAM_P_5V

REG_GND

XA

SH

OE_

JAC

K_I

N

STR

B_P

OP

UP

-

LAN

C_S

IG

REG

_GN

D

STR

B_P

OP

UP

_CN

TSEN

S

STR

B_P

OP

UP

+

N.C

.

EXT_

STR

B_O

N_C

N

REG

_GN

D

SH

OE_

GN

D

HO

T

STR

B_P

OP

UP

+

SH

OE_

GN

D

N.C

.

STR

B_P

OP

UP

-

HO

T

LD_OUT

REG_GND

REG_GND

SELF_TIMER_LED

PD_OUT

XSTRB_POPUP

N.C.

IR_LED_K

XE_H

REG_GND

N.C.

TRIGGER

REG_GND

N.C.

XE_L

XE_H

XE_H

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

XE_L

XE_L

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

XE_L

N.C.

XE_H

IR_LED_A

N.C.

TRIGGER

LENS UNIT(1/2)(CD-469 BOARD)

ACC_STRB_ON

XLANC_JACK_IN

LANC_SIG

LANC_DC

LANC_GND

LANC_GND

D_2.95V

STRB_POPUP+

HOT_STRB_ON

STRB_ON

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

LD_OUT

LANC_SIG

D_2.95V

XSTRB_POPUP

PD_OUT

REG_GND

STRB_POPUP+

REG_GND

STRB_POPUP-

SELF_TIMER_LED

IR_LED_ON

REG_GND

STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS

REG_GND

REG_GND

CAM_P_5V

STRB_POPUP-

XASHOE_JACK_IN

FP-751FLEXIBLE

AJ-006FLEXIBLE

AS-050FLEXIBLE

MT-067 BOARD

M910FLASH MOTOR

M

S001MOTOR POSITION

DETECT

ACCESSORY SHOE

LS-067 BOARD

D004(Self-timer)S001

FLASH OPENDETECT

SI-037 BOARD

XENON TUBE

FP-750 FLEXIBLE

ACC(Accessory)

J201

TODD-204 BOARDCN401

TOLENS UNIT(2/2)

16

8 10 137

D

4 63

E

C

F

11

B

129

J

2 5

G

H

I

1

( )

(PAGE 4-7)

2

(PAGE 4-3)

Note:Since a servce is not for the singleCD-469 Board.Because adjustment is needed.

DSC-F828


4-3 4-4



51P

123456789101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051

51P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

21P

123456789101112131415161718192021

39P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

1

A

LENS

IR_F

ILTE

R_I

N

D_2

.95V

KEY

_AD

3

VS

UB

_CO

NT

CA

M_1

5V

REG

_GN

D

CA

M_P

_5V

IR_F

ILTE

R_E

N

REG

_GN

D

HR

_DIR

3B

TG_3

.45V

REG

_GN

D

XIR

_RS

T_S

ENS

CA

_HD

XS

TRB

_PO

PU

P

ZOO

M_P

OS

_OU

T

HR

_DIR

2B

CA

M_-

7.5V

TG_3

.45V

CA

M_P

_5V

PB

LK

HR

_EN

3

REG

_GN

D

CA

M_3

.3V

CA

_F

A_2

.95V

XA

SH

OE_

JAC

K_I

N

REG

_GN

D

XFC

_RS

T_S

ENS

A_2

.95V

XM

F_S

ENS

_LED

REG

_GN

D

HR

_EN

2

REG

_GN

D

REG

_GN

D

REG

_GN

D

HR

_DIR

3A

D_2

.95V

KEY

_AD

4

CA

M_3

.3V

MS

HU

T_D

IR

CA

M_P

_5V

LAN

C_S

IG

REG

_GN

D

HR

_DIR

2A

CA

M_P

_5V

TG_3

.45V

IRIS

_SEN

S_A

D

REG

_GN

D

REG

_GN

D

REG

_GN

D

PD_LV

CAM_SO

REG_GND

REG_GND

XCAM_DR_PS

REG_GND

XLENS_EEP_WE

REG_GND

EXT_STRB_CONT

XFE_CS

PRELAMP_AF_CONT

EXT_STRB_ON

XHSHOE_CONT

REG_GND

STRB_POPUP_DC_DIR

XIRIS_RST_LED

REG_GND

REG_GND

PRELAMP_AF_ON

REG_GND

XCAM_SCK

XCDS_CS

FC_RING_FGB

HOT_STRB_ON

XLENS_EEP_CS

REG_GND

CAM_SI

XIR_SENS_LED

MSHUT_REF

XTG_CS

REG_GND

STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS

REG_GND

CAM_DD_ON

LENS_TEMP

STRB_ON

XLANC_JACK_IN

FC_RING_FGA

REG_GND

STRB_POPUP_DC_BRAKE

REG_GND

IR_LED_ON

XFC_RST_LED

XCAM_RST

REG_GND

REG_GND

LANC_DC

CCD_TEMP

MSHUT_EN

SELF_TIMER_LED

STRB_POPUP_DC_EN

CA

_AD

13

CA

_AD

09

CA

_AD

05

CA

_AD

06

AD

_GN

D

TG_C

LK

CA

_AD

10

CA

_AD

04

CA

_AD

03

AD

_GN

D

MC

KTG

CA

_AD

11

CA

_AD

07

CA

_AD

01

CA

_AD

00

AD

_GN

D

CA

_AD

12

CA

_AD

08

CA

_AD

02

CLP

_OB

AD

_GN

D

IRIS_B

IRIS_B

IR+

SHUTTER+

IRIS_SENS_VCC

SHUTTER+

F_SENS_VCC

ZOOM_POSI_VCC

FOCUS_B

ZOOM_POSI_VCC

IRIS_A

ZOOM_POSI_OUT

IRIS_A

MF_OUT_F0

IR_SENS_OUT

MF_GND

IR+

THERM_OUT

MF_VCC

IR-

GND(SENS,THERM)

IR_SENS_VCC

IRIS_A

ZOOM_POSI_GND

IRIS_A

FOCUS_A

IRIS_SENS_OUT

FOCUS_B

STATIC_GND

IRIS_B

IRIS_B

SHUTTER-

FOCUS_A

F_SENS_OUT

SHUTTER-

IRIS_SENS_VCC

IRIS_SENS_GND

IR-

MF_OUT_F1

LENS UNIT(2/2)(CD-469 BOARD)

TOLENS UNIT(1/2)

(PAGE 4-2)

TOSY-096 BOARD TO

SY-096 BOARD

TOSY-096 BOARD

FP-747 FLEXIBLE

FLEXIBLEFP-754FLEXIBLEFP-746

16

8 10 137

D

144 1763

E

C

F

11

B

129

J

182 5 15 16

G

H

I

2

(PAGE 4-5)

(PAGE 4-6)

5

4

(PAGE 4-5)

3

Note:Since a servce is not for the singleCD-469 Board.Because adjustment is needed.

DSC-F828


4-5 4-6



12PCN709

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

10PCN706

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

26PCN201

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

1

2

3

4

5

51PCN701

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

51PCN702

123456789101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051

21PCN711

123456789101112131415161718192021

22PCN901

1 VDD

2 VSS

3 PCG

4 VST

5 VCK

6 STB

7 ENB

8 DWN

9 RGT

10 HST

11 HCK2

12 HCK1

13 TEST

14 B

15 R

16 G

17 COM

18 N.C.

19 EVF_LED_A

20 N.C.

21 EVF_LED_K

22 N.C.

18PCN001

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

CN707 12P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

2PCN712

1MIC_IN

2MIC_GND

2PCN713

1SP_+

2SP_-

1

A

VSS

XMINILCD_BL_ON

DATA1

INT

MS_BS

DATA3

SDIO/DATA0

DATA2

VCC

GND

VSS

SCLK

MODE_DIAL1

MODE_DIAL0

KEY_AD0_L2

GND

XPWR_ON

XAE_LOCK_ON

XPOWER_LED_ON

XSHTR_ON

GND

SEG8

SEG1

SEG15

SEG19

SEG13

SEG4

COM0

COM2

SEG6

SEG0

SEG17

SEG18

SEG11

SEG5

SEG7

SEG20

SEG16

N.C.

SEG10

SEG3

SEG12

SEG9

SEG14

SEG2

COM1

COM3

D+

VCC

GND

ID

D-

MIC

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(TOP)

ZOOM_POS_OUT

XFC_RST_SENS

REG_GND

A_2.95V

HR_EN2

XMF_SENS_LED

CAM_3.3V

REG_GND

REG_GND

D_2.95V

LANC_SIG

CAM_P_5V

CAM_P_5V

IR_FILTER_EN

CAM_15V

ASHOE_JACK_IN

REG_GND

REG_GND

D_2.95V

CAM_P_5V

REG_GND

REG_GND

CAM_3.3V

CAM_P_5V

VSUB_CONT

KEY_AD3

HR_EN3

MSHUT_DIR

XSTRB_POPUP

REG_GND

REG_GND

PBLK

CA_F

CAM_-7.5V

HR_DIR3B

HR_DIR3A

REG_GND

HR_DIR2B

XIR_RST_SENS

REG_GND

IR_FILTER_IN

REG_GND

REG_GND

A_2.95V

HR_DIR2A

KEY_AD4

IRIS_RESET_SENS_AD

CA_HD

REG

_GN

D

XC

AM

_DR

_PS

FC_R

ING

_FG

A

XC

AM

_RS

T

REG

_GN

D

XLE

NS

_EEP

_WE

MS

HU

T_EN

REG

_GN

D

REG

_GN

D

XIR

_SEN

S_L

ED

MS

HU

T_R

EF

REG

_GN

D

XC

AM

_SC

K

STR

B_P

OP

UP

_DC

_EN

IR_L

ED_O

N

REG

_GN

D

XLA

NC

_JA

CK

_IN

XIR

IS_R

ST_

LED

REG

_GN

D

XFC

_RS

T_LE

D

FC_R

ING

_FG

B

CC

D_T

EMP

REG

_GN

D

XC

DS

_CS

REG

_GN

D

SEL

F_TI

MER

_LED

EXT_

STR

B_O

N

REG

_GN

D

STR

B_PO

PUP_

DC_

BRAK

E

LAN

C_D

C

REG

_GN

D

XTG

_CS

HO

T_S

TRB

_ON

STR

B_O

N

REG

_GN

D

XH

SH

OE_

CO

NT

STR

B_P

OP

UP

_CN

TSEN

S

CA

M_D

D_O

N

PR

ELA

MP

_AF_

CO

NT

REG

_GN

D

XFE

_CS

XLE

NS

_EEP

_CS

PR

ELA

MP

_AF_

ON

LEN

S_T

EMP

REG

_GN

D

EXT_

STR

B_C

ON

T

CA

M_S

O

REG

_GN

D

CA

M_S

I

PD

_LV

STR

B_P

OP

UP

_DC

_DIR

CA

_AD

02

CA

_AD

09

D_G

ND

CA

_AD

01

CA

_AD

03

TG_C

LK

MC

KTG

CA

_AD

04

CA

_AD

07

CA

_AD

08

CLP

_OB

CA

_AD

00

CA

_AD

10

D_G

ND

CA

_AD

11

D_G

ND

CA

_AD

13

CA

_AD

05

CA

_AD

06

D_G

ND

CA

_AD

12

HCK2

VDD

HCK1

N.C.

DWN

RGT

VST

R

VCK

VSS

B

COM

ENB

HST

RCG

G

STB

TEST

A_OUT

USB_GND

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

USB_D+

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

V_OUT

AV_JACK_IN

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

USB_GND

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

USB_VBUS

USB_D-

TG_4.2V

TG_4.2V

TG_4.2V

EVER_3.0V

SP901SPEAKER

MIC901

UA-003BOARD

A/V OUT(MONO)

J001

(USB)

CN001

LCD903CHARACTER DISPLAY UNIT

MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR

FP-749FLEXIBLE

LB-091BOARD

D001BACK LIGHT

LCD902COLOR EVF UNIT

FLEXIBLEFP-746

TOLENS UNIT(2/2)

TOLENS UNIT(2/2)

FP-747 FLEXIBLE

TOSY-096 BOARD(2/2)

TOLENS UNIT(2/2)

SY-096 BOARD(1/2)

16

8 10 13

M

7

D

19144 1763

L

E

C

F

11

B

12

K

9

J

182 5 15 16

G

H

N

I

FLEXIBLEFP-754

(PAGE 4-4)

5

(PAGE 4-3)

3

(PAGE 4-4)

(PAGE 4-8)

4

6

DSC-F828


4-7 4-8



3PCN002

1 BATT_UNREG

2 BATT_SIG

3 BATT_GND

3PCN001

1 ACV_UNREG

2 ACV_GND

3 BATT/XEXT

6PCN602

123456

CN401 2P

1 DC_300V

2 REG_GND

60PCN601

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

41

43

45

47

49

51

53

55

57

59

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

44

46

48

50

52

54

56

58

60

60PCN751

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

41

43

45

47

49

51

53

55

57

59

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

44

46

48

50

52

54

56

58

60

50PCN703

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

41

43

45

47

49

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

44

46

48

50

50PCN002

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

41

43

45

47

49

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

44

46

48

50

24PCN001

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

6PCN004

123456

10PCN003

12345678910

51PCN451

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

51PCN101

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

1

A

10PCN001

12345678910

REG

_GN

D

XR

ST_

SW

REG

_GN

D

REG

_GN

D

N.C

.

VL_

3V

REG_GND

DC_300V

LR-018

BL_UNREG

DDCON_SCK

REG_GND

DD_2.95V

REG_GND

DD_P_5V

LANC_SO

XLANC_IC_ON

LANC_DC

EVER_3.0V DD_P_5V

REG_GND

BATT_SIG

REG_GND

SYS_DD_ON

DD_3.3V

REG_GND

DD_2.95V

DD_4.7V

REG_GND

DDCON_SO

LANC_SIG

LANC_SI

XCS_DDCON

ACV_UNREG

REG_GND

DD_P_5V

XSTRB_FULL

DD_3.3V

FAST_CHARGE

DD_3.3V

DD_2.95V

DD_P_5V

REG_GND

STRB_CHG

RST_VIN

REG_GND

DD_-7.5V

REG_GND

XRST_SW

BATT/XEXT

REG_GND

REG_GND

INIT_CHARGE

DD_3.3V

REG_GND

XLANC_PWR_ON

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

BATT_UNREG

VL_3V

REG_GND

DD_15.5V

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

DD_15.5V

DD_3.3V

DD_3.3V

XLANC_IC_ON

DD_P_5V

STRB_CHG

DD_P_5V

REG_GND

LANC_SIG

BATT_SIG

FAST_CHARGE

REG_GND

SYS_DD_ON

DDCON_SCK

EVER_3.0V

REG_GND

BATT_UNREG

XCS_DDCON

VL_3V

DD_-7.5V

REG_GND

BL_UNREG

LANC_DC

DD_3.3V

REG_GND

DD_P_5V

DD_2.95V

REG_GND

REG_GND

DD_2.95V

XLANC_PWR_ON

ACV_UNREG

REG_GND

LANC_SI

DD_P_5V

XRST_SW

XSTRB_FULL

DD_2.95V

DD_3.3V

LANC_SOREG_GND

INIT_CHARGE

DD_4.7V

REG_GND

BATT/XEXT

REG_GND

RST_VIN

DDCON_SO

REG_GND

REG_GND

VR

VSH(5V)

VG

VDC(15V)

GUI_UP

GRES

REG_GND

MCLK

VB

REG_GND

VCOM

XPROGRAM_DIAL_AVGL

GPCK

STBYB

REG_GND

VSS

GSRT

REG_GND

KEY_AD0_L5

REG_GND

XPROGRAM_DIAL_B

CP

GUI_DOWN

VBC

VDD(3V)

VSS

VGH(15V)

REG_GND

CHARGE_LED/XSTRB_LED

REG_GND

REG_GND

HCNT

OE

VDD(3V)

REG_GND

KEY_AD2

REG_GND

SRT

KEY_AD1

C2

XCF_COVER_OPEN

REG_GND

REG_GND

XACCESS_LED

REG_GND

GUI_DOWN

VB

KEY_AD2

STBYB

XCF_COVER_OPEN

VSS


REG_GND

VGH(15V)

VCOM

REG_GND

GRES

VBC

VSH(5V)

XACCESS_LED

GPCK

SRT

XPROGRAM_DIAL_B

REG_GND

REG_GND

CP

VDC(15V)

VGL XPROGRAM_DIAL_A

HCNT

REG_GND

REG_GND

GSRT

REG_GND

VSS

KEY_AD0_L5

REG_GND

VR

MCLK

C2

REG_GND

REG_GND

GUI_UP

OE

VDD(3V)

REG_GND

KEY_AD1

VDD(3V)

VG

VG

H

(15V

)V

DC

VS

S

VC

OM

(3V

)

GS

RT

VB

C

VD

D

VD

D

VG

L

VS

S

MC

LK

VB

CP

C1

(15V

)

STB

YB (5

V)

(3V

)

HC

NT

VG

OE

SR

T

VS

H

GP

CK

C2

VR

GR

ES

BL_

THL

N.C

.

BL_

THH

(PA

NEL

_2.9

5V)

N.C

.

BL_

H B

L_R

EG

BL_

L I

N2-

REG

_GN

D

REG

_GN

D

DIA

L_B

GU

I_D

OW

N

DIA

L_A

KEY

_AD

1

D_2

.95V

GU

I_U

P

XC

F_C

OV

ER_O

PEN

XS

TRB

VCC

A02

D01

A10

D07

XSPKR

XCD1

XIOIS16

XIOWR

IREQ

A07

D15

D13

D08

XCD2

XINPACK

XSTSCHG

D03

XOE

A06

D04

XWAIT

A03

A04

XIORD

VCC

A05

D06

VCC

D05

A09

VCC

XREG

GND

XCSEL

A01

D11

D00

GND

A00

GND

XCE2

D10

A08

D14

D12

D02

D09

XWE

XCE1

RESET

BL_L IN2-

EVER_3.0v

BL_H BL_REG

BL_THL

BL_THH(PANEL_2.95V)

D_2.95V

BL_L IN2-

BL_THH(PANEL_2.95V)

BL_THL

BL_H BL_REG

DD_4.2V

DD_1.8V

DD_4.2V

DD_4.2V

DD_2.95V

DD_P_5VDD_P_5V

DD_2.95V

DD_4.2V

DD_4.2V

DD_1.8V

DD_4.2V

XCE1

GND

D05

VCC

XCE2

XSTSCHG

D08

XIOIS16

D09

VCC

D00

A04

XIOWR

XCSEL

D02

GND

51GND

XCD1

XREG

A06

A08

A00

A05

D03

XIORD

A02

D12

XWAIT

D07

XCD2

D06

XVS1

RESET

A09

A01

XSPKR

VCC

D11

VCC

D01

D13

XWE

D15

D04

D14

A03

XINPACK

D10

A07

IREQ

A10

CN103 50PCOMPACT FLASH

MICRO DRIVE


(SECONDARY)

RESET

S001

FLEXIBLE

TOST-088 BOARDCN502

DC IN

J901

HARNESS

HARNESS

BT901BATTERY TERMINAL

B TO B B TO B

DD-204 BOARD

SY-096 BOARD(2/2)

CN001 60P B TO B

CN002 60P B TO B

FP-7

48 B

OA

RD

FP-7

56FL

EXIB

LE

ND901 BACKLIGHT

LCD9012.5INCHLCD UNIT

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(UNDER)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(MID)

B TO B B TO B

TOSY-096 BOARD(1/2)

CF-097 BOARD

16

8 10 13

M

7

D

144 1763

L

E

C

F

11

B

12

K

9

J

182 5 15 16

G

H

I

GU

I_U

P

DIA

L_B

D_2

.95V

REG

_GN

D

KEY

_AD

1

REG

_GN

D

XS

TRB

DIA

L_A

XC

F_C

OV

ER_O

PEN

GU

I_D

OW

N

1

(PAGE 4-2)

(PAGE 4-6)

6

DSC-F828

LB-091 BOARD (EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER)

AS-050 FLEXIBLE BOARD

UA-003 BOARD (AV, USB JACK)

SI-037 BOARD (FLASH, IR LED) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID)

AJ-007 BOARD (JACK)

LS-067 BOARD (AF LASER)

MT-067 BOARD (FLASH MOTOR)

SW-410 BOARD (FUNCTION KEY)

ST-088 BOARD (FLASH CONTROL)

CF-097 BOARD (CF CARD CONNECTOR)LR-018 BOARD (BATTERY, RESET SW)

DD-204 BOARD (DC/DC CONVERTER)

FP-756 FLEXIBLE BOARD

LB-091 BOARD (EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER)

AS-050 FLEXIBLE BOARD

UA-003 BOARD (AV, USB JACK)

SI-037 BOARD (FLASH, IR LED) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID)

AJ-007 BOARD (JACK)

LS-067 BOARD (AF LASER)

MT-067 BOARD (FLASH MOTOR)

SW-410 BOARD (FUNCTION KEY)

ST-088 BOARD (FLASH CONTROL)

CF-097 BOARD (CF CARD CONNECTOR)LR-018 BOARD (BATTERY, RESET SW)

DD-204 BOARD (DC/DC CONVERTER)

FP-756 FLEXIBLE BOARD

COMMON NOTE FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMSCOMMON NOTE FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

LinkLink

4-9

DSC-F828

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

Link(For schematic diagrams)• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µ

µF. 50 V or less are not indicated except for electrolyticsand tantalums.

• Chip resistors are 1/10 W unless otherwise noted.kΩ=1000 Ω, MΩ=1000 kΩ.

• Caution when replacing chip parts.New parts must be attached after removal of chip.Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalumcapacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat.

• Some chip part will be indicated as follows.Example C541 L452

22U 10UHTA A 2520

• Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XXindicate that they are not used.In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated.

• Parts with * differ according to the model/destination.Refer to the mount table for each function.

• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristiccurve B, unless otherwise noted.

• Signal nameXEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC

• 2: non flammable resistor• 5: fusible resistor• C: panel designation• A: B+ Line• B: B– Line• J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE.• C: adjustment for repair.• A: VIDEO SIGNAL (ANALOG)• A: AUDIO SIGNAL (ANALOG)• A: VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL (ANALOG)• A: VIDEO/AUDIO/SERVO SIGNAL (ANALOG)• A: SERVO SIGNAL• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.(Measuring conditions voltage and waveform)• Voltages and waveforms are measured between the

measurement points and ground when camera shootscolor bar chart of pattern box. They are reference valuesand reference waveforms.(VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used)

• Voltage values change depending upon inputimpedance of VOM used.)

1. Connection

2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform ofFig. a and the Fig. b can be obtain.

When indicating parts by reference number, pleaseinclude the board name.

THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)

Kinds of capacitor

Temperature characteristicsExternal dimensions (mm)

Yello

w

A AB BA=B

Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)

HC

yan

Gre

en

Whi

teM

agen

ta

Red

Blu

e

Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV)



Front of the lens

About 20cm

Pattern box

DSC-F828

4-11 4-12 DD-204/LR-018

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS For Schematic Diagram• Refer to page 4-49 for printed wiring board.

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS DD-204 BOARD LR-018 BOARD4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS DD-204 BOARD LR-018 BOARD

7.9

0

7.9

8.1

7.9

8.3

0

8.3

8.3

R-0.4P-0.1

8.3

0

R0.

8/P

0.4

1.2

1.2

1.2

0.7

0.9

1.2

1.1

1.1

R0.

4/P

0.6

1.3

1.3

0.8

0.8

1.2

2.5

3.5

R4.6/P4.4

6.7

3.8

5.4

8.2

R6.6/P6.9

8.3

7.6

5.6

5.6

6.9

2.2

0.2

0.6

1.2

1.5

5.3

3.0

4.7

3.3

4.1

3.0

0

3.0

3.0

0.7

0

2.1

3.02.1

1.5

1.5

2.4

1.2

2.9

2.5

3.0

3.4

3.0

3.3

7.6

0.20

5.6 8.3

6.9

4.7

3.5

4.78.0

4.1

R4.6P4.4

8.3

3.3

8.3

R8.3P6.7

4.7

8.3

3.8

8.3

3.0

5.4

8.3

5.3

8.2

1.9

8.3

R6.6P6.9

R-7.4P-7.5

R-7.4P-7.6

02.9

00

8.3

00

0

8.3

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE R :REC MODE P :PB MODE

TOST-088 BOARDCN502

(PAGE 4-14)

470kR005

LND001

STATIC_GND

C0010.1

0.00

1uC

007

0.00

68u

C01

9

F005

6800R023

C0020.1

10k± 0.5%

R041

± 0.5%

R01862k

0uHFB001

DTC144EMT2LQ004

R044100k

0.00

33u

C01

8

0.022uC005

XX

R01

0

22kR008 1k

R022

MAZT082H08S0D002

0uHL003

22k

R03

1

0.1uC003

68k

R02

0

1uC031

L00722uH

L00222uH

R0094700

33kR012

1SS357-TPH3D006

12

CPH5802-TL-EQ007

24

3

51

2200

pC

014

± 0.5%15k

R029

47k±0.5%

R042

1uC034

± 0.5%1200R030

MB44A120APFV-G-BND-ERE1IC001

1

DTC

6

2

-IN

E7

3

FB7

4

FB6

5

-IN

E6

6

+IN

E6

7

FB5

8

-IN

E5

9

+IN

E5

10

-IN

E4

11

FB4

12

FB3

13

-IN

E3

14

+IN

E2

15

-IN

E2

16

FB2

17 FB1

18 -INE1

19 -INS8

20 IN1

21 IN2

22 IN3

23 IN4

24 IN5

25 IN6

26 LD

27 DIN

28 CLK

29 RST

30 RT

31 CSCP

32 SEL

33

CS

34

VR

35

GN

D

36

CD

ET

37

VR

EF

38

CTL

1

39

VB

AT

40

REG

_3V

41

VR

O

42

VO

UT

43

VIN

44

CS

45

RES

ET

46

OU

TC3

47

XC

TL2

48

DAT

A_O

UT

49WAKE_UP

50DATA_IN

51LANC_SIG

52VCONT

53SENSE

54LANC_DC

55VCC1

56VCC0

57OUT1

58OUT2

59OUT3

60OUT4

61OUT5

62OUT6

63out7

64GND0

SSM3K03FE(TPL3)Q001

0.02

2uC

008

2SB1122-ST-TD-EQ003

1MR016

L00522uH

3PCN001

1ACV_UNREG

2ACV_GND

3BATT/XEXT

10uC028

0.1u

C01

3

100p

C01

6

± 0.5%120kR034

CPH5802-TL-EQ008

24

3

51

F002

R04

6X

X

22k

R02

4

XX

R00

4

R045XX

1SS357-TPH3D004

R04310k

L00422uH

0.04

7uC

009

LF00112

4 3

1uC033

0R

002

1uC035

R04

7X

X

CPH5802-TL-EQ011

24

3

51

10k± 0.5%

R017

0.047uC006

CPH5802-TL-EQ012

24

3

51

1uC032

CPH5802-TL-EQ009

24

3

51

68k

R03

3

1uC030

± 0.5%12k

R032

0R

011

MA8120-TXD003

4700

pC

012

MCH3310-TL-EQ006

12

3

10uHL006

10uC027

3PCN002

1BATT_UNREG

2BATT_SIG

3BATT_GND

F003

HN1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3)Q014

3

5

4 6

2

1

100kR036

XXR003

± 0.5%18k

R035

470R040

22k

R02

5

68k

R02

8

470kR014

F004

CPH5802-TL-EQ010

24

3

51

XX

R00

1

MA132WK-(K8).SOD001

1 23

HAT1054R-ELQ002

87

2

1

65

4

3

0.1uC004

0.1u

C01

1

XXR006

F001

4700R013

XX

R00

7

± 0.5%10k

R048

± 0.5%10k

R049

1uC058

1SS383(T5RSONY1)D011

1SS383(T5RSONY1)D010

2 3

1 4

2.2uC045

B2.2uC029

47uHL001

4.7uB

C044

1uC053

4.7uB

C046

LS5U17LP-TLQ015

52

1

3 4

10V4.7uC062

XX

C01

0

XX

C01

5

XX

C01

7

B10u

C038

B10u

C043

B10u

C040

B10u

C041

1uHL010

B10u

C039

10V33u

C065

B10u

C042

6.3V47uFC066

F006

16V22u

BTA

C067

16V22u

BTA

C069

16V22u

BTA

C070

16V22u

BTA

C068

XC62KS0PXXMRIC004

1-VOUT

2-VIN

3 VSS

1u10V

C406

CPH3205-SONY-TL-EQ407

120R404

XP1211-TXEQ402

5

1

2

4

3

250uC405

315V(FLASH)

10kR401

MA111-(K8).SOD401

HAU160C030TPD402

47kR402

16V22uC401

1/16W15k

R403

2PCN401

1 DC_300V

2 REG_GND

10V0.1uC402

4700R405

2.2uHL401

2SK3018-T106Q401

25V0.022uC404

6PCN602

1

2

3

4

5

6

60PCN601

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

41

43

45

47

49

51

53

55

57

59

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

44

46

48

50

52

54

56

58

60

MA8082-(K8).S0D007

1

2

3

4

5

6

BT001

S001

1

A

10R019

2.2R039

XXR050

BAT

T_S

IG

INIT_CHARGE

FAST_CHARGE

BATT/XEXT

BATT_SIG

STRB_CHG

XSTRB_FULL

BAT

T/X

EXT

FAS

T_C

HA

RG

E

INIT

_CH

AR

GE

STRB_CHG

XSTRB_FULL

XLANC_PWR_ON

XLANC_IC_ON

LANC_DC

LANC_SIG

LANC_SO

LANC_SI

DDCON_SCK

DDCON_SO

XCS_DDCON

SYS_DD_ON

RST_VIN

LANC_SIG

XLANC_PWR_ON

RS

T_V

IN

LAN

C_S

I

XLA

NC

_IC

_ON

LANC_SO

XCS_DDCON

DDCON_SO

DDCON_SCK

SY

S_D

D_O

N

LANC_DC

1.4A/32V

BATT_GND

ACV_GND

1.4A/32V

ACV_UNREG

1.4A/32V

BATT_UNREG

BATT_SIG

1.4A/32V

BATT/XEXT

1.4A/32V

ACV_UNREG

LANC_SIG

DD_P_5V

REG_GND

LANC_SI

DD_4.2V

DD_P_5V

REG_GND

MD_3.3V

XRST_SW

REG_GND

XLANC_IC_ON

DD_2.95V

REG_GND

DD_2.95V

MD_3.3V

BL_UNREG

DD_-7.5V

REG_GND

STRB_CHG

N.C.

XLANC_PWR_ON

REG_GND

XCS_DDCON

REG_GND

BATT_SIG

REG_GND

DD_4.2V

FAST_CHARGE

LANC_SO

VL_3V

DD_2.95V

REG_GND

SYS_DD_ON

REG_GND

XSTRB_FULL

XRST_SW

DD_P_5V

MD_3.3V

REG_GND

MD_3.3V

DD_4.2V

BATT_UNREG

DD_4.7V

DD_P_5V

REG_GND

EVER_3.0V

DDCON_SO

REG_GND

REG_GNDDDCON_SCK

REG_GND

REG_GND

VL_3V

DD_1.8V

RST_VIN

LANC_DC

REG_GND

DD_2.95V

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

DD_P_5V

INIT_CHARGE

DD_15.5V

BATT/XEXT

VL_3V

REG_GND

REG_GND

6P

XRST_SW

REG_GND

N.C.

SWITCHING

SWITCH

INVERTERTRASFORMER

SWITCH

SWITCH

1.4A/32V

SWITCH

SWITCHING

SWITCH

SWITCHING

SWITCHING

SWITCHING

SWITCHING

SWITCHING

SWITCHING

LITHIUM BATTERY(SECONDARY)

RESET

LR-018 BOARDBATTERY, RESET SW

IC004-7.5V REG

S

BT901BATTERYTERMINAL

HARNESS

HARNESS

DC IN

J901

Q003,004CHARGE ON SWITCH

TO SY-096 BOARD(10/10) CN751

( )THROUGH THEFP-748 BOARD

(PAGE 4-43 of LEVEL3)

SWITCHING

IC001DC/DC CONVERTER

16

XX MARK:NO MOUNT

DC/DC CONVERTERDD-204 BOARD

208 10 13

M

217

D

19144 1763

L

E

C

F

11

B

12

K

9

J

182 225 15 16

G

H

I

2

1

3

6

5

4

T401

RB160L-40TE25D403



DSC-F828

4-13 4-14ST-088/LS-067/MT-067/SI-037/AS-050

For Schematic Diagram• Refer to page 4-51 for printed wiring board of ST-088 and MT-067.• Refer to page 4-52 for printed wiring board of LS-067.• Refer to page 4-53 for printed wiring board of SI-037.

ST-088 BOARD LS-067 BOARD MT-067 BOARD SI-037 BOARD4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ST-088 BOARD LS-067 BOARD MT-067 BOARD SI-037 BOARD4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

Note:Adustment is needed when laser unit is replaced.

4.30

0.7

0

0

0

0

5.0

5.0

R280P272

0

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

TODD-204 BOARDCN401

(PAGE 4-12)LENS UNIT is replaced as a block.So that these PRINTED WIRING BOARD andSCHEMATIC DIAGRAM are omitted.

1MR506

47R505

2PCN502

1 REG_GND

2 DC_300V

250V0.047uC503

1MR507

MAZT082H08S0D502

03P4J-T1D504

0uHFB501

LND503

STATIC_GND

1kR503

0.01uC501

D501XX

1/4W

R51056

2SC5658T2LQ/RQ501

470R508

6PCN504

1

2

3

4

5

6

22PCN501

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

26PCN505

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

CY25AAJ-8-T13IC502

8

4

1

7

6

5

2

3XXD505

0R512

16PCN503

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

02DZ10-TPH3D506 R511

100k

RR255L-400TE25D507 0.01u

C504

250V

10V10u

C505

1SS357-TPH3D508

MA8082-(K8).S0D503

1/4W

R50956

UN9111J-(K8).SOQ502

RN1902FE(TPLR3)Q503

6

2

1

3

5

4

2SD2216J-QR(K8).SOQ504

150R513

16V0.047uC506

0.1C502

10kR514

16P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

S001

10PCN001

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

LND001

STRB+

LND002

STRB-

L001

LND001

XE_H

CL-330IRS-X-TUD001

LND003

TRIGGER

LND004

STATIC_GND

LND002

XE_L

LND005

STATIC_GND

26P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

MA8082-(K8).S0D002

6P

1

2

3

4

5

6

SML-310LTT86D004

D001

1

2

3

MA8082-(K8).S0D003

S001

10P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1

A

XE_L

XE_L

XE_H

TRIGGER

TRIGGER

SHOE_GND

REG_GND

HOT

SHOE_GND

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

LANC_SIG

N.C.

HOT

N.C.

IR_LED_A

IR_LED_K

REG_GND

IR_LED_ON

STRB_POPUP+

LANC_SIG

PD_OUT

STRB_ON

REG_GND

XASHOE_JACK_IN

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

STRB_POPUP-

D_2.95V

LD_OUT

CAM_P_5V

XSTRB_POPUP

STRB_POPUP+

STRB_POPUP-

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

STRB_POPUP+

STRB_POPUP-

STRB_POPUP-

STRB_POPUP+

STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

REG_GND

REG_GND

XE_H

XE_H

XE_L

XE_L

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

HOT_STRB_ON

XASHOE_JACK_IN

SELF_TIMER_LED

XE_H

STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS

SELF_TIMER_LED

LD_OUT

XSTRB_POPUP

PD_OUT

REG_GND

REG_GND

N.C.

REG_GND

XASHOE_JACK_IN

SHOE_GND

HOT

STRB_POPUP-

HOT

REG_GND

SHOE_GND

STRB_POPUP-

STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS

REG_GND

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

N.C.

N.C.

LANC_SIG

STRB_POPUP+

HOT

SHOE_GND

LANC_SIG

SHOE_GND

XASHOE_JACK_IN

HOT

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

N.C.

STRB_POPUP+

N.C.

N.C.

XE_H

N.C.

REG_GND

N.C.

TRIGGER

XE_H

XE_L

N.C.

XE_H

TRIGGER

N.C.

IR_LED_K

XE_H

XE_L

IR_LED_A

N.C.

REG_GND

XE_L

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

XE_L

PD_OUT

LD_OUT

REG_GND

XSTRB_POPUP

REG_GND

SELF_TIMER_LED

(Self-timer)

(FLASH OPEN DETECT)

AF LASER UNITNote

10REG_GND

2

1

HOT

HOT

XASHOE_JACK_IN

6,7

SHOE_GND

9

N.C.

LANC_SIG

N.C.

SHOE_GND

EXT_STRB_ON_CN4

3

AS-050FLEXIBLE

ACCESSORY SHOE

FLASH MOTORMT-067 BOARD

(MOTOR POSITION DETECT)

ST-088 BOARDFLASH CONTROL

)THROUGH THEFP-750 FLEXIBLE(

LENS UNIT

IR LED DRIVE

Q502-504LIGHT LEVEL CONTROL

-

M+

M910FLASH MOTOR

LS-067 BOARDAF LASER

SI-037 BOARDFLASH, IR LED

(Infrared ray emitter)

XENONTUBE

3

F

10 12 1413 162

E

155 96

B

11

H

C

7 8

G

I

D

4

J

16

AS-050 FLEXIBLE is replaced as a block.So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.

IGPT

IC502

0uHFB504

0uHFB503

0uHFB505

0uHFB502



DSC-F828

4-15 4-16 UA-003/LB-091

For Schematic Diagram• Refer to page 4-54 for printed wiring board.

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS UA-003 BOARD LB-091 BOARD4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS UA-003 BOARD LB-091 BOARD

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

LND001

STATIC_GND

MA

111-

(K8)

.S0

D00

4

FB001 0uH

0R004

J001

LF001

1 3

42

MA

ZT08

2H08

S0

D00

3

MA

8082

-(K

8).S

0D

002

MA

ZT08

2H08

S0

D00

1

CN001

5P

1

2

3

4

5

0R001

XXD005

0R002

1kR003

0R006

0R005

1

A

GND

D+

USB_GND

USB_VBUS

D-

ID

USB_D-

VCC

USB_D+

USB_GND

AV_JACK_IN

A_OUT

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

V_OUT

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

12P

TOSY-096 BOARD(9/10)CN707


A/V OUT(MONO)

(USB)

AV,USB JACKUA-003 BOARD

16

7

D

4 63

C

B

2 5

SIGNAL

PB

AUDIOYCHROMA

REC

VIDEO SIGNAL

Y/CHROMA

SIGNAL PATH

NSCW455T-TC9D001

CN001 18P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

181

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

1

A

VSS

RGT

HCK2

RCG

B

VST

VDD

G

COM

R

HCK1

STB

HST

VCK

DWN

ENB

N.C.

TEST

HST

RGT

VSS

COM

R

RCG

VST

TEST

VDD

STB

HCK1

DWN

VCK

N.C.

G

B

ENB

HCK2

N.C.

EVF_LED_A

N.C.

EVF_LED_K

22P



(BACKLIGHT)

LCD902COLOR EVF UNIT

EVF,EVF BACKLIGHTLB-091 BOARD

16

D

4 63

C

B

2 5

YCHROMA

REC

VIDEO SIGNAL

Y/CHROMA

SIGNAL PATH

DSC-F828

4-17 4-18CF-097/FP-756

For Schematic Diagram• Refer to page 4-55 for printed wiring board.

CF-097 PRINTED WIRING BOARD4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS CF-097 PRINTED WIRING BOARD

0.1uB

C102

B

6.3VTA

47uC103

0.1u BC101

CL102

CL101

12

51PCN101

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

LND101

STATIC GND

MA111-(K8).S0D101

0R101

XXC104

0R104

51P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

51P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

50PCN103

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

1

A

CF_XIOWR

CF_D0

CF_A9

CF_D12

CF_XIORD

CF_XOE

CF_XCD1

CF_D4

CF_D11

CF_D1

CF_XWAIT

CF_D5

CF_A3

CF_D3

CF_RESET

CF_A4

CF_A0

CF_A8

CF_D8

CF_A7

CF_XREG

CF_D10R102 47

R103 47

R105 47

R106 47

R107 47

R108 47

R109 47

R110 47

R111 47

CF_D2

CF_A2

CF_XCE2

CF_D14

CF_A10

CF_D6

CF_D15

CF_XWE

CF_A1

CF_IREQ

CF_XCE1

CF_D7

CF_D13

CF_XCD2

CF_D9

CF_XIOIS16

CF_A5

CF_A6

CF_XIOIS16

CF_D10

CF_A1

CF_A9

CF_XCD2

CF_A2

CF_XWAIT

CF_XWE

CF_A10

CF_D5

CF_A8

CF_D11

CF_XIOWR

CF_D3

CF_XOE

CF_XCD1

CF_IREQ

CF_A7

CF_D1

CF_D2

CF_A0

CF_A6

CF_A4

CF_XCE2

CF_A5

CF_D6

CF_D0

CF_D8

CF_D14

CF_D9

CF_XIORD

CF_D13

CF_D12

CF_D4

CF_D7

CF_D15

CF_XCE1

CF_A3

CF_XREG

CF_RESET

XIOIS16

A03

A06

XSTSCHG

D09

VCC

VCC

D05

XWE

XOE

D14

D11

XIOWR

A10

A08

D01

D06

XSPKR

D04

D08

D15

D10

D03

A04

IREQ

D13

VCC

XCE1

A07

XCD1

A01

XIORD

XINPACK

A09

D00

GND

A00

D12

D07

XCE2

VCC

GND

A05

A02

XCSEL

XREG

XCD2

XWAIT

RESET

D02

GND

XVS2

XVS1

A03

D01

GND

XCSEL

A00

XCE1

XOE

IREQ

D10

XWAIT

XIOIS16

XINPACK

XWE

GND

GND

A04

D02

D15

XCE2

D08

XIOWR

A08

XIORD

D05

D00

A10

D03

RESET

XSTSCHG

D07

D04

XSPKR

A02

XCD2

A01

XCD1

VCC

A09

D11

A06

D09

D12

D06

A05

D14

XREG

A07

D13

VCC

D10

A01

IREQ

A10

A06

D09

VCC

VCC

XOE

A00

XCE2

D10

RESET

D11

D14

D00

D05

D13

A05

D04

XCE1

D07

XIORD

VCC

A10

D15

XWAIT

GND

XREG

A09

XIOIS16

IREQ

GND

A04

XWAIT

XIORD

VCC

A00

VCC

XSTSCHG

D01

D15

A04

XCSEL

XWE

D01

XIOWR

XINPACK

D03

XIOIS16

GND

D06

A02

A05

VCC

RESET

D11

XSPKR

D09

XCD1

D05

XSPKR

D12

D02

GND

D04

D07

D08

XSTSCHG

A03

XCD2

XOE

D12

D06

XCD2

A08

D00

GND

XCD1

XCE1

XINPACK

A06

XREG

D03

XWE

A09

VCC

A07 A07

A01

XIOWR

D08

D02

VCC

A08

XCSEL

A02

A03

GND

D13

XCE2

D14

25.50

1.26

COMPACT FLASHMICRO DRIVE

FP-756FLEXIBLE CF CARD CONNECTER

CF-097 BOARD

16



REC

Y/CHROMA

SIGNAL PATH

AUDIO

PB

CHROMA

VIDEO SIGNAL

SIGNALY

8 107

D

4 63

E

C

F

11

B

1292 5

G

H

I

R112 47

R113 47

R114 47

R116 47

R117 47

R118 47

R119 47

R120 47

R121 47

R122 47

R123 47

R124 47

R125 47

R126 47

R127 47

FB1010uH

FP-756 FLEXIBLE is replaced as a block.So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.

GND

DSC-F828

4-19 4-20 SW-410/AJ-007

For Schematic Diagram• Refer to page 4-57 for printed wiring board of SW-410.• Refer to page 4-56 for printed wiring board of AJ-007.

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS SW-410 BOARD AJ-007 BOARD4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS SW-410 BOARD AJ-007 BOARD

6PCN001

1

2

3

4

5

6

S002

S003

1200R001

S005

(Metering mode)

S007

S006

1500R004

6800R005

S001

22kR003

3300R002

S004

XXD001

XXD002

LND001

STATIC GND

XX

R006

1

AOPEN(FLASH)

KEY_AD3

KEY_AD4

REG_GND

FOCUS(AUTO/MANUAL)


N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

(MACRO)/BRK(Burst/Bracket)

(FLASH)

LENS UNIT

)THROUGH THEFP-751 FLEXIBLE(

XX MARK:NO MOUNT

SW-410 BOARDFUNCTION KEY

16

32 5 6

B

C

D

4

LENS UNIT is replaced as a block.So that these PRINTED WIRING BOARDand SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM are omitted.

0uHFB201

0.001uC204

0.001uC201

LND201

STATIC GND

D201

D202MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0

D203

6PCN201

1LANC_GND

2LANC_SIG

3LANC_GND

4LANC_DC

5XLANC_JACK_IN

6ACC_STRB_ON

J201

0uHFB204

0uHFB202

0uHFB203

0uHFB205

1

A

LENS UNIT

THROUGH THEAJ-006 FLEXIBLE )( ACC(Accessory)

32 5 6

B

4

C

JACKAJ-007 BOARD

XX MARK:NO MOUNT

16

LENS UNIT is replaced as a block.So that these PRINTED WIRING BOARD andSCHEMATIC DIAGRAM are omitted.

Resistor is mounted to the locationwhere D201 is printed.

0Note

DSC-F828

4-21 4-22CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)/(MID)


CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(TOP) isreplaced as a block.So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARDis omitted.

S001

1 2

3 46800R004

1500R006

S003

1200R008

3300

R005

S002

1200R007

S004 S005

3300R002 6800R003

TLGU1002(TPX1,SONY)D001

12P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

MA

ZT08

2H08

S0

D00

2

LND001

STATIC_GND

XXD0051500R009

MA

8082

-(K

8).S

0D

003

3300R010

XXR011

SML311EBTD006

22R012

XXR013 XXD007

1

A

XPWR_LED_ON

EVER_3.0V

2

M

XSHTR_ON

6

(2nd)

(1st)4

MODE_DIAL0

5

GND

POWER

7A

3

XAE_LOCK_ON

KEY_AD0_L21

XPWR_ON

GND

MODE_DIAL1

GND

WB(White balance)

(Exposure)+

XMINILCD_BL_ON

8

9

(PB)

SETUP

(POWER)

(SHATTER)

SCN (MANUAL)

(AUTO)

S

P

(MOVIE)

(Display windowbacklight)

(MINI LCD BACK LIGHT)


(PAGE 4-41 of LEVEL 3)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(TOP)XX MARK:NO MOUNT

32 5 6

B

C

7

D

4

16

TOCONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(UNDER)CN003

(PAGE 4-24)

1.2kR005

LND001

STATIC_GND

SML-310LTT86D001

S010

S008

3.3kR010

S003

S014

1.5kR007

S012S007

6.8kR002

S002

MAZT082H08S0D002

MAZT082H08S0D004

MA8082-(K8).S0D003

S015

MA8082-(K8).S0D005

LND002

STATIC_GND

10PCN001

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

S006

1

A

(Multi-Selector)

Command dial

(Multi-selector)MENU (CENTER)

(Multi-selector)

(Multi-selector) AE LOCK (Delete)

GUI_UP

DIAL_A

GUI_DOWN

REG_GND

DIAL_B

D_2.95V

XSTRB_LED

KEY_AD1

OPEN(CF)

REG_GND

XCF_COVER_OPEN

(Flash)CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(MID)XX MARK:NO MOUNT

3

F

2

E

5 6

B

C

7 8

D

4

16CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(MID) is replaced as a block.So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.

DSC-F828

4-23 4-24 CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER)


TOCONTROL SWITCHBLOCK(MID)CN001

(PAGE 4-22)

CN001 24P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

50PCN002

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

41

43

45

47

49

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

44

46

48

50

SML-310LTT86D001

S005

1.2kR005

S004S003S002

3.3kR003

1.5kR004

6.8kR002

S001

22kR001

S006

6PCN004

1

2

3

4

5

6

10PCN003

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1

A

VBC

VCOM

N.C.

N.C.

VCOM

VBC

STBYB

OE

REG_GND

SRT

MCLK

HCNT

REG_GND

REG_GND

VG

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

VR

VGL

VSH(5V)

VB

C2

VSS

VDD(3V)

VSS

VDC(15V)

VGH(15V)

VDD(3V)

FINDER/LCD (Screen status)(Self Timer/Index)

(Digital zoomPlayback zoom)

(QuickReview)

DIAL_A

DIAL_B

XSTRB

D_2.95V

GUI_UP

KEY_AD1

GUI_DOWN

REG_GND

ACCESS

REG_GND

XCF_COVER_OPEN


KEY_AD1

CP

GRES

BL_L IN2-

REG_GND

XACCESS_LED

XCF_COVER_OPEN

REG_GND

GSRT

REG_GND

BL_H BL_REG

XPROGRAM_DIAL_B

KEY_AD2

GUI_UP

REG_GND

GPCK

BL_THH(PANEL_2.95V)

REG_GND

XPROGRAM_DIAL_A

D_2.95V

GUI_DOWN

KEY_AD0_L5

BL_THL

REG_GND

BL_H BL_REG

BL_THL

BL_THH(PANEL_2.95V)

BL_L IN2-

LCD9012.5INCHLCD UNIT

B TO B

TO SY-096 BOARD(9/10) CN703


ND901BACKLIGHT

CF("Memory Stick"/CF card)XX MARK:NO MOUNT

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(UNDER)

3

F

102

E

5 96

B

11

C

7 8

D

4

16

12

STBYB

VGH

VG

VB

VSH

(15V)

VSS

C2

(3V)

(3V)

VR

GPCK

(5V)

MCLK

VDD

(15V)

OE

CP

VDD

VDC

SRT

C1

VGL

GSRT

GRES

HCNT

VSS

PB

YCHROMA

REC

VIDEO SIGNAL

Y/CHROMA

SIGNAL PATH

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(UNDER) is replaced as a block.So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.



Schematic diagrams of the SY-096 board are notshown.Pages from 4-25 to 4-44 are not shown.

DSC-F828

LinkLink

4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

LB-091 BOARD

SI-037 BOARD FP-748 BOARD

LS-067 BOARD SW-410 BOARD

MT-067 BOARD AJ-007 BOARD

ST-088 BOARD CF-097 BOARD

LR-018 BOARD UA-003 BOARD

DD-204 BOARD LB-091 BOARD

SI-037 BOARD FP-748 BOARD

LS-067 BOARD SW-410 BOARD

MT-067 BOARD AJ-007 BOARD

ST-088 BOARD CF-097 BOARD

LR-018 BOARD UA-003 BOARD

DD-204 BOARD

CIRCUIT BOARDS AND FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION

MOUNTED PARTS LOCATIONCOMMON NOTE FOR PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION CIRCUIT BOARDS AND FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION

MOUNTED PARTS LOCATIONCOMMON NOTE FOR PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

Board Name Function

DD-204 DC/DC CONVERTER

LR-018 BATTERY, RESET SW

ST-088 FLASH CONTROL

MT-067 FLASH MOTOR

LS-067 AF LASER

SI-037 FLASH, IR LED

LB-091 EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT

UA-003 AV, USB JACK

CF-097 CF CARD CONNECTOR

AJ-007 JACK

SW-410 FUNCTION KEY

FP-748 CONNECTOR

4-47

DSC-F828

4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

(For printed wiring boards)• : Uses unleaded solder.• : Pattern from the side which enables seeing.

(The other layers’ patterns are not indicated)• Through hole is omitted.• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.• There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram

isn’t mounted in this model.• C: panel designation

THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)

2 1

3

2 1

3

2 1

3

345

21

123

654

EB

C

31

55

2

46

123

54

4 3

1 2

5 4

1 3

12

43

31 2

45

53 4

12

34

21

12

43

46

2

5

31

12

43

• Chip parts.Transistor Diode

board name

DD-204

LR-018

ST-088

MT-067

LS-067

SI-037

LB-091

UA-003

CF-097

AJ-007

SW-410

FP-748

SY-096

parts location

(shown on page)

4-63

–

4-63

–

–

–

–

4-63

4-63

4-63

4-63

–

4-65

number of layers

6

1

6

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

1

8

layers not shown

2 to 5

–

2 to 5

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

2 to 7

CSP IC

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

IC301, 302, 401, 452,501, 601

pattern

BOARD INFORMATION

DSC-F828


4-49 4-50

• : Uses unleaded solder.

MOUNTED PARTS LOCATIONMOUNTED PARTS LOCATION

4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS• Refer to page 4-47 for common note for printed wiring board.

DD-204/LR-018

LR-018 BOARD

111-860-529-

S001

6

1 RESET

BT001(LITHIUM BATTERY)

(SECONDARY)

– +

A

B

C

D

E

1 2 3 416

DD-204 BOARD(SIDE A)

111-860-719-

210

2030

4050

1

C405

2

1 2 3

6 5 4

1

46

3

R403

R404

R406

CN00

2

R020R024

R025R0

28

R029R030

R031

R032

R033

R034

R035

R036

C003

R040

R041

CN60

1

R042

C006

R043

C007

R044

C008

R045

C009

C004

R046R047

R048

R049

C010

C011

C012

C013

C014

C015

C016

C017

C018

C401

C019

C403 C404

C046

C053

C058

C062

D006

C066

D011

D401

D403

IC001

T401

LND001

F005

Q014

L001

L002

L003

L004

Q401

L005

L006

L007

Q407 L401

R001

R002

R004R007

R009

R010 R011

R012

R013

13

15

1525

3545

55

6059

3 4

2 1+P

B+

17

20

25

3249

55

60

64

48

1

334045

165 10

A

B

C

D

E

1234 16

DD-204 BOARD(SIDE B)

111-860-719-

3

34

4

12

3 5

12

3 5

12

3 5

12

3 5

1

1

1

15

23

2

3

3

3

5

5

4

4

1

1

58

2

3

5 4

1

R018

R401

R019

R402

CN00

1R4

05

R022

R023

CN40

1

R039

C001

C002

C005

CN602

R050

LF001

C402

C406

C027

C028

C029

C030

C031

C032

C033

C034

C035

C038

C039

C040

C041

C042

C043

C044

C045

D001

D002

D003

D004

C065

D007

C067

C068

C069

D010

C070

D402

IC004

F001

F002

F003

F004

F006

Q001

Q002Q003 Q0

04

Q006

Q007

Q008Q009 Q010

Q011

Q012

Q015

Q402

L010

FB001R003

R005

R008

R014

R016

R017

1

12

1 6

B +

B+

B+

B+

B+

32

2

1

DS

GCAUTION :Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

DSC-F828


4-51 4-52


ST-088/MT-067/LS-067

• : Uses unleaded solder.• Refer to page 4-47 for common note for printed wiring board.

A

B

C

1 216

ST-088 BOARD(SIDE A)

111-860-720-

1 5 15

2 10 20

25

26

46

13

R505

R506

R507

R512

CN502

CN503C5

03

C505

D501

D503

D505

D508

IC502

CN505

CN504

Q504

R513

C506 R514

Q502

Q503

C502

FB50

2

1 2

8 5

41

151016

1

26

5

A

B

C

12 16

ST-088 BOARD(SIDE B)

111-860-720-

Q501

R503

R508

R511

CN501

C501

C504

D502

D504

D506

D507

LND503

FB50

5

FB50

4

FB50

1

FB50

3

R509

R510

15101522

A

K

K

MT-067 BOARD

11

1-860-533-

S001MOTOR POSITION

DETECT

CN0011

16

1

105( )

LS-067 BOARD

111-860-546-

S001FLASH OPEN

DETECT( )

D002

D003

D001(LASER UNIT) D004

Adjustment is needed when laser unit is replaced.

A

K

3

1 2

A

AK K

6

1

DSC-F828


4-53 4-54 SI-037/LB-091/UA-003



SI-037 BOARD

111-860-532-

L001

D001

126

LB-091 BOARD

111-860-528-1

122

5 10 15 18CN001

D002

D003

D002

D001

D005

D004

R002

R005

R004

R006

R001

R003

LF00

1 34

1

1

12 1

2

3 5

4

2FB00

1

A

B

1 2 3 4 5 616

UA-003 BOARD

111-860-530-

J001A/V OUT (MONO)

CN001(USB)

DSC-F828


4-55 4-56CF-097/AJ-007



A

B

C

1 2 316

CF-097 BOARD

11

1-860-534-R1

05R1

07R1

08R1

09R1

10R1

11R1

12R1

13

R114

R117

R119

R121

R123

R125

R127

R119R123

R127

CL101

CL102

CL103CL104CL105

FB101

R101

R102R103

R104

R106

R116R118

CN10

1

R120

R122

R124R126

R116

R118

R120

R122

R124

R126

C101

C102

C103

C104

D101LND101

CN10

3

15

1525

3545

51

220

3040

50

10

B+1

510

2025

3035

4045

50

15

A

B

1 2 3 416

AJ-007 BOARD

121-860-545-

ACC(Accessory)

CN201

D201

D202D203 LND201

FB20

1

FB202

FB20

3

FB20

4

FB205

C202

C201

C204

C203

1

6

24

5

13

J201

DSC-F828


4-57 4-58 SW-410/FP-748



A

B

C

D

1234 16

SW-410 BOARD(SIDE B)

121-860-721-

(FLASH)

S002

S003

S004

S005

S006

S007

(MACRO) /BRK

(BURST/BRACKET)

NIGHT SHOT/NIGHT FRAMING

FOCUS(AUTO-MANUAL)

(METERING MODE)

A

B

C

D

1 2 3 416

SW-410 BOARD(SIDE A)

121-860-721-

OPEN(FLASH)

CN00

1

S001

D001

D002

R001

R002

R003

R004

R005 R006

16

FP-748 BOARD

11

1-860-537-

CN001

1

105

2015

3025

4035

5045

6055

CN002

1

105

2015

3025

4035

5045

6055

Printed wiring board of the SY-096 board is not shown.Pages from 4-59 to 4-62 are not shown.

DSC-F828

4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION no mark : side A* mark : side B

DD-204 BOARD

* C001 D-3* C002 D-3

C003 D-3C004 D-3

* C005 E-3C006 E-3C007 E-2C008 C-3C009 C-3C010 C-2C011 C-3C012 E-2C013 C-3C014 E-2C015 C-2C016 E-2C017 C-2C018 E-2C019 E-1

* C027 D-1* C028 D-1* C029 B-2* C030 B-4* C031 C-2* C032 C-3* C033 C-2* C034 B-3* C035 B-3* C038 B-4* C039 C-1* C040 C-3* C041 C-2* C042 B-2* C043 B-3* C044 B-2* C045 B-1

C046 B-2C053 B-1C058 B-1C062 B-1

* C065 C-1C066 B-2

* C067 C-2* C068 D-2* C069 C-3* C070 B-2

C401 B-4* C402 A-3

C403 A-3C404 A-3C405 A-2

* C406 A-3

* CN001 C-4CN002 D-4

* CN401 A-3CN601 C-1

* CN602 E-2

* D001 D-2* D002 C-4* D003 D-3* D004 D-3

D006 D-1* D007 D-2* D010 B-1

D011 B-1D401 A-2

* D402 B-3D403 A-2

* F001 C-3* F002 D-2* F003 D-2* F004 C-3

F005 D-4* F006 C-2

* FB001 C-4

IC001 D-2* IC004 B-1

L001 B-2L002 B-4L003 C-2L004 C-3L005 C-2L006 B-2L007 B-3

* L010 C-1L401 A-4

* LF001 D-3

* Q001 E-3* Q002 D-3* Q003 D-2* Q004 D-2* Q006 D-1* Q007 B-4* Q008 C-2* Q009 C-3* Q010 C-3* Q011 B-2* Q012 B-3

Q014 D-3* Q015 B-1

Q401 A-3* Q402 A-3

Q407 A-3

R001 E-3R002 E-3

* R003 C-4R004 E-3

* R005 E-3R007 E-3

* R008 C-4R009 D-3R010 E-3R011 E-3R012 D-3R013 E-3

* R014 E-3* R016 E-3* R017 E-1* R018 E-1* R019 D-3

R020 E-2* R022 D-2* R023 D-2

R024 E-2R025 E-2R028 E-2R029 E-1R030 E-1R031 E-1R032 E-1R033 E-1R034 E-1R035 E-1R036 D-1

* R039 D-2R040 D-1R041 C-3R042 C-3R043 D-3R044 D-3R045 D-3R046 D-3R047 D-3R048 E-1R049 E-1

* R050 B-1* R401 A-3* R402 A-3

R403 A-4R404 A-4

* R405 A-4R406 A-2

T401 A-3

* C501 B-1C502 C-2C503 B-2

* C504 B-2C505 C-2C506 C-2

* CN501 A-1CN502 C-1CN503 A-2CN504 B-2CN505 B-2

D501 A-2* D502 A-2

D503 A-2* D504 B-2

D505 A-1* D506 B-1* D507 B-1

D508 C-2

* FB501 A-2FB502 A-2

* FB503 B-1* FB504 A-1* FB505 A-1

IC502 C-2

* Q501 A-1Q502 C-2Q503 C-2Q504 C-2

* R503 B-1R505 C-2R506 C-2R507 C-2

* R508 A-1* R509 C-1* R510 C-1* R511 B-2

R512 A-2R513 C-2R514 C-2

ST-088 BOARD

C101 B-3C102 B-3C103 C-3C104 A-3

CN101 B-3CN103 B-2

D101 A-3

FB101 B-3

R101 A-3R102 A-3R103 A-3R104 A-3

* R105 A-3R106 A-3

* R107 A-3* R108 A-3* R109 B-3* R110 B-3* R111 B-3* R112 B-3* R113 B-3* R114 B-3

R116 B-3* R117 B-3

R118 B-3* R119 B-3

R120 B-3* R121 B-3

R122 B-3* R123 B-3

R124 B-3* R125 B-3

R126 B-3* R127 B-3

CF-097 BOARD

C201 B-1C202 B-1C203 B-1C204 B-1

CN201 B-1

D201 B-1D202 B-1D203 B-1

FB201 B-4FB202 B-3FB203 B-3FB204 B-3FB205 B-3

J201 A-4

AJ-007 BOARD

CN001 B-4

D001 C-3D002 C-3

R001 A-4R002 C-2R003 C-2R004 A-4R005 C-2R006 C-3

S001 A-2* S002 A-3* S003 B-3* S004 D-3* S005 A-2* S006 B-2* S007 C-2

SW-410 BOARD

Mounted parts location of the SY-096 board are notshown.Pages from 4-65 to 4-66 are not shown.

4-63 4-64EDD-204/ST-088/UA-003/CF-097/AJ-007/SW-410

4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

CN001 A-2

D001 B-2D002 B-2D003 B-2D004 A-2D005 A-2

FB001 B-2

J001 A-1

LF001 A-3

R001 B-3R002 B-1R003 B-2R004 A-2R005 A-3R006 A-2

UA-003 BOARD

DSC-F828

NOTENOTE

LinkLink

5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

LinkLink

OVERALL SECTIONOVERALL SECTION STROBOSCOPE BLOCKASSEMBLY

STROBOSCOPE BLOCKASSEMBLY

CABINET (FRONT)BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1CABINET (FRONT)

BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1CABINET (FRONT)

BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2CABINET (FRONT)

BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2

BTH BLOCK ASSEMBLYBTH BLOCK ASSEMBLY CABINET (REAR)BLOCK ASSEMBLYCABINET (REAR)

BLOCK ASSEMBLY EVF ASSEMBLYEVF ASSEMBLY

LR-018 BOARD

LS-067 BOARD

MT-067 BOARD

SW-410 BOARD

SY-096 BOARD

UA-003 BOARD

SI-037 BOARD

ST-088 BOARD

AJ-007 BOARD

CF-097 BOARD

DD-204 BOARD

FP-748 BOARD

LB-091 BOARD

LR-018 BOARD

LS-067 BOARD

MT-067 BOARD

SW-410 BOARD

SY-096 BOARD

UA-003 BOARD

SI-037 BOARD

ST-088 BOARD

AJ-007 BOARD

CF-097 BOARD

DD-204 BOARD

FP-748 BOARD

LB-091 BOARD

C

D

D

B

A

D

ELECTRICAL PARTS LISTELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

EXPLODED VIEWSEXPLODED VIEWS

ACCESSORIESACCESSORIES

NOTE: Characters A to Z of the electrical parts list indicate location of exploded views in which the desired part is shown.

B C

D

A

5-1

DSC-F828

5. REPAIR PARTS LIST5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

The components identified by mark 0 ordotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifiés par une marque0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portantle numéro spécifié.

NOTE:• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some differences from

the original one.• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine

service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items.• The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded views are not

supplied.• Due to standardization, replacements in the parts list may be different from

the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set.• CAPACITORS:

uF: µF• COILS

uH: µH• RESISTORS

All resistors are in ohms.METAL: metal-film resistorMETAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistorF: nonflammable

• SEMICONDUCTORSIn each case, u: µ, for example:uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... ,uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... ,uPD..., µPD...

• AbbreviationCND : Canadian modelAUS : Australian modelHK : Hong Kong modelKR : Korea modelJE : Tourist modelJ : Japanese model

When indicating parts by reference number,please include the board name.

5-3

DSC-F828

5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS


5-1-1. OVERALL SECTION

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description

ns : not supplied

1 3-080-203-31 SREW(M2),LOCK ACE,P22 3-051-124-01 FOOT, RUBBER3 A-7078-878-A SW-410 BOARD, COMPLETE4 1-860-540-11 FP-751 FLEXIBLE BOARD

6 3-086-480-01 WINDOW, LCD7 3-089-846-01 RADIATION SHEET (LL)8 X-3953-809-1 CABINET (LR) ASSY9 (Note) TAPE (A)

1

1

11

1

61

1

ns

2

4

1

1

9

1

8

7

1

3Stroboscope block assembly(See page 5-4)

Cabinet (front) block assembly-1(See page 5-5)

Cabinet (rear) block assembly(See page 5-8)

BTH block assembly(See page 5-7)

Note :For the part of 9: TAPE (A) (3-941-343-01) cut WOVEN(T0.25), FABRIC NON (3-076-631-01) into the desiredlength and use it.

5-4

DSC-F828


5-1-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY


ns : not supplied

51 A-7112-735-A REPAIR (EB08A) (LENS BLOCK ASSY)52 A-7078-884-A ST-088 BOARD, COMPLETE53 3-989-735-51 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P254 3-080-222-11 SCREW (M1.7), TAPPING,P255 3-086-499-01 HOLDER, ST LASER

56 X-3953-801-1 CABINET ASSY, ST57 1-818-099-11 CONNECTOR, SHOE58 A-7078-891-A LS-067 BOARD, COMPLETE59 X-3953-800-2 ST ASSY60 3-086-493-01 COVER, ST

61 3-086-494-01 HOLDER, ST UNIT062 A-7078-889-A SI-037 BOARD, COMPLETE

64 3-084-817-01 GRIP65 A-7078-890-A MT-067 BOARD, COMPLETE66 3-086-498-01 GUIDE, STFPC68 3-086-495-01 COVER, STFPC69 3-086-496-01 COVER, ST BLIND

73 3-086-497-01 GUIDE, HARNESS74 1-860-539-11 FP-750 FLEXIBLE BOARD75 1-962-610-11 HARNESS (PT-132)

076 1-478-445-11 FLASH UNIT77 3-080-203-31 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2

0D001 1-805-470-51 LASER UNIT (Note1)M910 1-787-055-11 MOTOR, STROBOSCOPE (FLASH/MOTOR)

A

I

FG

B

C

C

D

A

B

D

E

I

51

5253 54

69

56

55

5854

60 61 54

64

65

68

54

59

54

77

62

54

75

5457

76

6664

74

73

54 ns

ns

M910

(See page 5-5)

D001(Note1)

CD-469 board(Note2)

Note3 :The components identified bymark 0 or dotted line with mark0 are critical for safety.Replace only with part numberspecified.

Note3 :Les composants identifiés parune marque 0 sont critiquespour la sécurité.Ne les remplacer que par unepièce portant le numéro spécifié.

Note1 :Adjustment is needed when laser unit is replaced.

Note2 :CD-469 board is included in the REPAIR (EB08A) (LENSBLOCK ASSY). CD-469 board is not supplied as a singleboard since removing it as a single board requiresadjustment.

5-5

DSC-F828


5-1-3. CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1


ns : not supplied

101 X-3953-808-1 CABINET (LL) ASSY102 3-080-203-31 SREW(M2),LOCK ACE,P2103 3-051-124-01 FOOT, RUBBER104 3-087-127-01 SCREW105 3-989-735-51 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2

106 A-7078-885-A AJ-007 BOARD, COMPLETE107 1-860-531-11 AJ-006 FLEXIBLE BOARD108 X-3953-799-1 HINGE ASSY109 3-086-490-01 COVER, ST (ST UNDER COVER)110 3-080-222-11 SCREW(M1.7), TAPPING,P2

111 A-7078-888-A UA-003 BOARD, COMPLETE112 1-794-045-61 CONNECTOR, DC-IN113 X-3953-879-2 HOLDER ASSY, JACK

114 3-086-485-01 GUIDE (L), FLEXIBLE115 3-087-125-01 GUIDE (R), FLEXIBLE117 1-860-541-11 FP-754 FLEXIBLE BOARD118 1-860-535-11 FP-746 FLEXIBLE BOARD119 1-860-536-11 FP-747 FLEXIBLE BOARD

120 3-090-857-01 SHEET (ACC)122 3-089-843-01 RADIATION SHEET (LR)123 1-400-689-11 FERRITE CORE124 3-088-689-01 SHEET (F2) ADHESIVE125 (Note) TAPE (A)

126 1-400-687-11 FERRITE CORE127 3-088-442-01 SHEET (F1) ADHESIVE

A

E

F

G

A

ns

ns

101

103

104

102

102102

115

102

109

105

108

106

107120 126

127

114

105

125

123

124

125

112

110

105

113

111

122

105117

118 119

110

(See page 5-4)

Cabinet (front) block assembly-2(See page 5-6)


5-6

DSC-F828


5-1-4. CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2


151 X-3953-802-1 CABINET (FRONT) ASSY152 3-087-116-01 BRACKET (FRONT), STRAP153 3-989-735-51 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2154 3-086-484-01 HOLDER, MICROPHONE155 3-080-222-11 SCREW(M1.7), TAPPING,P2

156 X-3953-804-2 UPPER ASSY, CABINET

157 3-087-108-01 CUSHION, MD158 1-478-227-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (TOP)159 1-805-389-11 DISPLAY PANEL, LIQUID CRYSTAL160 (Note) TAPE (A)MIC901 1-542-446-61 MICROPHONE

SP901 1-825-663-11 SPEAKER (1.6CM)

ns : not supplied

ns

152

151

155

155

153

153

ns

ns

SP901

154

158 153

160

156

157

159

153

ns

MIC901


5-7

DSC-F828


5-1-5. BTH BLOCK ASSEMBLYns : not supplied

201 3-080-222-11 SCREW(M1.7), TAPPING,P2202 A-7078-880-A LR-018 BOARD, COMPLETE203 3-086-491-01 SHEET, CF RADIATION204 3-969-380-01 SPRING, BATTERY205 3-375-114-71 SCREW

206 3-050-594-01 SPRING, COMPRESSION207 3-073-601-21 FOOT, RUBBER208 X-3953-805-2 HOLDER ASSY, BT209 3-989-735-51 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2210 1-860-538-11 FP-749 FLEXIBLE BOARD

211 1-815-853-13 CONNECTOR, MEMORY STICK212 A-7078-879-A CF-097 BOARD, COMPLETE213 3-087-187-01 RETAINER, SY214 A-7079-008-A SY-096 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)215 1-860-717-11 FP-756 FLEXIBLE BOARD

216 3-087-188-01 SHEET (B), CF RADIATION217 A-7078-881-A FP-748 BOARD, COMPLETE218 A-7078-883-A DD-204 BOARD, COMPLETE219 3-086-487-02 LABEL,FUSE REPLACEMENT CAUTION220 3-090-807-01 SHEET (MS)

221 1-500-227-21 BEAD, FERRITE222 1-818-138-11 CONNECTOR, CARD(COMPACT FLASH)223 3-090-809-01 CUSHION (SY)224 (Note1) TAPE (A)BT901 1-694-796-41 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY

0C405 1-100-734-11 CAP, ELECT (FLASH) 250MF 315V


DD-204

SY-096

A

A

BC

B

C

202

201

208

218

219209203

204

205

206 207

BT001

ns

ns

ns

ns

BT901

C405

: BT001 (Lithium battery) LR-018 board on the mount position. (See page 4-50)

201

209

215

211

210

209213

209

223

212

221

224

220

217

214

216

209

222




Note1 :For the part of 224: TAPE (A) (3-941-343-01) cut WOVEN(T0.25), FABRIC NON (3-076-631-01) into the desiredlength and use it.

5-8

DSC-F828


5-1-6. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY


251 3-989-735-51 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2252 1-478-229-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (UNDER)253 3-090-369-01 TAPE (F3)255 1-478-228-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL(MID)256 3-086-488-01 CUSHION, LCD

257 3-080-222-11 SCREW(M1.7), TAPPING,P2258 X-3953-806-2 CABINET (REAR) ASSY259 3-087-155-03 SHEET, ADHESIVE, LCD WINDOW

260 3-087-153-01 COVER, JACK261 3-087-157-01 BRACKET, STRAP262 3-051-124-01 FOOT, RUBBER263 X-3953-944-1 LID, CF ASSY (SERVICE)264 (Note1) TAPE (A)

LCD901 1-805-380-21 INDICATOR MODULE LIQUID CRYST0 ND901 1-478-145-11 BLOCK LIGHT GUIDE PLATE

ns : not supplied

A

A

251

251251

252

255

253

256

251

257

ns

ns

ns

ND901

LCD901

259

258

260

261

262

264

263

EVF assembly(See page 5-9)



Note1 :For the part of 264: TAPE (A) (3-941-343-01) cut WOVEN(T0.25), FABRIC NON (3-076-631-01) into the desiredlength and use it.

5-9

DSC-F828


5-1-7. EVF ASSEMBLY


ns : not supplied

LCD902

301

302

303

305

306

307304

ns

ns

301 A-7078-887-A LB-091 BOARD, COMPLETE302 3-072-214-01 GUIDE (20), LAMP303 3-072-211-01 ILLUMINATOR304 3-072-210-01 SHEET, PRISM

305 3-059-734-01 CUSHION (1), LCD306 X-3953-807-1 EVF ASSY307 3-950-044-01 RING, OLCD902 8-753-039-35 LCX044AK-1

5-10

DSC-F828

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

AJ-007 CF-097

A-7078-885-A AJ-007 BOARD, COMPLETE**********************

< CAPACITOR >

C201 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10.00% 50VC204 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10.00% 50V

< CONNECTOR >

CN201 1-817-548-11 CONNECTOR, FPC 6P

< DIODE >

D201 1-216-295-11 METAL CHIP 0 (Note)D202 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0D203 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0

< FERRITE BEAD >

FB201 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uHFB202 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uHFB203 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uHFB204 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uHFB205 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH

< JACK >

J201 1-793-995-21 JACK, SUPER SMALL TYPE (ACC (Accesory))************************************************************

A-7078-879-A CF-097 BOARD, COMPLETE**********************

< CAPACITOR >

C101 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16VC102 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16VC103 1-100-662-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V

< CONNECTOR >

CN101 1-794-505-21 CONNECTOR, FPC (ZIF) 51PCN103 1-818-139-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (CF CARD) 50P

< DIODE >

D101 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0

< FERRITE BEAD >

FB101 1-469-775-21 FERRITE 0uH

< RESISTOR >

R101 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16WR102 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16WR103 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16WR104 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0R105 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W

R106 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16WR107 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16WR108 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16WR109 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16WR110 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W




R127 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W************************************************************

A-7078-883-A DD-204 BOARD, COMPLETE**********************

(C405 is not included in this completed board)

< CAPACITOR >

C001 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16VC002 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16VC003 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10VC004 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10VC005 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10.00% 16V

C006 1-165-176-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10.00% 16VC007 1-162-964-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001PF 10% 50VC008 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10.00% 16VC009 1-119-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10.00% 10VC011 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V

C012 1-162-968-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF 10% 50VC013 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10VC014 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50VC016 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50VC018 1-162-967-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0033uF 10% 50V

C019 1-162-969-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0068uF 10% 50VC027 1-165-875-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 10% 10VC028 1-165-875-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 10% 10VC029 1-125-889-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10VC030 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V

C031 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10VC032 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10VC033 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10VC034 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10VC035 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V

C038 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3VC039 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3VC040 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3VC041 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3VC042 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V

C043 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3VC044 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10.00% 10VC045 1-127-861-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 16VC046 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10.00% 10VC053 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V

DD-204

Note :Resistor is mounted to the location where D201 is printed.

5-11


DSC-F828



C058 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10VC062 1-131-860-91 TANTAL. CHIP 4.7uF 20% 10VC065 1-135-993-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 10VC066 1-100-662-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3VC067 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20.00% 16V

C068 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20.00% 16VC069 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20.00% 16VC070 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20.00% 16VC401 1-100-055-11 CERAMIC CHIP 22uF 20% 16VC402 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V

C404 1-164-227-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 25V0C405 1-100-734-11 CAP, ELECT (FLASH) 250MF 315V

C406 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V

< CONNECTOR >

CN001 1-691-550-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (1.5MM)(SMD) 3PCN002 1-691-550-51 PIN, CONNECTOR (1.5MM)(SMD) 3PCN401 1-815-494-11 PIN, CONNECTOR 2PCN601 1-778-598-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 60PCN602 1-766-336-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P

< DIODE >

D001 8-719-421-67 DIODE MA132WK-(K8).SOD002 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0D003 8-719-158-49 DIODE MA8120-TXD004 8-719-027-76 DIODE 1SS357-TPH3D006 8-719-027-76 DIODE 1SS357-TPH3

D007 8-719-073-03 DIODE MA8082-(K8).S0D010 8-719-081-19 DIODE 1SS383(T5RSONY1)D011 8-719-081-19 DIODE 1SS383(T5RSONY1)D401 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0

0D402 6-500-237-01 DIODE HAU160C030TP

D403 8-719-048-98 DIODE RB160L-40TE25

< FUSE >

0F001 1-576-406-21 FUSE 1.4A/32V0F002 1-576-406-21 FUSE 1.4A/32V0F003 1-576-406-21 FUSE 1.4A/32V0F004 1-576-406-21 FUSE 1.4A/32V0F005 1-576-406-21 FUSE 1.4A/32V

0F006 1-576-406-21 FUSE 1.4A/32V

< FERRITE BEAD >

FB001 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH

< IC >

IC001 6-703-429-01 IC MB44A120APFV-G-BND-ERE1IC004 6-704-874-01 IC XC62KS0PXXMR

< COIL >

L001 1-419-881-11 INDUCTOR 47uHL002 1-456-137-11 INDUCTOR 22uHL003 1-424-846-11 INDUCTOR 0uHL004 1-456-137-11 INDUCTOR 22uHL005 1-456-137-11 INDUCTOR 22uH

L006 1-456-136-21 INDUCTOR 10uHL007 1-456-137-11 INDUCTOR 22uHL010 1-414-392-41 INDUCTOR 1uHL401 1-412-027-11 INDUCTOR 2.2uH

< LINE FILTER >

LF001 1-411-957-11 FILTER, COMMON MODE

< TRANSISTOR >

Q001 8-729-047-68 TRANSISTOR SSM3K03FE(TPL3)Q002 8-729-051-49 TRANSISTOR HAT1054R-ELQ003 8-729-804-41 TRANSISTOR 2SB1122-ST-TD-EQ004 6-550-119-01 TRANSISTOR DTC144EMT2LQ006 8-729-056-00 TRANSISTOR MCH3310-TL-E

Q007 8-729-053-76 TRANSISTOR CPH5802-TL-EQ008 8-729-053-76 TRANSISTOR CPH5802-TL-EQ009 8-729-053-76 TRANSISTOR CPH5802-TL-EQ010 8-729-053-76 TRANSISTOR CPH5802-TL-EQ011 8-729-053-76 TRANSISTOR CPH5802-TL-E

Q012 8-729-053-76 TRANSISTOR CPH5802-TL-EQ014 8-729-054-48 TRANSISTOR N1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3)Q015 6-550-560-01 TRANSISTOR LS5U17LPTLQ401 8-729-048-50 TRANSISTOR 2SK3018-T106Q402 8-729-426-31 TRANSISTOR XP1214-TXE

Q407 6-550-308-01 TRANSISTOR CPH3205-SONY-TL-E

< RESISTOR >

R002 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0R005 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16WR008 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16WR009 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16WR011 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0

R012 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16WR013 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16WR014 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16WR016 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16WR017 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W

R018 1-208-930-11 METAL CHIP 62K 0.5% 1/16WR019 1-216-150-91 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/8WR020 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16WR022 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16WR023 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W

R024 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16WR025 1-218-969-81 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16WR028 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16WR029 1-208-711-11 METAL CHIP 15K 0.5% 1/16WR030 1-218-849-11 METAL CHIP 1.2K 0.5% 1/16W

R031 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16WR032 1-208-709-11 METAL CHIP 12K 0.5% 1/16WR033 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16WR034 1-218-978-11 METAL CHIP 120K 0.5% 1/16WR035 1-208-713-11 METAL CHIP 18K 0.5% 1/16W

R036 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16WR039 1-216-789-11 METAL CHIP 2.2 5% 1/16WR040 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16WR041 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16WR042 1-208-927-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/16W

DD-204

5-12


DSC-F828

R043 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16WR044 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16WR048 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16WR049 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16WR401 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R402 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16WR403 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16WR404 1-218-942-11 RES-CHIP 120 5% 1/16WR405 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W

< TRANSFORMER >

0T401 1-443-157-21 TRANSFORMER, D.C.-D.C. CONVERT************************************************************

A-7078-881-A FP-748 BOARD, COMPLETE**********************

< CONNECTOR >

CN001 1-778-598-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 60PCN002 1-778-593-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 60P

************************************************************

A-7078-887-A LB-091 BOARD, COMPLETE**********************


< DIODE >

D001 6-500-375-01 DIODE NSCW455T-TC9 (BACKLIGHT)************************************************************

A-7078-880-A LR-018 BOARD, COMPLETE**********************

< BATTERY >

0BT001 1-756-191-31 BATTERY, LITHIUM (SECONDARY)

< SWITCH >

S001 1-692-088-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (RESET)************************************************************

A-7078-891-A LS-067 BOARD, COMPLETE**********************

(D001 is not included in this completed board)

< DIODE >

0D001 1-805-470-51 LASER UNIT (Note1)D002 8-719-073-03 DIODE MA8082-(K8).S0D003 8-719-073-03 DIODE MA8082-(K8).S0D004 8-719-064-07 DIODE SML-310LTT86 (Self-timer)

< SWITCH >

S001 1-786-180-31 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (FLASH OPEN DETECT)************************************************************

A-7078-890-A MT-067 BOARD, COMPLETE***********************

< CONNECTOR >


< SWITCH >

S001 1-786-179-31 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY)(MOTOR POSITION DETECT)

************************************************************

0 A-7078-889-A SI-037 BOARD, COMPLETE*********************

< DIODE >

D001 6-500-512-01 DIODE CL-330IRS-X-TU (Infrared ray emitter)

< COIL >

L001 1-456-193-11 COIL, TRIGGER************************************************************

A-7078-884-A ST-088 BOARD, COMPLETE**********************

< CAPACITOR >

C501 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10.00% 16VC502 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10VC503 1-137-723-21 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 250VC504 1-100-761-21 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 250VC505 1-165-875-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 10% 10V

C506 1-164-949-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 16V

< CONNECTOR >

CN501 1-766-352-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 22PCN502 1-815-494-11 PIN, CONNECTOR 2PCN503 1-778-164-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 16PCN504 1-779-327-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6PCN505 1-779-337-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 26P

< DIODE >

D502 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0D503 8-719-073-03 DIODE MA8082-(K8).S0D504 8-719-123-76 THYRISTOR 03P4J-T1D506 8-749-017-19 DIODE 02DZ10-TPH3D507 6-500-811-01 DIODE RR255L-400TE25

D508 8-719-027-76 DIODE 1SS357-TPH3

< FERRITE BEAD >

FB501 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uHFB502 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uHFB503 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uHFB504 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uHFB505 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH

< IC >

IC502 8-729-053-74 TRANSISTOR CY25AAJ-8-T13



DD-204 FP-748 LB-091 LR-018 LS-067 MT-067 SI-037 ST-088


Note1 :Adjustment is needed when laser unit is replaced.

5-13


DSC-F828

< TRANSISTOR >

Q501 6-550-237-01 TRANSISTOR 2SC5658T2LQ/RQ502 8-729-042-58 TRANSISTOR UN9111J-(K8).SOQ503 8-729-053-57 TRANSISTOR RN1902FE(TPLR3)Q504 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO

< RESISTOR >

R503 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16WR505 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16WR506 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16WR507 1-216-121-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/10WR508 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W

R509 1-220-254-11 RES-CHIP 56 5% 1/4WR510 1-220-254-11 RES-CHIP 56 5% 1/4WR511 1-216-097-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/10WR512 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16WR513 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W

R514 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W************************************************************

A-7078-878-A SW-410 BOARD, COMPLETE***********************

< CONNECTOR >


< RESISTOR >

R001 1-216-822-11 METAL CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16WR002 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16WR003 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16WR004 1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16WR005 1-218-867-11 METAL CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/10W

< SWITCH >

S001 1-786-179-11 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (OPEN(FLASH))S002 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FLASH)S003 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (MACRO)S004 1-786-179-11 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY)

(FOCUS (AUTO/MANUAL))S005 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (METERING MODE)

S006 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (BURST/BRACKET)S007 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD

(NIGHT SHOT/NIGHT FRAMING)************************************************************

ST-088 SW-410 SY-096

Electrical parts list of the SY-096 board isnot shown.Pages from 5-14 to 5-18 are not shown.

SY-096 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)*******************************

5-19


DSC-F828

UA-003

A-7078-888-A UA-003 BOARD, COMPLETE**********************

< CONNECTOR >

CN001 1-794-962-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE(USB 5P)

< DIODE >

D001 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0D002 8-719-073-03 DIODE MA8082-(K8).S0D003 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0D004 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0

< FERRITE BEAD >

FB001 1-500-444-11 FERRITE 0uH

< JACK >

J001 1-569-950-31 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (AUDIO/VIDEO)

< LINE FILTER >

LF001 1-456-583-11 INDUCTOR 0uH

< RESISTOR >

R001 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0R002 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0R003 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16WR004 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0R005 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0

R006 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W************************************************************

5-20E

DSC-F828

Checking supplied accessories.

Other accessories3-084-996-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE)(J)3-084-996-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION(ENGLISH)

(US,CND,AEP,UK,E,AUS,CH,JE,HK)3-084-996-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH/GERMAN)(CND,AEP)3-084-996-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE)

(AEP,E,JE)3-084-996-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/DUTCH)(AEP)

3-084-996-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONALCHINESE)(E,CH,JE,HK)

3-084-996-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (RUSSIAN/SWEDISH)(AEP)3-084-996-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC)(E)3-084-996-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN)(JE,KR)3-084-997-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE)(J)

3-087-904-01 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW (JAPANESE)(J)3-087-904-11 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW

(ENGLISH/FRENCH/GERMAN/SPANISH/ITALIAN/DUTCH/PORTUGUESE/TRADITIONAL CHINESE/

SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)(EXCEPT J)

Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your digital still camera.

• AbbreviationCND : Canadian modelAUS : Australian modelCH : Chinese modelHK : Hong Kong modelKR : Korea modelJE : Tourist modelJ : Japanese model



Power cord (Main lead) (1)(AEP, E model)0 1-769-608-11Power cord (Main lead) (1)(AUS model)0 1-696-819-11Power cord (Main lead) (1)(UK, HK model)0 1-783-374-11Power cord (Main lead) (1)(US, CND model)0 1-790-107-22Power cord (Main lead) (1)(JE, J model)0 1-790-732-12Power cord (Main lead) (1)(KR model)0 1-776-985-11Power cord (Main lead) (1)(CH model)0 1-782-476-13

CD-ROM(SPVD-013 (I) USB Driver) (1)(US, CND, J model)3-087-331-01CD-ROM(SPVD-013 USB Driver) (1)(AEP, UK, E, HK, JE, KR, AUS,CH model)3-087-330-01

CD-ROM(Image Data Converter) (1)3-087-661-01

AC adaptor (1) (AC-L15A)0 1-477-533-51

NP-FM50 battery pack (1)(not supplied)

A/V connecting cable (1)1-824-111-11

USB cable (1)1-827-038-11

2-pin conversion adaptor (1)(JE model)1-569-007-12

2-pin conversion adaptor (1)(E model)1-569-008-12

Clamp filter (Ferrite core) (for AC-L15A)1-543-798-21

Lens cap (1)X-3952-016-1

String assy capX-3953-980-1

Lens hood (1)3-086-481-01

S-houlder strap (1)3-071-638-11

DSC-F828

— 100 —Sony EMCS Co. 2004D1600-1

©2004.4Published by DI Technical Support Section

9-876-279-31

SECTION 6ADJUSTMENTS

ADJRevision HistoryRevision History

Ver 1.1 2004. 04

LinkLink

Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards

Before starting adjustment

Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards

Before starting adjustment

LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT

CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEW FINDER ADJUSTMENT

VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

INITIALIZATION OF DATA

PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT

CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT

LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT

CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEW FINDER ADJUSTMENT

VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

INITIALIZATION OF DATA

PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT

CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT

SERVICE MODE

SERVICE MODE

APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS)

SERVICE MODE

APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS)

SERVICE MODE

Sony EMCS Co.2004D1600-1

©2004.4Published by DI CS Strategy Div.9-876-279-52

Contents of LEVEL 2 and LEVEL 3 Service ManualCONTENTS

1. SERVICE NOTE2. DISASSEMBLY3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS ANDSCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

LEVEL 2a

a

OVERALLPOWERDD-204, LR-018, ST-088,LS-067, MT-067, SI-037,UA-003, LB-091, CF-097,SW-410, AJ-007 BOARDCONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(TOP)/(MID)/(UNDER)EXPLODED VIEWSELECTRICAL PARTS

LEVEL 3

SY-096 BOARD

a (SY-096 BOARD)



DSC-F828

Note: Be sure to carry out “Data Save”.

— 2 —

DSC-F828

TABLE OF CONTENTS6. ADJUSTMENT1. Before starting adjustment ··············································· 6-11-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards ···· 6-2

6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT ··························· 6-31-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT ················· 6-31-1-1.List of Service Tools ························································ 6-31-1-2.Preparations ····································································· 6-41-1-3.Discharging of the flashlight power supply ····················· 6-41-1-4.Precaution ········································································ 6-61. Setting the Switch ···························································· 6-62. Order of Adjustments ······················································ 6-63. Subjects ··········································································· 6-64. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box ······························· 6-7

1-2. INITIALIZATION OF DATA ········································· 6-81-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF DATA ········································· 6-81. Initializing All Pages Data ··············································· 6-82. Initializing Single Page Data ··········································· 6-83. 2F Page Adjustment Address ··········································· 6-84. 4F Page Adjustment Address ··········································· 6-85. 6E Page Adjustment Address ·········································· 6-96. 6F Page Adjustment Address ········································· 6-107. 8E Page Adjustment Address ········································ 6-118. 8F Page Adjustment Address ········································· 6-11

1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS····························· 6-121. Video Output Level Adjustment (SY-096 board) ·········· 6-12

1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ························ 6-131. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments ········ 6-132. IRIS Reset Sensor Adjustment ······································ 6-133. Flange Back Adjustment ··············································· 6-144. Flange Back Check ························································ 6-145. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-450) ·································· 6-156. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450) ································ 6-167. Color Shade Check ························································ 6-178. F No. Compensation ······················································ 6-189. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment ···································· 6-1810. Light Value Adjustment ················································· 6-1911. Linear Matrix and AWB Adjustment ····························· 6-2012. Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Normal mode) ········· 6-2213. Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Real mode) ·············· 6-2314. CCD Linearity Check ···················································· 6-2415. CCD White Defect Compensation Check ····················· 6-2616. CCD Black Defect Compensation Check ····················· 6-2717. Strobe Adjustment ························································· 6-2818. AF Laser Output Adjustment ········································ 6-2919. AF Laser Axis Check ···················································· 6-30

1-5. COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDERADJUSTMENT ····························································· 6-31

1. Data Setting during EVF System Adjustments ············· 6-312. EVF Initial Data Input ··················································· 6-313. VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board) ································· 6-324. Bright Adjustment (SY-096 board) ································ 6-325. Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board) ···························· 6-336. V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board) ····························· 6-337. White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board) ·················· 6-34

1-6. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··································· 6-351. Data Setting during LCD System Adjustments ·············6-352. LCD Initial Data Input ·················································· 6-353. VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board) ·································6-364. Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board) ···························· 6-365. V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board) ·····························6-376. White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board) ·················· 6-37

6-2. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 6-382-1. APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS) ············ 6-382-1-1.Using Method of SEUS ·················································6-381. Connection ·····································································6-382. Operation ······································································· 6-382-1-2.Precaution on Use of SEUS··········································· 6-38

2-2. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 6-391. Setting the Test Mode ···················································· 6-392. Bit value discrimination ················································ 6-393. Switch check (1) ···························································· 6-404. Switch check (2) ···························································· 6-405. Switch check (3) ···························································· 6-406. Switch check (4) ···························································· 6-417. Switch check (5) ···························································· 6-418. Switch check (6) ···························································· 6-419. LED, Segment LCD check ············································ 6-4110. Record of Use check ······················································ 6-4211. Self Diagnostics Log check ··········································· 6-42

* Color reproduction frame is shown on page 6-43.* AF illumination frame is shown on page 6-44.

6-1

DSC-F828

SECTION 6ADJUSTMENTS

1. Before starting adjustment

EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing BoardThe data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct.Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board.

Procedure 1Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a boardis replaced.

Remove the EEPROM and install it.

(Former board) (New board)

(Machine to be repaired) (Machine to be repaired)

(The same model of the same destination)

Save the data.

Download the data.

PC

Procedure 2Remove the EEPROM from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed EEPROMto the replaced board.

Procedure 3When the data cannot be saved due to defective EEPROM, or when the EEPROM cannot be removed orinstalled, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it.

After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check therespective items of the EVR data.(Refer to page 6-3 for the items to be checked.)

(Machine before starting repair) (Machine after a board is replaced)PC PC

Save the EVR data to a personal computer.

Download the saved data to a machine.

6-2

DSC-F828

Replaced parts Board EEPROM

Block replacement Mounted Parts replacement replacement replacement

z z

z z z z

z z z

z z z

z z z

z z z

z z z

z z z

z z z

z z z

z z z

z z z

z z z

z z z z

z z z z z

z z

z z z

z z z

z z z z

z z z

z z z z z z

z z

z z z

z z z z

z z z z

z z z z z

Len

s de

vice

Xen

on tu

be

EV

F bl

ock

LC

D u

nit (

LC

D90

2)

LC

D b

lock

LC

D u

nit (

LC

D90

1)

LC

D b

lock

Bac

k lig

ht u

nit

LB

-091

boa

rd D

001

(EV

F ba

ck li

ght)

LS-

067

boar

d D

001

(Las

er u

nit)

SY-0

96 b

oard

IC

301

(Cam

era

DSP

)

SY-0

96 b

oard

IC

303

(Vid

eo a

mp.

)

SY

-096

boa

rd I

C80

1 (L

CD

DR

IVE

R)

SY-0

96 b

oard

IC

902

(EV

F D

RIV

ER

)

LB

-091

boa

rd (

CO

MPL

ET

E)

LS-

067

boar

d (C

OM

PLE

TE

)

SY-0

96 b

oard

(C

OM

PLE

TE

)

SY-0

96 b

oard

IC

501

(Cam

era

DSP

)

(With

bui

lt-in

fla

sh m

emor

y)

Adjustment

Section

Initialization of data

Video

Camera

EVF

LCD

Adjustment

Initialization of data

Video output level adj.

Iris reset sensor adj.

Flange back adj.

Color shade check

F No. compensation

Mechanical shutter adj.

Light value adj.

Linear matrix and AWB adj.

Color reproduction check

CCD linearity check

CCD white defect compensation check

CCD black defect compensation check

Strobe adj.

AF laser output adj.

EVF initial data input

VCO adj.

Bright adj.

Contrast adj.

V COM adj.

White balance adj.

LCD initial data input

VCO adj.

Contrast adj.

V COM adj.

White balance adj.

Table. 6-1-1.

1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boardsWhen replacing main parts and boards, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.

6-3

DSC-F828

6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT

1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT

1-1-1. List of Service Tools• Oscilloscope • Color monitor • Vectorscope • AC power adapter• Calculator which can hexadecimal calculation

J-1 J-2 J-3

J-4

Pattern box PTB-1450J-6082-557-AorPattern box PTB-450J-6082-200-A

Clear chart forpattern box

For PTB-1450:J-6020-560-AFor PTB-450:J-6080-621-A

9 colors chart forpattern box

For PTB-1450:J-6020-562-A

Color chart forpattern box

For PTB-1450:J-6020-559-A

For PTB-450:J-6020-250-A

J-5 J-6

J-7 J-8

Mini pattern boxJ-6082-353-B

Camera tableJ-6082-384-A

Personal computerwith Widows98/98SE/ME/2000/XP installedand with two USBports

Siemens star chartJ-6080-875-A

J-9

J-10

Application foradjustment(SEUS)and HASP key(Note)

USB cable1-823-932-11

Fig. 6-1-1.

J-11

F828 C1 MATRIXAdjustment(Note)

Background paperJ-2501-130-A

Note: Contact our service headquarter of each area how to get the applicationfor adjustment (SEUS), HASP key and F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment.

J-12

6-4

DSC-F828

1-1-2. Preparations

1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 6-1-4.2) Set the MS/CF switch to MS (Memory stick).3) Start up the application for adjustment (SEUS).

Note1: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced STILL Mode)”1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01.2) Select page: 2F, address: 23, and write data: 11.3) Save the data.4) Wait for 2 sec.

The above procedure will enable the power (STILL mode) tobe turned on with POWER switch (Control switch block (TOP))disconnected. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the“Forced Power ON Mode”.

Note2: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced PLAY Mode)”1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01.2) Select page: 2F, address: 23, and write data: 12.3) Save the data.4) Wait for 2 sec.

The above procedure will enable the power (PALY mode) to beturned on with POWER switch (Control switch block (TOP))disconnected. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the“Forced Power ON Mode”.

Note3: Exiting the “Forced Power ON Mode”1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01.2) Select page: 2F, address: 23, and write data: 80.3) Save the data.4) Wait for 2 sec.5) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00.

1-1-3. Discharging of the flashlight power supplyThe capacitor which is used as power supply of flashlight is chargedwith 200V to 300V voltage. When disassembling the unit, dischargethis voltage in order to protect service engineers from electric shock.

Discharge procedure1. Remove the power supply (AC power adaptor or battery).2. Fabricate the discharging jig as shown in Fig. 6-1-3. locally by

yourself. Connect the discharging jig to the positive (+) andnegative (–) terminal of the flash voltage charge capacitor. Allowten seconds to discharge the voltage.

Fig. 6-1-2.

Fig. 6-1-3.

Front of the lens

About 6cm (PTB-1450)About 20cm (PTB-450)

Pattern box

DD-204

DD-204 board

Short jig(1kΩ /1W)

6-5

DSC-F828

Fig. 6-1-4.

Memory stick

Personal computer(with two USB ports)

AC IN

DC IN

USB

USB1

USB2HASP key

AC poweradaptor

[CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENT]

6-6

DSC-F828

H

A=

C=D

A AB

C D

Enlargement

V

Picture frame

A

Difference in level

Yello

wC

yan

Gre

enW

hite

Mag

enta

Red

Blu

e

Yello

wC

yan

Gre

enW

hite

Mag

enta

Red

Blu

e

Video terminaloutput waveform

Fig. b

Fig. a

B2

LCD screen or under scan monitor TV picture

1-1-4. Precaution1. Setting the SwitchUnless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and performadjustments.

Switch settings1. Mode dial ............................................. STILL (P AUTO) (P)2. ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end3. MS/CF ..................................................... MS (Memory stick)4. MACRO ( ) .................................................................. ON5. WHITE BALANCE ..................................................... AUTO

6. EV .................................................................................... 0EV7. FOCUS ......................................................................... AUTO8. USB CONNECT (SET UP setting) .......................NORMAL9. VIDEO OUT (SET UP setting) .................................... NTSC

2. Order of AdjustmentsBasically carry out adjustments in the order given.

Fig.6-1-5.

3. Subjects1) Color bar chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-450)

When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjustthe picture frame as shown in Fig. 6-1-5. (Standard pictureframe)

2) 9 colors chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-1450)When performing adjustments using the 9 colors chart, adjustthe picture frame as shown in Fig. 6-1-5. (Standard pictureframe)

Color bar chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-450)

Fig. c LCD screen or under scan monitor TV picture

A

C

C

Effective picture frame

White

Green Yellow W14

Red

Magenta

Cyan

Blue

B

C14

A2

B A

A = B

C14 : Filter for AWB 5800K adjustment

C =B3

Transparent window

Adjust the camera position and direction toobtain the output waveform shown in Fig. aand the LCD screen or the monitor TVdisplay shown in Fig. b.

Adjust the camera position and direction toobtain the LCD screen or the monitor TVdisplay shown in Fig. c.

3) Clear chart (Standard picture frame)(PTB-450/PTB-1450)Remove the color bar chart (PTB-450) or 9 colors chart (PTB-1450) from the pattern box and insert a clear chart in its place.(Do not perform zoom operations during this time.)

9 colors chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-1450)

6-7

DSC-F828

4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment BoxA dark room is required to provide an accurate strobe adjustment.If it is not available, prepare the flash adjustment box as given below;

1) Provide woody board A, B and C of 15 mm thickness.

woody board A (2 sheets)

400 mm

woody board B (2 sheets)

370 mm

woody board C (1 sheet)

700 mm

513 mm 513 mm 700 mm

700 mm730 mm

2) Apply black mat paint to one side of woody board A and B.3) Attach background paper (J-2501-130-A) to woody board C.4) Assemble so that the black sides and the background paper side

of woody board A, B and C are internal. (Fig. 6-1-7.)

Fig. 6-1-6.

woody board A

woody board B

woody board B

woody board C

woody board A

Fig. 6-1-7.

6-8

DSC-F828

1-2. INITIALIZATION OF DATA

1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF DATA

1. Initializing All Pages DataBy performing the following procedure, data of all the pages willbe initialized.

Initializing Method:1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01.2) Click [Sector Write] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS

SECTOR WRITE screen.3) Check that the SET ID is “03”.4) Click [All] of the ALL SELECT buttons to select all pages.

(Fig. 6-1-8. A)5) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the EEPROM of

the camera.6) Wait for 2 sec.7) Click [Close] to close the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen.

Modification of 4F, 8E Page DataIf all page data have been initialized, change the data of the “Fixeddata-2” address shown in the following tables by manual input.

1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01.2) Click [Page] on the SEUS screen, and input “4F” or “8E”.3) Click [Address], and input the “Fixed data-2” address.4) Click [Set], and input the new data.

Note: New data for changing are not shown in the table because theyare different in destination. When changing the data, copy thedata built in the same model. If copy the data built in the differentmodel, the camera may not operate.

5) Repeat steps 2 to 4 until all data of the “Fixed data-2” addressesare changed.

6) Click [Save] to write the changed data to the EEPROM of thecamera.

7) Wait for 2 sec.

Processing after Completing Initializing of data

Order Page Address Data Procedure

1 20 00 29 Set the data.


3 Check “Receive Paket Error” isdisplayed on the SEUS screen.

4 Turn on the power of the camera.

5 Click [Connect] on the SEUSscreen.

2. Initializing Single Page DataBy performing the following procedure, data of the page that youwant to initialize will be initialized.

Initializing Method:1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01.2) Click [Sector Write] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS

SECTOR WRITE screen.3) Check that the SET ID is “03”.4) Click [All] of the option buttons of the target page. (Fig. 6-1-8. B)5) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the EEPROM of

the camera.6) Wait for 2 sec.7) Click [Close] to close the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen.

Note: When 4F page or 8E page is initialized, perform “Modification of4F, 8E Page Data”. (Refer to “1. Initializing All Pages Data”.)

Processing after Completing Initializing of data




3 Check “Receive Paket Error” isdisplayed on the SEUS screen.

4 Turn on the power of the camera.

5 Click [Connect] on the SEUSscreen.

3. 2F Page Adjustment Address

Table. 6-1-2.


Table. 6-1-3.

B

A Fig. 6-1-8.

Address RemarkInitial value


46

47

88

94

95

96

97

A1

00

00

00

00

Fixed data-2

Fixed data-2

Fixed data-2

Recording counter

(Refer to “Record of Use check”

of “SERVICE MODE”(Page 6-42).)

Fixed data-2



23 80 Test mode

6-9

DSC-F828

5. 6E Page Adjustment Address

Table. 6-1-4.

3C

3D

3E

3F

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

72

73

74

75

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

8A

8B

8C

8D

8E

8F

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

9A

9B

9C

9D

9E

9F

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

0C

00

10

00

10

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

10

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

10

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

10

00

AWB 3200K/5800K standard data

input

Strobe adj.

Linear matrix adj.





04

05

06

07

08

09

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

20

21

24

25

26

27

28

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

3A

3B

1D

00

07

00

1B

00

08

00

1D

00

07

00

1B

00

08

00

1C

00

07

00

1B

00

08

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

0E

00

0E

00

0D

00

0F

00

0E

00

0E

00

0D

00

0F

00

0E

00

0E

00

0D

00

0F

00

AWB 3200K/5800K standard data

input

6-10

DSC-F828


46

47

48

49

4A

4B

4C

4D

4E

4F

50

51

52

53

54

5E

5F

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

6B

6C

6D

B8

B9

BA

BB

BC

BD

BE

BF

C0

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

C8

C9

CA

CB

CC

CD

CE

CF

D0

D1

D2

46

47

48

49

4A

4B

4C

4D

4E

4F

50

51

00

00

00

E0

80

00

00

00

00

00

30

FE

6D

FF

00

00

09

AC

09

B4

09

BD

09

A2

09

C3

00

00

00

00

00

37

2E

21

15

15

80

88

98

90

88

00

00

Flange back adj.

Auto focus illumination adj

IRIS reset sensor adj.

F No. compensation

Light value adj.

F No. compensation/







06

07

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

3A

3B

3C

3D

3E

40

41

42

43

44

45

40

00

40

FF

FF

FF

00

3A

FF

00

00

00

00

17

80

00

00

19

00

00

00

26

26

82

08

03

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

FF

40

41

42

43

44

45

Color shade check

AF laser output adj.

Flange back adj.

Flange back adj.

6-11

DSC-F828

Table. 6-1-5.

7. 8E Page Adjustment Address

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

D8

D9

DA

DB

DC

DD

DE

DF

E0

E1

E2

E3

E4

E5

E6

E7

E8

E9

EA

EB

EC

ED

EE

EF

00

00

00

00

14

FF

FF

FF

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00


Strobe adj.



6F page



C8 Fixed data-2

Table. 6-1-6.


Table. 6-1-7.



23

24

28

2A

2C

73

74

75

78

7A

7C

D0

80

76

90

80

72

80

A4

8D

90

80

38

80

VCO adj. (LCD)

V COM adj. (LCD)

White balance adj. (LCD)

Contrast adj. (LCD)

VCO adj. (EVF)

V COM adj. (EVF)

Bright adj. (EVF)

White balance adj. (EVF)

Contrast adj. (EVF)

Video output level adj.

6-12

DSC-F828

1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

1. Video Output Level Adjustment (SY-096 board)

Adjust the sync level of the composite video signal output.

Mode PLAY ( )

Signal No signal

Measurement Point Video terminal of AV OUT jack(75Ω terminated)

Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope

Adjustment Page 8F

Adjustment Address D0

Specified Value Sync level: A=286 ± 5mV (NTSC mode) A=300 ± 5mV (PAL mode)Burst level: B=286 ± 30mV (NTSC mode) B=300 ± 30mV (PAL mode)

Switch setting:VIDEO OUT (SETUP 2) ......................................... (NTSC mode)

............................................ (PAL mode)

Adjusting method:



2 60 C1 Read the data, and check it is “01”.


4 8F D0 Change the data and set the synclevel (A) to the specified value.

5 Check that the burst level (B)satisfies the specified value.

6 80 70 00 Write the data.

7 Save the data.

8 Wait for 2 sec.


Fig. 6-1-9.

H

A

B

6-13

DSC-F828

1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that thespecified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” aresatisfied.

1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments

Perform the following data setting before the camera systemadjustments.Note1: When the power is turned off, some data settings will be released.

So perform this data setting again when the power is turned off.



2 4F B7 01 Set the data.

3 2F 23 11 Set the data.

4 60 C1 Read the data, and check it is “02”.


6 60 6C 01 Set the data.


8 4F B9 Set Bit 0 of the data to “1”.(Note2)

9 7F 0E 20 Set the data.

10 7F 6A 20 Set the data.

11 Save the data.

12 Wait for 2 sec.

Note2: For the bit values, refer to “6-2. SERVICE MODE”, “2-2-2. Bitvalue discrimination”.

After completing the camera system adjustments, release the datasetting.



2 4F B7 00 Set the data.

3 4F B9 Set Bit 0 of the data to “0”.(Note2)


5 Save the data.

6 Wait for 2 sec.


2. IRIS Reset Sensor AdjustmentMeasuring the iris reset sensor output voltage, and compensate thedispersion of the reset position detecting voltage.

Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P)

Subject Clear chart

Measurement Point Data of page 6F, address: 5E, 6B

Measuring Instrument

Adjustment Page 6F

Adjustment Address 5E, 5F

Specified Value1 00

Specified Value2 80 to FF

Note1: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address:01, and set data: 00.

Switch setting:ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end

Adjusting method:


1 Check that “1. Data Settingduring Camera SystemAdjustments” is performed.

2 Check the ZOOM is WIDE end.

3 60 01 6F Set the data.

4 Wait for 5 sec.

5 60 02 Read the data, and check it is“01”. (Note2)

6 Wait for 2 sec.

7 6F 6B Read the data, and check itsatisfies the specified value 1.

8 6F 5E Read the data, and check itsatisfies the specified value 2.

Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F,address: 5E, 5F.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:



2 Turn off the power and back on.

3 Perform “Flange Back Adjustment”.

4 If finish the camera systemadjustments, release the datasetting.(See “1. Data Setting duringCamera System Adjustments”.)

6-14

DSC-F828

3. Flange Back Adjustment To adjust the flange back, compensate the dispersion of the zoomposition A/D value at WIDE end and TELE end.


Subject Arbitrary

Measurement Point Data of page: 6F, address: 24, 25, 3E


Adjustment Page 6F

Adjustment Address 18 to 3E, 40 to 53

Specified value1 00

Specified value2 0A to 40


Adjusting method:





4 Wait for 4 sec.

5 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”.

6 Wait for 2 sec.



9 Set the ZOOM to the WIDE end.


11 Wait for 1 sec.

12 60 01 B1 Set the data.

13 Wait for 1 sec.


15 Set the ZOOM to the TELE end.


17 Wait for 1 sec.


19 Wait for 1 sec.



22 Wait for 2 sec.

23 6F 3E Read the data, and check itsatisfies the specified value 1.

24 6F 24 Read the data, and check itsatisfies the specified value 2.


Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F,address: 18 to 3E, 40 to 53



1 Perform “Flange Back Check”.


4. Flange Back Check


Subject Siemens star(1.0m from the front of the lens)(Luminance : 200 to 400 lux)

Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor


Specified Value1 The lens is focused.

Specified Value2 Below 8% of diagonal length of theTV monitor (Note)

Note: Below 40mm when a 21 inches TV monitor is used.

Switch setting:FOCUS ......................................................................... AUTO

Checking method:



2 Place the siemens star 1.0mfrom the front of the lens.



5 Shoot the Siemens star with thezoom TELE end (200).

6 Check that center of the Siemensstar is located in the center ofthe TV monitor screen.

7 Check that the lens is focused.


9 For each of the zoom positions135, 100, 70, 50 and 35, checkthat the lens is focused.

10 Shoot the Siemens star with thezoom WIDE end (28).

11 Check that the lens is focused.

12 Check that distance between thecenter of the Siemens star andthe center of the TV monitorscreen satisfies the specifiedvalue2.





6-15

DSC-F828

5. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-450)


Subject Color bar chart and clear chart(Standard picture frame)About 20cm from the front of the lens

Measurement Point Video terminal of A/V OUT jack

Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and TV monitor

Specified Value A=C=B/2, E=F


Setting method:



2 Shoot the color bar chart withthe zoom WIDE end.

3 Adjust the direction and distancebetween the pattern box andcamera, and set the pictureframe to the specified position.

4 Adjust the focus.

5 Remove the color bar chart andset the clear chart.

6 Check that the whole of thescreen is white. If not, adjust thedirection and distance slightly.

7 10 44 Read the data, and this datanamed YH.

8 10 45 Read the data, and this datanamed YL.

9 Perform the followingadjustments.

How to reset the focus when it deviated:If the focus deviated due to some reason reset it in the followingmethod.





4 60 92 YL Set the data. (Note)

5 60 93 YH Set the data. (Note)


7 Wait until the movement of thelens stops.



Note: YH and YL are the data read in the “Setting method”.

Check on an oscilloscope

1. Horizontal period

Fig. 6-1-10.

2. Vertical period

Fig. 6-1-11.

Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode)

Fig. 6-1-12.

E=F

V

E F

Color bar chart picture frame Effective picture frame

A B C

B

A CA = C =

B2

6-16

DSC-F828

6. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450)


Subject 9 colors chart and clear chart(Standard picture frame) (Note1)About 6cm from the front of the lens


Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and TV monitor

Specified Value A=B, C=B/3

Note1: Check that the transparent window is in the lower right.


Setting method:



2 Shoot the 9 colors chart withthe zoom WIDE end.

3 Adjust the direction and distancebetween the pattern box andcamera, and set the pictureframe to the specified position.

4 Adjust the focus.

5 Remove the 9 colors chart andset the clear chart.

6 Check that the whole of thescreen is white. If not, adjust thedirection and distance slightly.

7 10 44 Read the data, and this datanamed YH.

8 10 45 Read the data, and this datanamed YL.

9 Perform the followingadjustments.

How to reset the focus when it deviated:If the focus deviated due to some reason reset it in the followingmethod.





4 60 92 YL Set the data. (Note2)

5 60 93 YH Set the data. (Note2)


7 Wait until the movement of thelens stops.



Note2: YH and YL are the data read in the “Setting method”.

Check on an oscilloscope

1. Horizontal period

Fig. 6-1-13.

2. Vertical period

Fig. 6-1-14.

Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode)on the LCD screen

Fig. 6-1-15.

BA A

A = B

C CB

V

C =B3

A

A = B

C

C

C14 : Filter for AWB 5800K adjustment

Effective picture frame

Transparent window

White

Green Yellow W14

Red

Magenta

Cyan

Blue

B

C14

C =B3

A2

B A

6-17

DSC-F828

7. Color Shade Check

7-1. Installing the “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ”Install the adjustment software “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ” in thePC.System requirements of the PC:

OS : Windows98/98SE/Me/2000/XPRAM : Recommend 256MB or higherUSB : USB2.0 or USB1.1 (USB2.0 is recommended. Two USB

connectors are required.)

Installing the “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ”:1) Extract “828matrix.zip” file and obtain “Setup.exe” file.2) Start up the “Setup.exe” and install the “F828 C1 MATRIX

ADJ”.Note1: Contact our service headquarter of each area how to get the

“828matrix.zip” file.Note2: For “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ” adjustment software’s operating,

the following two conditions need to be satisfied.• The application for adjustment (SEUS) is already installed in

the PC.• The PC is equipped with the HASP key.

7-2. Color Shade CheckCompensate the color shade.

Mode STILL (P AUTO) ( P )

Subject Clear chart (PTB-1450)(Standard picture frame)About 6cm from the front of the lens

Adjustment Page 6F

Adjustment Address 06, 07

Note1: Check that there are no reflections on the clear chart.


Adjusting method:1) Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System

Adjustments” is performed.2) Start the F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ on the PC.3) Click [Connect] on the F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment screen.

If the connection is normal, the F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustmentscreen will be as shown in bellow, indicating the “connected”state

4) Check that the picture frame is the standard picture frame.5) Click [Color Shading Adjustment] on the F828 C1 MATRIX

Adjustment screen.

Fig. 6-1-16.

6) Color shading adjustment is performed automatically.

Fig. 6-1-17.

7) When the “Completion of adjustment” message is displayed.Click the [OK] button.

Fig. 6-1-18.

8) If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting.(See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.)

6-18

DSC-F828

8. F No. CompensationAdjusted the dispersion of the iris to every to every F number, andcompensate the exposure.


Subject Clear chart (PTB-1450/PTB-450)(Standard picture frame)

Measurement Point Data of page: 6F, address: 6B


Adjustment Page 6F

Adjustment Address 60 to 64, 6B to 6D

Specified value 00



Adjusting method:



2 Check the picture frame. Ifdeviated, perform “5. or 6.Picture Frame Setting”.

3 60 01 BB Set the data.

4 Wait for 15 sec.


6 6F 6B Read the data, and check itsatisfies the specified value.

Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F,address: 60 to 64, 6B to 6D.





9. Mechanical Shutter AdjustmentAdjust the dispersion of the opening/closing time and the closingloss rate of the mechanical shutter. and compensate the exposure.



Measurement Point Data of page: 6F, address: 6B


Adjustment Page 6F

Adjustment Address 6B to 6D, B8 to D7

Specified value 00



Adjusting method:




3 60 01 AD Set the data.

4 Wait until the movement of theshutter stops.


6 6F 6B Read the data, and check itsatisfies the specified value.

Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F,address: 6B to 6D, B8 to D7.





6-19

DSC-F828

10. Light Value AdjustmentAdjust the standard LV value.



Measurement Point Data of page: 10, address: 0C, 0D

Measuring Instrument Data of page: 6F, address: 65

Adjustment Page 6F

Adjustment Address 65 to 67

Specified value1 0FE0 to 1020

Specified value2 40 to 60



Adjusting method:




3 60 01 0D Set the data.

4 Wait for 2 sec.


6 10 0C Read the data, and this data isnamed D0C.

7 10 0D Read the data, and this data isnamed D0D.

8 Calculate DLV using thefollowing equation(Hexadecimal calculation) DLV = D0C × 100 + D0D

10 Check that DLV satisfies thespecified value1.

11 6F 65 Read the data, and check itsatisfies the specified value2.

Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F,address: 65 to 67.





6-20

DSC-F828

11. Linear Matrix and AWB Adjustment

11-1. Preparation (Get Reference Data)In this work, acquire a reference data for the liner matrix adjustmentusing a DSC-F828 camera that operates normally. And saves thedata in the inside of the PC. Therefore, if the same pattern boxand the same 9 colors chart are used, it is not necessary toperform “Get Reference Data” again. The reference data(GodRawData.CSV) is saved in the ProgramFiles\Sony\F828C1MATRIX holder of the C drive.


Subject 9 colors chart (PTB-1450)(Standard picture frame)About 6cm from the front of the lens

Note1: When the reference data is acquired using a non-adjusted camera.The linear matrix adjustment cannot be performed correctly.

Switch setting:ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE endMACRO ............................................................................ ONFOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL

Adjusting method:1) Prepare a DSC-F828 camera that operates normally, and this

camera is named a reference camera.2) Remove the camera under adjustment and installed the

reference camera instead.3) Set up the switches of the reference camera as above-mentioned.4) Shoot the 9 colors chart with the standard picture frame. (Refer

to “6. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450)”.5) Adjust the focus..6) Start the F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ on the PC.7) Click [Connect] on the F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment screen.8) Click [Get Reference Data] of the file menu of the F828 C1

MATRIX Adjustment screen.Note2: When the “File over write” message is displayed, a reference data

file (GodRawData.CSV) exists already in the Program Files\Sony\F828C1MATRIX holder of the C drive. If you want to save thisfile, rename it or move it to other holder.

Fig. 6-1-19.

9) Acquisition of the reference data is performed automatically.Note3: When the “Framing check” message is displayed, correct the

picture frame, and repeat from step 8).

Fig. 6-1-20.

10) When the “Completion of get reference data” message isdisplayed. Click the [OK] button.

Fig. 6-1-21.

11) Remove the reference camera and installed the camera underadjustment instead.

6-21

DSC-F828

11-2. Linear Matrix and AWB AdjustmentThis adjustment does the following adjustment items automatically.

Linear matrix adjustmentCompensate the dispersion of the linear matrix vale of theCCD imager.

AWB 3200K/5800K (Mon) standard data inputAcquire the white balance standard data at 3200K and 5800Kin monitoring mode.

AWB 3200K/5800K (Cap) standard data inputAcquire the white balance standard data at 3200K and 5800Kin capture mode.


Subject 9 colors chart (PTB-1450)(Standard picture frame)About 6cm from the front of the lens

Adjustment Page 6E

Adjustment Address 80 to 9F (Linear matrix adjustment)04 to 21, 24 to 49 (AWB 3200K/5800K standard data input)


Adjusting method:1) Install the camera for adjustment.2) Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”

is performed.3) Set up the switches of the reference camera as above-mentioned.4) Shoot the 9 colors chart with the standard picture frame. (Refer

to “6. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450)”.5) Adjust the focus..6) Start the F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ on the PC.7) Click [Connect] on the F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment screen.8) Click [Linear Matrix and AWB Adjustment] on the F828 C1

MATRIX Adjustment screen.

Fig. 6-1-22.

9) The following adjustments are performed automatically.Linear matrix adjustmentAWB 3200K/5800K (Mon) standard data inputAWB 3200K/5800K (Cap) standard data input

Note: When the “Framing check” message is displayed, correct the pictureframe, and repeat from step 7).

When the “File C:\ProgramFiles\Sony\F828C1MATRIX\GodRawData.CSV can not be open” message is displayed, thereference data file (GodRawData.CSV) for the liner matrixadjustment is not in the inside of the PC. Therefore, perform “11-1.Preparation (Get Reference Data)”.

Fig. 6-1-23.

Fig. 6-1-24.

10) When the “Completion of adjustment” message is displayed.Click the [OK] button.

Fig. 6-1-25.

11) If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting.(See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.)

6-22

DSC-F828

12. Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Normal mode)Adjust the color reproduction of yellow, red, blue and cyan so thatproper color reproduction is produced.


Subject 9 colors chart (PTB-1450)Color bar chart (PTB-450)(Standard picture frame)


Measuring Instrument NTSC vectorscope

Specified Value Each center of six color luminancepoints should settle within each colorreproduction frame.

Note: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address:01, and set data: 00.

Switch setting:ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE endVIDEO OUT (SET UP setting) .................................... NTSC

Adjusting method:




3 7A 18 Read the data, and memorize it.

4 7A 18 00 Set the data.


6 60 01 AB Set the data.

7 Wait for 1 sec.

8 Adjust the GAIN and PHASE ofthe vectorscope so that the burstluminance point is set at thespecified position.

9 Check that each center of sixcolor luminance points is set ineach color reproduction frame.




2 7A 18 Set the data memorized at“Adjusting method”.

3 Wait for 1 sec.


5 Perform “Color ReproductionCheck”.If finish the camera systemadjustments, release the datasetting.(See “1. Data Setting duringCamera System Adjustments”.)

For CAP-Normal mode

Fig. 6-1-26.

Burst position

6-23

DSC-F828

13. Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Real mode)Adjust the color reproduction of yellow, red, blue and cyan so thatproper color reproduction is produced.


Subject 9 colors chart (PTB-1450)Color bar chart (PTB-450)(Standard picture frame)


Measuring Instrument NTSC vectorscope

Specified Value Each center of six color luminancepoints should settle within each colorreproduction frame.

Note: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address:01, and set data: 00.

Switch setting:ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE endVIDEO OUT (SET UP setting) .................................... NTSC

Adjusting method:





4 7A 24 Read the data, and memorize it.

5 7A 24 00 Set the data.


7 60 01 AB Set the data.

8 Wait for 1 sec.

9 Adjust the GAIN and PHASE ofthe vectorscope so that the burstluminance point is set at thespecified position.

10 Check that each center of sixcolor luminance points is set ineach color reproduction frame.




2 7A 24 Set the data memorized at“Adjusting method”.


4 Wait for 1 sec.


6 Perform the next adjustment.If finish the camera systemadjustments, release the datasetting.(See “1. Data Setting duringCamera System Adjustments”.)

For CAP-Real mode

Fig. 6-1-27.

Burst position

6-24

DSC-F828

14. CCD Linearity CheckData picking is done to keep output linearity of the CCD imager,even if the input level of CCD imager changes.

Mode STILL(P AUTO) (P)


Measurement Point Data of page: 10, address: 80, 81, 82, 83


Specified value1 97 to 103 (Note1)






Note1: Decimal number.Note2: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address:

01, and set data: 00.Note3: For the bit values, refer to “6-2. SERVICE MODE”, “2-2. 2. Bit

value discrimination”.


Preparation:


1 Install the clear chart.



4 75 09 Read the data, and memorize it.


6 77 F6 Read the data, and memorize it.

7 77 F6 Set Bit2 of the data to “0”. (Note3)








15 60 12 9F Set the data.


17 75 17 AA Set the data.




21 75 19 E8 Set the data.

22 75 1A Read the data, and memorize it.

23 75 1A 54 Set the data.

24 75 1B Read the data, and memorize it.

25 75 1B 74 Set the data.

26 Wait for 2 sec.

Checking method:


1 Perform “Preparation” beforethis adjustment.

2 60 01 F9 Set the data.

3 Wait for 2 sec.

4 60 E1 Read the data, and check it is “08”.

5 10 80 Read the data, and this data isnamed D80.


7 Calculate DRG0 using thefollowing equation(Hexadecimal calculation) DRG0 = D80 × 100 + D81



10 Calculate DBG0 using thefollowing equation(Hexadecimal calculation) DBG0 = D82 × 100 + D83


12 60 E1 00 Set the data.


14 Wait for 2 sec.


16 Wait for 2 sec.










26 77 72 0C Set the data.

27 Wait for 2 sec.


29 Wait for 2 sec.




6-25

DSC-F828








39 60 12 A2 Set the data.


41 Wait for 2 sec.


43 Wait for 2 sec.




47 Calculate DRG3 using thefollowing equation(Hexadecimal calculation)DRG3 = D80 × 100 + D81




51 Convert DRG0, DBG0, DRG1, DBG1,DRG2, DBG2, DRG3 and DBG3 todecimal number, and obtainDRG0’, DBG0’, DRG1’, DBG1’,DRG2’, DBG2’, DRG3’ and DBG3’.

52 Calculate R/G ratio (1), B/G ratio(1), R/G ratio (2), B/G ratio (2),R/G ratio (3) and B/G ratio (3),using the following equations(Decimal calculation) R/G ratio (1) = (DRG1’/DRG0’) × 100 B/G ratio (1) = (DBG1’/DBG0’) × 100 R/G ratio (2) = (DRG2’/DRG0’) × 100 B/G ratio (2) = (DBG2’/DBG0’) × 100 R/G ratio (3) = (DRG3’/DRG0’) × 100 B/G ratio (3) = (DBG3’/DBG0’) × 100

Linearity check of highluminance

53 Check that R/G ratio (1) satisfiesthe specified value 1. (Decimalnumber)

54 Check that B/G ratio (1) satisfiesthe specified value 4. (Decimalnumber)


Linearity check of lowluminance



Linearity check of very lowluminance









5 75 09 Set the data memorized at“Preparation”.

6 77 F6 Set the data memorized at“Preparation”.







13 75 1A Set the data memorized at“Preparation”.

14 75 1B Set the data memorized at“Preparation”.

15 Save the data.

16 Wait for 2 sec.

17 Perform next adjustments.If finish the camera systemadjustments, release the datasetting.(See “1. Data Setting duringCamera System Adjustments”.)

6-26

DSC-F828

15. CCD White Defect Compensation CheckThe positions of the white defective pixel are detected, and checkthat the pixels can be corrected.



Measurement Point Data of page: 60, address: 55


Specified value 1 00 to 40

Specified value 2 00


Note2: The white defective pixels are influenced by temperature.Therefore, perform adjustment after the power is turned on, andsufficient time passes, and the camera gets warm.


Adjusting method:




3 7D 64 Read the data, and memorizethe data.

4 7D 64 1E Set the data.

5 7D 69 Read the data, and memorize thedata.

6 7D 69 28 Set the data.

7 60 01 8B Set the data.

8 Wait for about 20 sec.


10 60 55 Read the data, and check itsatisfies the specified value 1.


12 Wait for 1 sec.

13 7D 64 0F Set the data.

14 7D 69 C0 Set the data.



17 60 02 Read the data, and check it is“01”.





2 Wait for 1 sec.

3 7D 64 Set the data memorized at“Adjusting method”.


5 Save the data.

6 Wait for 2 sec.


6-27

DSC-F828

16. CCD Black Defect Compensation CheckThe positions of the black defective pixel are detected, and checkthat the pixels can be corrected. And confirms that there is no trashin the surface of the CCD imager, the optical filter and the inside ofthe lens.





Specified value 1 00 to 30

Specified value 2 00

Note1: Check that there are no dust, no dirt and no reflection on the clearchart.

Note2: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address:01, and Set data: 00.

Switch setting:ZOOM ....................................................................... 70 (mm)

Adjusting method:




3 7D 65 Read the data, and memorize it.

4 7D 65 0A Set the data.


6 Rotate ZOOM ring and set theZOOM to “70” position.





11 Wait for 1 sec.


13 Check that the whole of thescreen is white.

14 60 01 8D Set the data.


16 60 02 Read the data, and check it is“01”.

17 60 55 Read the data, and check itsatisfies the specified value 1.If the data is “00”, proceed to“Processing after CompletingAdjustments”


19 Wait for 1 sec.

20 7D 65 0E Set the data.








2 Wait for 1 sec.




6 Save the data.

7 Wait for 2sec.

8 Set the ZOOM to WIDE end.


6-28

DSC-F828

17. Strobe AdjustmentAdjust the light level and white balance when the strobe light flashes.


Subject Background paper (J-2501-130-A)(50cm from the front of the lens)

Measurement Point Data of page 6F, address: DC

Measuring Instrument Data of page 6E, address: 4F

Adjustment Page 6F 6E

Adjustment Address D8 to EF 72 to 75

Specified Value1 03 to 09

Specified Value2 00

Note1: Perform this adjustment in the dark room or use the flashadjustment box.

Note2: Any light other than the strobe light should not light up the plate.Note3: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only

once.Note4: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address:

01, and set data: 00.

Switch setting:ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE endFLASH ......................................................................... OPEN

Adjusting method:




3 60 92 FF Set the data.




7 Wait for 5 sec.


9 6E 4F FF Set the data.


11 Check the flashing.


13 6F D8 Read the data, and check it is “00”.


15 Wait for 5 sec.

16 60 ED Read the data, and check it is “02”.

17 Wait for 1 sec.

18 60 01 E7 Set the data.

19 Check the flashing.


21 6F D8 Read the data, and check it is “00”.

22 6F DC Read the data, and check itsatisfies the specified value 1.

23 6E 4F Read the data, and check itsatisfies the specified value 2.

Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F,address: D8 to EF, and to page: 6E, address: 72 to 75.









6-29

DSC-F828

18. AF Laser Output AdjustmentAdjust the AF laser output power.


Subject Background paper (J-2501-130-A).(50cm from the front of the lens)

Measurement Point Data of page 6F, address: 13


Adjustment Page 6F

Adjustment Address 10 to 16

Specified Value 00

Note1: Perform this adjustment in the dark room or use the flashadjustment box.

Note2: Any light other than the strobe light should not light up the plate.


Adjusting method:





4 60 01 AF Write the data.

5 Check that the AF laser is lit.

6 Wait for 8 sec.



Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F,address: 10 to 16.





6-30

DSC-F828

19. AF Laser Axis CheckCheck the AF laser optical axis.

Mode STILL(P AUTO) (P)

Subject Background paper (J-2501-130-A)(1m from the front of the lens)

Measurement Point Monitor TV (under scan)


Specified Value All hologram patterns are within theinspection frame.

Note1: Perform this adjustment in the dark room.

Preparations:1) Take a copy of the AF Laser axis frame with a clear sheet.

(Reduce or enlarge the frame in same size as the effective pictureframe of the monitor TV.)

Adjusting method:





4 Set the ZOOM to WIDE end.




8 Wait for 3 sec.




12 60 23 0A Set the data.

13 Check that all hologram patternsare within the inspection frame.(Fig. 6-1-15.)

14 Set the ZOOM to TELE end.




18 Wait for 3 sec.



21 60 14 8A Set the data.


23 Check that all hologram patternsare not unfocused.

Fig. 6-1-28.












6-31

DSC-F828

1-5. COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDERADJUSTMENT

Note1: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damagescaused by static electricity.

Note2: If you perform the adjustments with FINDER/LCD switch (Controlswitch block (UNDER)) removed, set the following data.1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: 1A.2) Select page: 80, address: 11, and set data: 01.Reset the data after completing adjustment.1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: FF.2) Select page: 80, address: 11, and set data: 00.

Switch setting:FINDER/LCD .......................................................... FINDER

1. Data Setting during EVF System AdjustmentsPerform the following data setting before the EVF systemadjustments.Note: When the power is turned off, some data settings will be released.





After completing the EVF system adjustments, release the datasetting.



2 Save the data.

3 Wait for 2 sec.


2. EVF Initial Data Input

Mode PLAY ( )

Signal Arbitrary

Adjustment Page 8F

Adjustment Address 70, 71, 73 to 78, 7A, 7C

Adjusting method:1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01.2) Select page: 8F, and set the data in the following table.3) Save the data.4) Wait for 2sec.5) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Address70

71

73

74

75

76

77

78

7A

7C

RemarkFixed data

Fixed data

VCO adj.

V COM adj.

Bright adj.

Fixed data

Fixed data

White balance adj.

White balance adj.

Contrast adj.

53

96

80

A4

8D

40

00

90

80

38

Data

6-32

DSC-F828

3. VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board)Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen willbe blurred.

Mode PLAY ( )

Subject Arbitrary



Adjustment Page 8F

Adjustment Address 73

Specified Value 01

Note1: A memory stick must be inserted.

Adjusting method:


1 Check that “1. Data Settingduring EVF SystemAdjustments” is performed.

2 8F 84 2F Set the data.





7 Wait for 1 sec.


9 Wait for 1 sec.

10 If finish the EVF systemadjustments, release the datasetting.(See “1. Data Setting duringEVF System Adjustments”.)

Note2: If the data is other than “01”, adjustment has errors. See thefollowing table.

4. Bright Adjustment (SY-096 board)Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specifiedvalue. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated(whitish).

Mode PLAY ( )

Subject Arbitrary



Adjustment Page 8F


Specified Value 01


Adjusting method:



2 8F 88 9F Set the data.





7 Wait for 1 sec.


9 Wait for 1 sec.



Data of page: 80,address: 02

01

10

20

30

40

50

Contents of adjustment error

Normally finished

Reached an upper limit

Reached a lower limit

Time out

Out of adjustment range

Adjustment is impossible


01

10

20

30

40

50


Normally finished



Time out



6-33

DSC-F828

5. Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board)Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specifiedvalue. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated(whitish).

Mode PLAY ( )

Subject Arbitrary



Adjustment Page 8F

Adjustment Address 7C

Specified Value 01


Adjusting method:








7 Wait for 1 sec.


9 Wait for 1 sec.



6. V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board)Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to thespecified value.If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker andconspicuous vertical lines.

Mode PLAY ( )

Subject Arbitrary



Adjustment Page 8F


Specified Value 01


Adjusting method:



2 8F 8C 03 Set the data.





7 Wait for 1 sec.


9 Wait for 1 sec.




01

10

20

30

40

50


Normally finished



Time out




01

10

20

30

40

50


Normally finished



Time out



6-34

DSC-F828

7. White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board)Correct the white balance.If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced.

Mode PLAY ( )

Subject Arbitrary

Measurement Point Check on LCD display


Adjustment Page 8F

Adjustment Address 78, 7A

Specified Value The EVF screen should not becolored.

Note1: Use the AC power adaptor during this adjustment.Note2: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.

If necessary, adjust them.1. LCD panel2. Light induction plate3. IC902

Adjusting method:







6 8F 78 Check that the LCD screen isnot colored. If not colored,proceed to step 10.

7 8F 78 Change the data so that the LCDscreen is not colored.

8 8F 7A Change the data so that the LCDscreen is not colored.

9 8F 7A If the LCD screen is colored,repeat steps 7 to 9.


11 Save the data.

12 Wait for 2 sec.


6-35

DSC-F828

1-6. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT

Note1: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damagescaused by static electricity.

Note2: If you perform the adjustments with FINDER/LCD switch (Controlswitch block (UNDER)) removed, set the following data.1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: 1A.2) Select page: 80, address: 11, and set data: 00.Reset the data after completing adjustment.1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: FF.2) Select page: 80, address: 11, and set data: 00.

Switch setting:FINDER/LCD ................................................................. LCD

1. Data Setting during LCD System AdjustmentsPerform the following data setting before the LCD systemadjustments.Note1: When the power is turned off, some data settings will be released.





After completing the LCD system adjustments, release the datasetting.



2 Save the data.

3 Wait for 2 sec.


2. LCD Initial Data Input

Mode PLAY ( )

Signal Arbitrary

Adjustment Page 8F

Adjustment Address 20, 21, 23 to 28, 2A, 2C

Adjusting method:1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01.2) Select page: 8F, and write the data in the following table.3) Save the data.4) Wait for 2sec.5) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Address20

21

23

24

25

26

27

28

2A

2C

RemarkFixed data

Fixed data

VCO adj.

VCOM adj.

Fixed data

Fixed data

Fixed data

White balance adj.

White balance adj.

Contrast adj.

A5

19

80

76

84

00

63

90

80

72

Data

6-36

DSC-F828

3. VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board)Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen willbe blurred.

Mode PLAY ( )

Subject Arbitrary



Adjustment Page 8F


Specified Value 01


Adjusting method:


1 Check that “1. Data Settingduring LCD SystemAdjustments” is performed.

2 8F 34 1D Set the data.





7 Wait for 1 sec.


9 Wait for 1 sec.

10 If finish the LCD systemadjustments, release the datasetting.(See “1. Data Setting duringLCD System Adjustments”.)


4. Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board)Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specifiedvalue. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated(whitish).

Mode PLAY ( )

Subject Arbitrary



Adjustment Page 8F

Adjustment Address 2C

Specified Value 01


Adjusting method:


1 Check that “1. Data Settingduring LCD SystemAdjustments” is performed.






7 Wait for 1 sec.


9 Wait for 1 sec.




01

10

20

30

40

50


Normally finished



Time out




01

10

20

30

40

50


Normally finished



Time out



6-37

DSC-F828

5. V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board)Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to thespecified value.If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker andconspicuous vertical lines.

Mode PLAY ( )

Subject Arbitrary



Adjustment Page 8F


Specified Value The brightness difference between thesection A and section B is minimum.

Note: A memory stick must be inserted.

Adjusting method:


1 Check that “1. Data Settingduring LCD System Adjust-ments” is performed.



4 8F 24 Change the data so that thebrightness of the section A andthat of the section B is equal.



7 Save the data.

8 Wait for 2 sec.

9 If finish the LCD system adjust-ments, release the data setting.(See “1. Data Setting duringLCD System Adjustments”.)

6. White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board)Correct the white balance.If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced.

Mode PLAY ( )

Subject Arbitrary



Adjustment Page 8F

Adjustment Address 28, 2A

Specified Value The LCD screen should not be colored.

Note1: Use the AC power adaptor during this adjustment.Note2: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.

If necessary, adjust them.1. LCD panel2. Light induction plate3. IC801

Adjusting method:


1 Check that “1. Data Settingduring LCD System Adjust-ments” is performed.





6 8F 28 Check that the LCD screen isnot colored. If not colored,proceed to step 10.

7 8F 28 Change the data so that the LCDscreen is not colored.

8 8F 2A Change the data so that the LCDscreen is not colored.

9 8F 2A If the LCD screen is colored,repeat steps 7 to 9.


11 Save the data.

12 Wait for 2 sec.


Fig. 6-1-16.

A

A

A

A

B

B

B

B

6-38

DSC-F828

6-2. SERVICE MODE

2-1. APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS)The application for adjustment (SEUS) is used for changing thecalculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The SEUSperforms bi-directional communication between the personalcomputer (PC) and the unit using the USB signal. The resultantdata of this bi-directional communication is written in the non-volatile memory.

2-1-1. Using Method of SEUSSwitch setting:

MS/CF ..................................................... MS (Memory stick)1. Connection1) Connect the HASP key to the USB port of the PC.2) Connect the camera to another USB port of the PC.3) Insert a memory stick to the camera.4) Confirm that the camera starts in the USB mode.5) Start the SEUS on the PC.6) Click [Connect] on the SEUS screen. If the connection is

normal, the SEUS screen will be as shown in Fig. 6-2-1,indicating the “connected” state.

Note: The SEUS will go in “disconnect” state, if the camera is turned off(for instance, by resetting the unit). In such a case, click [Connect]on the SEUS screen to restore the “connected” state.

2. Operation

• Page changeTo change the page, click [Page] on the SEUS screen and enterthe page to be changed. The page is displayed in hexadecimalnotation.

• Address changeTo change the address, click [Address] on the SEUS screenand enter the address to be changed. Or click [B] to increasethe address, click [b] to decrease the address. The address isdisplayed in hexadecimal notation.

• Data changeTo change the data, click [Set] on the SEUS screen and enterthe data. Or click [v] to increase the data, click [V] to decreasethe data. The data is displayed in hexadecimal notation.This operation does not write the data to the nonvolatilememory. If you want to write the changed data, click [Save] towrite it.

• Data savingTo write the all changed data to the nonvolatile memory,click [Save] on the SEUS screen. and wait for 2 sec.Note: Even if [Write] or [Store] on the SEUS screen is clicked, the

data can not be write to the nonvolatile memory.

• Data readingThe data displayed on the SEUS screen are the data values atthe time when the pages and addresses were set, and they arenot updated automatically. To check the data change, click[Read] on the SEUS screen and update the displayed data.

2-1-2. Precaution on Use of SEUSMishandling of the SEUS may erase the correct adjustment data attimes. To prevent this, it is recommended that all adjustment databe saved before beginning adjustments.

1) Click [Page Edit] on the SEUS screen.2) Click [Page], and enter the page number to be saved.3) Click [Read] to read the data to be saved from the camera.4) Click [File] and save the data to the PC.

Fig. 6-2-1.

6-39

DSC-F828

2-2. SERVICE MODE

1. Setting the Test Mode

Page 2F Address 23

Data Function

80 Normal

11 Forced STILL mode power ON

12 Forced PLAY mode power ON

04 Forced MOVIE mode power ON

• Before setting the data, select page: 00, address: 01, and setdata: 01.

• For page 2F, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memoryby saving data. In this case, take note that the test mode willnot be exited even when the main power is turned off.

• After completing adjustments/repairs, release the data setting .1)Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01.2)Select page: 2F, address: 23, and set data: 80.3)Save the data.4)Wait for 2 sec.5)Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00.

2. Bit value discriminationBit values must be discriminated using the hexadecimal data forfollowing items. Use the table below to discriminate if the bit valueis “1” or “0”.

Examples: If the hexadecimal data is “8E”, the bit values for bit7 to bit4are shown in the A column, and the bit values for bit3 to bit0are shown in the B column.

bit3 to bit0 discrimination

bit7 to bit4 discrimination

Hexadecimal data

Display on theadjustment

remotecommander

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A (A)

B (b)

C (c)

D (d)

E (E)

F (F)

Bit valuesbit3or

bit70

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

bit2or

bit60

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

bit1or

bit50

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

bit0or

bit40

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

A

B

6-40

DSC-F828

3. Switch check (1)

Page 20 Address 80

Using method:1) Select page: 20, address: 80.2) Read the data. By discriminating the bit value of the data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.

FunctionPOWER switch (XPWER ON) (Control switch block (TOP))

Bit0

When bit value=1OFF

When bit value=0ON

4. Switch check (2)

Page 20 Address 90 to 96

Using method:1) Select page: 20, address: 90 to 96.2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the pressed key can be discriminated.

5. Switch check (3)

Page 60 Address B9

FunctionFLASH OPEN DETECT switch (LS-067 board S001)

When data = 11Close

When data = 01Open

Using method:1) Select page: 60, address: B9.2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.

Address

90(KEY AD0)(IC401 J6 )

91(KEY AD1)(IC401 H6 )

92(KEY AD2)(IC401 G6 )

93(KEY AD3 )(IC401 J7 )

94(KEY AD4)(IC401 H7 )

95(MODE DIAL 0)

(IC401 J8 )

96(MODE DIAL 1)

(IC401 J9 )

00 to 0BControl button

DOWN(Control switch

block (MID))S008

Control buttonRIGHT

(Control switchblock (MID))

S003

QUICK REVIEW(Control switchblock (UNDER))

S005

OPEN (FLASH)(SW-410 board)

(S001)

NIGHT SHOT/NIGHT FRAMING(SW-410 board)

(S007)

Mode dialSTILL (AE-S)(Control switchblock (TOP))

Mode dialSTILL (AUTO)(Control switchblock (TOP))

Data0C to 26

Control buttonUP


S006

Control buttonLEFT


S010

DIGITAL ZOOM(Control switchblock (UNDER))

S004

FLASH(SW-410 board)

(S002)

Mode dialSTILL (AE-A)(Control switchblock (TOP))

Mode dialSTILL (P AUTO)(Control switchblock (TOP))

27 to 47DISPLAY WINDOWBACKLIGHT

(Control switchblock (TOP))

S003

Control buttonCENTER


S007

SELF TIMER(Control switchblock (UNDER))

S003

METERING MODE(SW-410 board)

(S005)

Mode dialSTILL (MANUAL)(Control switchblock (TOP))

Mode dialPB


48 to 72WHITE

BALANCE(Control switchblock (TOP))

S004

AE LOCK(Control switchblock (MID))

S012

SCREEN STATUS(Control switchblock (UNDER))

S002

MACRO(SW-410 board)

(S003)

Mode dialSTILL (SCN)


Mode dialSET UP


73 to A4

EXPOSURE(Control switchblock (TOP))

S005

MENU(Control switchblock (MID))

S002

BURST/BRACKET(SW-410 board)

(S006)

Mode dialMOVIE


A5 to DCCOMPACT

FLASH(Control switchblock (UNDER))

S006

FINDER(Control switchblock (UNDER))

S001

FOCUS AUTO(SW-410 board)

(S004)

DD to FFMEMORY

STICK(Control switchblock (UNDER))

S006

No key input

LCD(Control switchblock (UNDER))

S001

FOCUS MANUAL(SW-410 board)

(S004)

No key input

No key input

No key input

6-41

DSC-F828

6. Switch check (4)

Page 80 Address 13

Using method:1) Select page: 80, address: 13.2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the state of the switches can be discriminated.

7. Switch check (5)

Page 80 Address 14

FunctionShutter button (XAE LOCK SW) (Control switch block (TOP))

Shutter button (XSHTR ON SW) (Control switch block (TOP))

When data = 00OFF

OFF

When data = 01ON

OFF

When data = 02ON

ON

Using method:1) Select page: 80, address: 14.2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.

8. Switch check (6)

Page 80 Address 15

FunctionCF COVER switch (Control switch block (CENTER))

When data = 00Open

When data = 01Close

Using method:1) Select page: 80, address: 15.2) By discriminating the data, the rotation of the control dial can be discriminated.

9. LED, Segment LCD check

Page 20 Address 04

Page 80 Address 12

Page 8E Address FE

Control dial (Control switch block (CENTER))When rotated in the left direction.

When rotated in the right direction.

Data01

02

Using method:1) Select page: 00, address: 01, set data: 01.2) Select page: 20, address: 04, set data: 02.3) Select page: 8E, address: FE, set data: 20.4) Select page: 80, address: 12, set data: 01.6) Check that all LED (Power, Charge, Tally, Access, Segment LCD back light) are lit.7) Select page: 20, address: 04, set data: 08.8) Check that all segment of the segment LCD are lit.9) Select page: 20, address: 04, set data: 00.10) Select page: 80, address: 12, set data: 00.11) Select page: 8E, address: FE, set data: 00.12) Select page: 00, address: 01, set data: 00.

6-42

DSC-F828

10. Record of Use check

Page 4F Address 94 to 97

Using method:1) The recording counter data is displayed at page: 4F, addresses: 94 to 97. These data are named D94, D95, D96 and D97 respectively.2) Calculate the recording counter (N) using following equation. (Hexadecimal calculation)

N = D97 + D96 × 100 + D95 × 10000 + D94 × 1000000

Address94

95

96

97

FunctionRecording counter

(Hexadecimal)

Remarks1000000-digit and 1000000-digit

1000000-digit and 10000-digit



11. Self Diagnostics Log check

Page 20 Address B0 to B8

*1: “C” t “01”, “E” t “03”

Using method:1) The self diagnostics log is displayed at page: 20, addresses: B0 to B5.

Note: These data will be erased when the lithium battery (LR-018 board) is removed.

AddressB0

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

Initial value00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

Function“Repaired by” code (Occurred 1st time) *1

“Block function” code (Occurred 1st time)

“Detailed” code (Occurred 1st time)

“Repaired by” code (Occurred 2nd time) *1

“Block function” code (Occurred 2nd time)

“Detailed” code (Occurred 2nd time)

“Repaired by” code (Occurred 3rd time) *1

“Block function” code (Occurred 3rd time)

“Detailed” code (Occurred 3rd time)

Take a copy of CAMERA COLORREPRODUCTION FRAME witha clear sheet for use.

— 43 —

DSC-F828

⟨FOR CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT⟩

For CAP-Normal mode

For CAP-Real mode

— 44E —

⟨AF ILLUMINATION FRAME⟩

DSC-F828

Take a copy of AFILLUMINATION FRAMEwith a clear sheet for use.